Matthias Schwarz
Progress in Mathematics Volume 111
j
Series Editors
J. Oesterle A. Weinstein
Morse Homology
,
,
~ ,i.X\
Birkhauser Verlag Basel· Boston' Berlin
__ ...... ¥ _ _ .,•• ,__ .
_
• _ _ • __
.~__
_ .. ..!!~!"""!!'1.
_ __
__.....
. ,,_..
_
....... J!!IJ!'I!'~'"
._.
n
..
..'i'-. .__.•.:i'!!':'!'i'i". •
•
.'-.~"t~
~~::;~fu~;~.·:.i,:;i'·0~j.i."":.::i'-'.;1'-'"·iH'~i!li:~,oj-:.i-~~~··iZ,i,'~~-',"i:·~,i,:i:~~1~~:~~<.i!;-r?,;,,~"'~~~~g~~"je_~-¥.i"e;;.;ry;~.0~~£~~g@~,~; ~'i-fJI'!'i";;::;.Ii.-::.-ii::iE.#;ry~~ii··~··.:·~:.··:~:;:i':;~_"";:~;:c:-;i"~~~~ ::O:.~!i'-~~i'~·:;~
Author: Matthias Schwarz ETH Zentrum Mathematik 8092 Ziirich Switzerland
Contents List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
viii
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Schwarz, Matthias, 1967 Morse homology I Matthias Schwarz. p. cm. - (Progress in mathematics; vol. 111)
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-8176-2904-1
1. Morse theory. 2. Homology theory. I. Title. Progress in mathematics (Boston, Mass.) ; vol. 111. QA331.S43 1993 515' .73 - dc20
1 Introduction 1.1
II. Series:
1.2
Deutsche Bibliothek Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Schwan, Matthias:
Morse homology I Matthias Schwarz. - Basel ; Boston ; Berlin
: Birkhauser, 1993 (Progress in mathematics ; Vol. 111) ISBN 3-7643-2904-1 (Basel ...) ISBN 0-8176-2904-1 (Boston) NE:GT
2 This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, re-use of illustrations, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in other ways, and storage in data banks. For imy kind of use permission of the copyright owner must be obtained. © 1993 Birkhauser Verlag Basel, P.O. Box 133, CH-4010 Basel, Switzerland
Camera-ready copy prepared by the author
Printed on acid-free paper produced of chlorine-free pulp
Printed in Germany
ISBN 3-7643-2904-1
ISBN 0-8176-2904-1
987654321·
1
1.1.1
Classical Morse Theory
1
1.1.2
Relative Morse Theory .
5
1.1.3
The Continuation Principle
7
...............
8
Overview 1.2.1
The Construction of the Morse Homology
1.2.2
The Axiomatic Approach
8 10
1.3
Remarks on the Methods
14
1.4
Table of Contents .
17
1.5
Acknowledgments.
18
The Trajectory Spaces 2.1
The Construction of the Trajectory Spaces.
21
2.2
Fredholm Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2.2.1
The Fredholm Operator on the Trivial Bundle
29
2.2.2
The Fredholm Operator on Non-Trivial Bundles
39
2.2.3
Generalization to Fredholm MJ.l.ps .
41
2.3
,.
Background . . . . . . . . . . .
Transversality
41
.
2.3.1
The Regularity Conditions
42
2.3.2
The Regularity Results
49
. . . . a"''''
IlonAnu
-----------,.-.
-"_.- _...---.--...-----....==..,,"',l'",""".. CONTENTS
vi
2.4
2.5
3.2
vii
5 Extensions
Compactness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
2.4.1 The Space of Unparametrized Trajectories.
52
5.1
Morse Cohomology
199
2.4.2 The Compactness Result for Unparametrized Trajectories 55
5.2
Poincare Duality
200
2.4.3 The Compactness Result for Homotopy Trajectories ..
63
5.3
Products.....
202
2.4.4 The Compactness Result for A-Parametrized Trajectories
67
Gluing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
2.5.1 Gluing for the Time-Independent Trajectory Spaces
68
2.5.2 Gluing of Trajectories of the Time-Dependent Gradient
Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
2.5.3 Gluing for A-Parametrized Trajectories. . . . . . . . ..
99
3 Orientation 3.1
CONTENTS
Orientation and Gluing in the Trivial Case
104
3.1.1 The Determinant Bundle
104
3.1.2 Gluing and Orientation for Fredholm Operators.
107
Coherent Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
3.2.1 Orientation and Gluing on the Manifold M
115
A Curve Spaces and Banach Bundles
A.l The Manifold of Maps P;;;(lR, M)
207
A.2 Banach Bundles on P;;;(lR, M) ..
214
B The Geometric Boundary Operator.
221
Bibliography
229
Index . . . . .
232
4 Morse Homology Theory
4.1
4.2
4.3
The Main Theorems of Morse Homology .
133
4.1.1
Canonical Orientations .
133
4.1.2 The Morse Complex . .
135
4.1.3 The Canonical Isomorphism .
140
4.1.4 Topology and Coherent Orientation
153
The Eilenberg-Steenrod Axioms . . . . . . .
163
4.2.1 Extension of Morse Functions and Induced Morse Func tions on Vector Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
4.2.2 The Homology Functor and Homotopy Invariance
169
4.2.3 Relative Morse Homology
180
4.2.4 Summary . . . .
193
The Uniqueness Result.
194
'\
. ' ~-' '._,
~"
'-,
',"~
'"
-
--rli
~"!!if~;!!.tk&H>~i~£it;b@!d:o#S:,~~:;;£&Y2;;t~...ji\>.!;!:!!:!!iL~""'~~~~'-~~~:~'~~-
LIST OF SYMBOLS (3+, (3
List of symbols iR .c(X; Y) F(X;Y) K(X;Y) S
A I;Cv epA
Det
R",
H 1,2(JR,JR n )
H I ,2 IR
2 L IR C~c
Co Coo
""~ pI,
"'f
M""y haf3
M xo:,Xj3 M
Haf3
Xet.,Y/3
h a {3 -f
M""y
9go Du 'Y. T = 'Yr
#p #0 ';....£! #p X
Affiax
compactification of JR to JR U {±oo} space of continuous linear Banach space operators space of Fredholm operators between Banach spaces space of compact operators set of non-degenerate, conjugated self-adjoint opera tors on JRn matrix-valued curves with ends within S set of special Fredholm operators equivalence class of operators from I;triv with fixed ends determinant space of a Fredholm operator surjectively extended Fredholm operator Sobolev space of curves square-integrable together with the first derivative Banach space of sections in a vector bundle on iR with H 1 ,2_ qu ality Banach space of sections with L 2-quality space of smooth mappings with Coo-compact-open topology smooth mappings with compact support iR-smooth curves with fixed ends x, y Banach manifold of HI,2-curves with fixed ends trajectory space associated to the time-independent gradient flow of a Morse function f trajectory space associated to the time-dependent gradient flow of a Morse homotopy A-parametrized trajectory space associated to a ho motopy of Morse homotopies Morse homotopy unparametrized trajectory space associated to timeindependent gradient flow Banach space of variations of the Riemannian metric differential DFu(O) of the Fredholm map + "il f) IDe in specific-.!..ocal coordinates on p~:~ time-shifting of a JR-curve gluing operation for trajectories pre-gluing of trajectories, etc. gluing operation for unparametrized trajectories short notation for the triple of a broken trajectory and a gluing parameter
(it
22 29 29 30 29 29 35 35 105 109 22
a[u,K] Ogeom[uxy ]
A
r CA
n
Critk! Ck(f) Ck(f,JA) Hk(f,JA)
24
v
25 61
h*TM h*V "il2 exP
41 22 24 21 21 21 21 54 45 75 52 68 71
89 73
e "ilt~
frequently used cut-off functions space of volume forms of a finite dimensional vector space coherent orientation of the Fredholm operator K along the curve u geometric orientation of a trajectory set of equivalence classes of Fredholm operators along curves transformation group for coherent orientations set of coherent orientations special natural isomorphism between orientations set of critical points of a Morse function f with fixed Morse index k k-th chain group generated by the elements of Critkf k-th relative chain group associated to an admissible pair of Morse functions k-th relative homology group of the relative Morse complex associated to (f,JA) injectivity domain within the tangent bundle with respect to the exponential map pull-back bundle with respect to the smooth curve h pull-back of the injectivity domain with respect to h fibre linearization of the exponential map with re spect to a Levi-Civita connection special bundle map on the tangent bundle associated to the Levi-Civita connection covariant time-derivative of a vector field along a curve
ix
71 104 129 222 129 129 129 127 135 135
184 184 211 211 211 215 215 215
--_____
-----=c---::--.,,=-.-____
__
_.
Chapter 1
Introduction 1.1
Background
The subject of this book is Morse homology as a combination of relative Morse theory and Conley's continuation principle. The latter will be used as an instrument to express the homology encoded in a Morse complex associated to a fixed Morse function independent of this function. Originally, this type 6f Morse-theoretical tool was developed by Andreas Floer in order to find a proof of the famous Arnold conjecture, whereas classical Morse theory turned out to fail in the infinite-dimensional setting. In this framework, the homological variant of Morse theory is also known as Floer homology. This kind of homology theory is the central topic of this book. But first, it seems worthwhile to outline the standard Morse theory.
1.1.1
Classical Morse Theory
The fact that Morse theory can be formulated in a homological way is by no means a new idea. The reader is referred to the excellent survey paper by Raoul Bott [Bol. The classical theory in its formulation by Marston Morse relates the analytic information by means of the critical set of the so-called Morse function to the global topology of the underlying manifold ( see [MI]). The local information about the critical points of a Morse function j E C<X> (M,IR) ("Morse" means dj mOM C T* M, Le. at each x E Crit j the Hessian H 2 j(x) is non-degenerate) is reflected by the Morse index,
p,(x) = dim Eig- H 2 j(x)
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
2
as the number of negative eigenvalues of the Hessian operator at x E Crit 1 counted with multiplicity. This relation between analysis and topology is ex pressed in the form of the so-called strong Morse inequalities: We denote the Betti numbers and numbers of critical points of index k by
13k = dimHk(M,JR) , k = 0, ... ,n = dimM ,
Ok = # Critd, Critkl = {x E Crit 1 I J.l(x) = k}, k = 0, ... , n
Then the following holds: Ck -
Cn -
+ Cn-l + Ck-l
± Co ± CO
;:?:
13k - f3k-l
+ ... ± 130 for k = 0, ... ,n -
1 and
X(M) .
The key observation which finally provides this result is the change of the homotopy type of the sublevel sets
I
M a = {x E M I(x) ~
a} ,
when a crosses a critical value. For each critical point x with I(x) = a, a cell of dimension J.l(x) is attached, when a crosses the value I(x), M a+ E ~ M a -
E
U e~(x)
U
xECritfnf- 1 (c)
Starting from the absolute minimum 1 , one obtains a cell decomposition of M up to homotopy equivalence,
U e~(x)
M ~
xECritf
The first steps toward an intrinsically defined Morse homology were taken successively by Thorn, Smale and Milnor (40's-60's) by not only taking into account the number and types of cells in the cell decomposition indexed by the critical points but also the attaching maps. Let us henceforth stick to the convention of considering the negative gradient flow
3
1.1. BACKGROUND
associated to the isolated 2 critical points x E Crit I. As early as the 1940's, R. Thorn recognized that the disjoint decomposition of the compact manifold M, M= WU(x) ,
U
xECritf
describes naturally the homotopically equivalent cell decomposition analysed in Morse theory. In fact, the unstable and stable manifolds are cells of dimension p(x) and n - J.l(x) , respectively, with tangent spaces
TxWU(x) = Eig- H 2 I(x)
and
Tx W 8 (x) = Eig+ H 2 I(x)
Unfortunately, this immediate cell decomposition does not represent directly a CW-complex, because in general the dynamical system might misbehave in such a way that the closure condition is not properly fulfilled. Nevertheless, in the 50's, S. Smale found the crucial condition for this gradient dynamical system 3 , which allows us to describe all ingredients of a Morse theoretical ho mology, namely, the critical points as generators and the attaching maps of the associated Morse complex as boundary relations in terms of the unsta ble and stable manifolds. He discovered that the requirement of transversal intersections WU(x) rh W 8 (y) for all x, y E Crit 1 appears as a generic condition for the dynamical system. For instance, one can always find a generic Riemannian metric on M. This is the so-called Morse Smale condition. Given this condition, it is immediate that WU(x)nW8(y) is a (lJ(x) - J.l(y))-dimensional manifold which intersects the hypersurface r1(a) for any regular value a E (J(y),/(x)) transversally. Seeing that 1-1(a) carries a natural orientation by -VI, one is able to define a number n(x, y) for pairs (x, y) E Crit 1 x Crit 1 with relative Morse index J.l(x) -J.l(y) = 1. n(x, y) is de fined as the intersection number of WU(x) and W 8(y) restricted to the niveau surface 1-1 (a). It is well-defined if we are provided with arbitrary orientations of the unstable manifolds WU(x) , x E Crit 1 which imply orientations of the complementary manifolds W8(X) given that M is oriented. In other terms, the short exact sequence
'ljJ:JRxM-7M ()
(1.1)
at'ljJ(t, x) = -V/('ljJ(t,x)) , 'ljJ(0,.) = idM
associated to a Morse function 1 on a compact, n-dimensional manifold M. Given this dynamical system, one is led to the stable and unstable manifolds
WU(X)={PEMI W 8 (x)={PEMI
lim 'ljJ(t,p)=x},
t--+-oo
lim'ljJ(t,p)=x}
t---++oo
1This exists if M is assumed to be compact or
f to be coercive, i.e. all Ma compact.
0-7 Tp(WU(x) n W 8 (y))
-7
TpWU(x) ED TpW 8 (y)
-7
TpM
-7
0 ,
associated to the transversal intersection
P E WU(x) n W 8 (y) n 1-1(a) , yields the characteristic intersection number n(x, y). These numbers happen to describe exactly the attaching maps for the cells within the Morse complex. 2by the above assumption of non-degeneracy
3generalized to gradient-like vectorfields
~-'---_._._----_
.. _---
~~~
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
4
This idea was taken up by J. Franks in [FrJ. In his paper he dealt with these attaching maps in terms of the Thom-Pontryagin construction. Thus one is able to define the following chain complex. The chain groups, graded by means of the Morse index, are defined as the free Abelian groups rit k! k -- , . . . ,n, J , Ck (f) -- a'7lC
°
generated by the critical points x E Critkf. The boundary operator 8 k Ck(f) ---+ Ck-1(f) is defined by (1.2)
8k X =
L
n(x,y)y, xECritkf·
yECritk_tf
The key observation is that the associated homology Hk(C*(f),8) , k = 0, ... ,n, recovers the standard homology of the underlying compact manifold. For a fruitful application of this interrelation, the reader is referred to the fa mous h-cobordism theorem, see [M2J. This isomorphism theorem for homology theories immediately implies the strong Morse inequalities. In fact, this is the essence of classical Morse theory, and the homological formulation is assigned to Thom, Smale and Milnor in equal parts. In 1982, E. Witten (see [W]) rediscovered this way ofrecovering the (co- )homology of the underlying manifold by solely taking into account the critical points of a Morse function, which are graded by their Morse index, and the isolated connecting orbits between those points of relative index 1, provided that the Morse-Smale condition holds. With this observation, Andreas Floer is said to have been led to the idea of considering Morse theory in thoroughly relative terms. Note that the above homology groups are constructed merely on the basis of non-degenerate critical points of a functional, which are graded by some Morse index, together with the information about the sets Mt,y of connecting orbits with relative index 1. Up to this moment the latter has been described in terms of the entire global gradient flow, M~,y
== WU(x) rtl W 8 (y) .
Also the proof of the fundamental isomorphism result, H*(C*(f),8)~H*(M) ,
relies on the analysis of the cell decomposition of the manifold based on the global gradient flow where M is assumed to be compact. In fact, it is largely due to Andreas Floer that the essential ingredients of this Morse homology can be extracted from the spaces of connecting orbits, the so-called trajectory spaces, in a completely relative way. Counting the isolated trajectories between the critical points x and y yields the intersection number n(x,y) within (1.1).
••• _,-,~~--
·~!!ii1?¥-~-Q:'iJ;l·i?Zi"g.-ii!~~~'MP.J?'¥g:':"""""=~'~
-~'~"";;:W@=h_];;;~:ik~
5
1.1. BACKGROUND
1.1.2
Relative Morse Theory
The prime motivation for the development of a purely relative concept of Morse theory is rooted in the existence problem of periodic solutions for a time-dependent Hamiltonian system considered under the non-degeneracy as sumption. For a detailed presentation of this subject leading to the so-called Floer homology, the reader is referred to [McD], [S], [S-ZlJ and [S-Z2J. The variational approach consists of restating the existence problem of solutions of a differential equation as an existence problem of critical points of an appro . priate functional. This functional ought to be related to the topology of the underlying spaces in a more obvious way. It is well known from the classi cal theory that Marston Morse applied it to the existence problem of closed geodesics as critical points of the energy functional
(-y:
2
8 1 ---+ M)
Eb) = [ !i'(t)1 dt
f-4
lSl
defined on an appropriate space of loops in the manifold M. Hence, one is naturally led to try to use these methods equally for the action functional A associated to the above Hamiltonian system,
Ab) =
J -1
1
i*w
H(t, 'Y(t)) dt
D2
with respect to the symplectic form wand i : D 2 ---+ M,
il8D2
= 'Y : 8 1 ---+
M
One introduces an L 2 -scalar product on the vector spaces playing the role of tangent spaces to the loop space on which the functional A is defined. Then the zeroes of the gradient of A due to this scalar product can immediately be identified with the solutions of the Hamiltonian equation via (1.3)
gradAb) = J(i' -
XHo
'Y)
where • X H is the Hamiltonian vector field depending explicitly and periodically on the time t with period 1, and • J is an almost complex structure associated to the Hamiltonian system with the symplectic structure w .
The standard approach, however, which aims at the application of classical Morse theory in the infinite-dimensional setting, fails for the following reasons.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
6
1.1. BACKGROUND
First, unlike the energy functional, the action is unbounded below and above 4 , such that there is no absolute minimum with which to start a Morse complex in the sense of a cellular decomposition. Second, and even more striking, is the lack of a finite Morse index. The subspaces on which the Hessian operator is maximally positive and negative definite are both of infinite dimensions. Finally, the most natural candidate for a gradient of this action functional, grad A as mentioned above, does not even give rise to a well-defined flow on the loop space in question. This gradient behaves in a so-called unregularized way.
1.1.3
u : lR
X
81
-+
M,
lim u(s,')
s ......±oo
= xC),
First, one has to choose a time-independent Morse function HO on the given compact manifold small enough in the C 2 -norm, so that there are no l-periodic solutions of the Hamilton equation
-y(t) = JV'H°('Y(t)) , (note that XHo(t,p) = JV'HO(t,p) ) apart from the constant ones, namely the critical points of HO. Actually, the Morse homology associated to HO is naturally isomorphic to the Floer ho mology of HO by this identification (for a generic J). Conley's continuation principle is now integrated by the observation that any generic homotopy be tween HO and an arbitrary fixed Hamiltonian induces a unique isomorphism for the associated Floer homology groups in a canonical way, Le. independent of the concrete choice of the homotopy. Additionally, one obtains the following functorial behaviour for these isomorphisms 4'>,80: : HF.(Ho:) ~ HF.(H,8) between the homology groups for the Hamiltonians Ho: and H,8:
y(.) respectively,
tsu(s,t)+J:tu(s,t)-JXH(t,u(s,t)) = 0,
Floer was able to handle finite-dimensional solution sets Mx,y, which in Morse theoretical terms describe exactly the 'trajectory spaces' of connecting orbits between fixed critical points x and y. In fact, equation (1.4) might be restated formally using (1.3) as
asa u + grad A
0
The Continuation Principle
The second fundamental part of the homology theory, besides the idea of rel
ativity in Morse theory, is the continuation principle. This aspect has been
investigated by Charles Conley in order to describe the topological type of
invariant sets of flows in a way which is invariant under continuous deforma
tions of the whole system. Concerning this topic the reader is referred to [C)
and [C-ZJ. The continuation principle appears as an essential idea within the
, theory of the Conley index. Due to this principle Floer was able to relate his
homology theory based on the periodic solutions of a fixed Hamiltonian system
to the topology of the underlying manifold. The idea proved very transparent.
Yet there is still hope for Morse theory. Namely, Andreas Floer recognized that in this situation all essential conditions for a Morse theory reduced to a purely relative version are fulfilled. This means a restriction to the relative gradient flow, i.e. a flow between fixeq critical points x and y as limit sets, and to a relative Morse index which, roughly speaking, measures something like a codimension of the 'unstable manifold' of y with respect to the 'unstable manifold' of x. Here, we take the classical Morse theory considered above as a finite-dimensional model. This relative Morse index turns out to be finite. Setting up the nonlinear partial differential equation
(1.4)
7
,(1.5)
4'>"1,804'>,80:
= 4'>"1'"
and
4'>",,,,
= idHF.(Ha )
•
,'Therefore, the family
u = 0
I
{H F.(H",) H", an admissible Hamiltonian for Floer homology } Floer identified the local dimension of these trajectory spaces Mx,y as the appropriate relative Morse index within this setting. The Mx,y prove to be manifolds provided that one is given a generic J. Using this relative grading on the set of critical points for the action functional and the sets of isolated connecting orbits 5 , he found all ingredients for a homological concept known today as Floer homology.
together with these canonical isomorphisms forms what Conley named a con nected simple system. By means of these isomorphisms one can carry out an inverse limit process and obtain the Floer homology H F. (M) explicitly inde pendent of the concrete Hamiltonian. This is the continuation principle which provides homology groups intrinsically independent of a special Hamiltonian. Recalling that the time-independent Morse function HO considered above es tablishes the normal homology of M, provided that M is compact, it is now obvious that by Conley's continuation principle the Floer homology reproduces the ordinary homological information about M.
4N ote that the first term in the formula for A describes the area enclosed by "I measured with sign. 5The local dimensions of the trajectory manifolds lead to such a well-defined relative grading only if certain conditions on the topology of the underlying manifold are fulfilled. Therefore, the Arnold conjecture still remains unproven in strict generality.
Actually, this very inventive and fruitful theory by Andreas Floer not only concerns the Arnold conjecture on symplectic manifolds but was also \
'f,
c.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION transferred successfully to 3-dimensional topology. Specifically this abstract method based on relative Morse theory and the continuation principle by Con ley can be applied to the Chern-Simons functional in 3-dimensional gauge field theory thus leading to the instanton homology (see [F4]), which is often denoted by Floer homology, also.
1.2
Overview
The main significance of this study, entitled 'Morse homology', is that it gives a presentation of a homological concept of Morse theory in strict analogy with Floer homology. Therefore it may serve as a finite-dimensional model. The results are based principally on the same methods and techniques and the prime emphasis lies on the detailed presentation of the underlying analysis. A survey of the analytic programme will be given in the next section on 'Remarks on the Methods'. Since the organization of this work is primarily governed by this analytic programme, the following overview is intended to convey an idea of the logical approach to the Morse homology rather than give a mere outline of the contents. The latter is postponed to the end of the introduction. Notwithstanding the first remark, the subject of this study is not only a finite-dimensional modelling of Floer homology. It also provides a con struction of Morse homology as an axiomatic homology theory. This means an axiomatic theory in the sense of Eilenberg and Steenrod (see [E-S]). As a con sequence of this axiomatic approach one immediately obtains the uniqueness result for Morse homology, that is a natural equivalence to any other axiomatic homology theory which is defined on the same suitably large category of topo logical spaces, like for instance singular theory. The advantage of this result based on the axiomatic approach is that, in contrast to the classical investiga tions by Thom, Smale and Milnor, it is valid also for non-compact manifolds and for all Morse functions simultaneously. The latter in particular is due to Conley's continuation principle.
9
1.2. OVERVIEW words, we shall deduce the identity
a2 X =
L
L
(az ,y}(ay ,x}z = 0
l'(z)=I'(y)+lI'(Y)=I'(x)+l
directly from the analysis of the trajectory spaces for arbitrary smooth mani folds, without assuming orientability, and for general coefficients. The fact that Witten's idea of counting the isolated trajectories of the negative gradient flow (1.1) leads to a a-operator of descending degree 1, relies on the R-symmetry of the trajectory spaces with respect to time-shifting. /,(. + T) yields a new tra jectory with the same endpoints, provided that they are different. Hence, one obtains a set of isolated trajectories (modulo time-shifting) for relative Morse index 1. In the second step we shall introduce Conley's continuation princi ple. Motivated by the classical observation that the Morse complex for any Morse function on a compact manifold recovers the standard homology of the manifold, one is naturally inclined to search for an isomorphism between the graded homology groups associated to two different Morse functions. More over, similar to the canonical a-operator, the isomorphism should arise from a given pair of Morse functions in a canonical way. In fact, this can be verified if we consider the isolated trajectories for the time-dependent gradient field (1.6)
7 = -"Vht
where
r
O/, ,
~ f{3
is a (nearly arbitrary) homotopy between the two Morse functions. Since, due •to explicit dependence on the time t, the solution curves of (1.6) are no longer endowed with time-shifting invariance, we exactly obtain isolated trajectories under generic conditions for critical endpoints X a E Crit rand x{3 E Crit f{3 with relative Morse index
J1(X a )-J1(X{3} =0 .
in formal analogy with the definition of the a-operator we can thus define the
1.2.1
The Construction of the Morse Homology
Before we present the actual axiomatic approach to Morse homology we shall first outline the development of the Morse homology groups themselves. The first step is to define the canonical chain complex associated to any fixed Morse function. This complex, which has been related to the strong Morse inequalities in the previous section, is called the Morse complex C*(f} of f. In constrast to the treatment by Thom, Smale, Milnor and Witten, we shall prove the fundamental complex property, 2 = 0, intrinsically. In other
a
pomomorphism (1.7)
et>{3a xa
=
L
n(x Cll x{3)x{3
I'(Xi3)=I'(X o )
by counting the isolated connecting orbits in an appropriate way. This is the . . candidate for a morphism between the chain complexes C*(fa) and C*(f{3),
which complies with the grading. Hence, there are two items to be analysed. First, one has to show that this homomorphism commutes with the a-operators associated to fa and f{3. Second, one has to verify that the induced homomor phism et>ea between the associated graded homology groups does not depend On the choice of the homotopy h t .
.'."-'--'--'.
---- -----_._._,-,..
; -----.
--.~=-"~j;.~""~,"~"''''--==:;-~"","",=--==-,,~-''~"--_.-.~~==~~~~
__
~~~~----¥i~if¥.'~~·~~
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
10
Quite interesting and revealing may be the fact that both aspects are treated by means of exactly the same techniques which are used for the proof of the (0 2 = O)-relation. In fact, given two different homotopies h~ and hl between rand ff3, we choose a suitable homotopy hO t
Hio.
hi
t
,..!,
introducing an additional parameter >. E [0,1] for the analysis. If we consider the trajectories of the associated >.-parametrized and explicitly time-dependent gradient flow we shall obtain isolated trajectories for the relative Morse index -1. Actually, referring to the analogous definition of a homomorphism like in (1.2) and (1.7) we shall be led to a chain homotopy operator, from which we can conclude that both homotopies, h~ and hl, induce the same morphism on the level of the homology groups. Altogether, the induced morphism ~~a : H. (fa) ----l H.(ff3) fits in with the concept of Conley's continuation principle as presented by (1.5) in the previous section. The equivalence relation
{X a } rv {xf3} ~ ~~a{Xa}
=
{xf3}
on the family
Morse function. By reverse arguing, this concentration, organized as a limit process, always allows us to choose specific Morse functions, which fit the given situation best, and to control any change of the function in a unique manner without deviating from a fixed equivalence class [{ x a }]. The following Morse functions, which are provided in a natural way on products and bundles with the local structure of a product, are of capital importance: If we are given manifolds (M, f) and (N, g) endowed with arbitrary Morse functions, then the operation (f E9 g)(m, n) = f(m) + g(n) yields a Morse function on M x N and analogously in the case of a local product structure. The particular Morse function f E9 9 obviously implies the identification (1. 10) Critn(f E9 g) = Critkf x Crit(n_k)g .
U
O";:k~n
· Actually, this fundamental operation for Morse functions not only gives rise as a key feature to the entire functorial concept, it also forms the base for product operations within the (co- )homology theory which we wish to develop. The · latter statement refers to the identity for the tensor chain complex
C(f) ® G.(g)
= G.(f E9 g) ,
Morse function on M}
gives rise to the definition of Morse homology groups independent of a fixed Morse function, (1.8) HMorse(M) = (H. (fa)){fO}/ rv (3o • •
<1>.
We recall that that these homology groups are well-defined on arbitrary smooth manifolds provided that we consider Morse functions to be smooth functions f E GOO(M, IR) with non-degenerate critical points and compact sublevel sets
Ma
=
{x EM
I f(x)
~
a}, a E IR ;
that is in short:
1.2.2
11
which is concluded from (1.10).
(H. (fa)) {fa
(1.9)
'1.2. OVERVIEW
f E GOO(M, IR), df
mOM c
T· M and
f coercive
The Axiomatic Approach
Let us now sketch a portrait of the functorial and axiomatic treatment of Morse homology. The fundamental idea behind this approach is based upon the concentration of the Morse homology by means of the continuation principle, thus providing homology groups which are explicitly independent of a certain
Relative Morse Homology and the Excision Axiom
In order to develop an axiomatic homology theory we first have to begin with relative homology associated to a pair of manifolds, (M, A), where A forms a submanifold of M. Regarding the homotopy invariance restated below as the homotopy axiom we may restrict our treatment to open submanifolds, as any closed submanifold is equipped with an open tubular neighbourhood. We shall remain in analogy with the construction of the singular relative homology groups by means of suitable quotient complexes. Hence, we need an appropriate representation of subcomplexes in terms of a Morse complex. Essentially, this is provided by a restriction of the given Morse function to a subset of !'vI, which COntains the critical points of the subcomplex in question and from which no trajectories of the negative gradient flow emanate. Hence, we take functions as 8Q-.called relative Morse functions on admissible pairs of manifolds, such that the gradient field restricted to oA forms an outward pointing normal field. From this we shall derive graded relative homology groups H.(M, A) together with the axiomatically required long exact homology sequence. Since for the definition of H. (M, A) we only need to know the Morse function of M on a · neighbourhood of M\A together with the transversality of the gradient with respect to oA, the excision axiom is verified immediately according to the construction.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
12
13
OVERVIEW
The Functorial Property
. The Homotopy Axiom and the Dimension Axiom
The functorial behaviour of the Morse homology, however, cannot be deduced directly from the definition. It is clear that arbitrary smooth maps between manifolds do not preserve the properties of a Morse function as specified in (1.9). Actually, it is at this stage that we have to refer to the facilities provided by the independence from the actual Morse function as mentioned above. In the first place, let us restrict ourselves to closed embeddings,
Finally, we finish this outline of the axiomatic approach with some remarks on the remaining two axioms. Regarding the homotopy axiom, this is immediately deduced from the continuation principle. Actually, the entire construction of . the Morse homology is based upon the invariance under homotopy via the identification isomorphisms ~eo.. Thus it is sufficient to consider homotopies of closed embeddings which give rise to homotopies of Morse functions.
cp:M~N
.
As a consequence, we obtain a chain homomorphism CP. between suitable Morse complexes in the following way. Let f be an arbitrary Morse func tion on M and let v be the normal bundle of the closed submanifold cp(M). Then the embedding cp and the Morse function q\O(m) (x)
= (x, x) \O(m)
defined by means of any fiberwise Riemannian metric on the bundle v give rise to a Morse function (1.11 )
cp~f(cp(m),x) = f(m)
+ q\O(m) (x)
Perhaps more novel and interesting is the investigation of the dimen sion axiom. Let us first review the framework for the Morse complex as it was 8llalysed by Smale and Witten. They assumed the underlying manifold to be . eompact and orientable. As a consequence they obtained a complex both for the Morse function f and for - f, that is to say that they were able to consider the ascending and the descending boundary operator on equal terms. In fact, based upon these assumptions for M one naturally recovers the symmetry known as . poincare duality. This symmetry is abolished immediately if one generalizes for non-compact manifolds or coefficients in Z in the non-orientable case. We observe that in general the right behaviour as homology theory, i.e. concerning the descending boundary operator for the negative gradient flow, is related to the coercivity of f as stated in (1.9). Obviously, any continuous function on a compact manifold is coercive. In summary it can be stated that coercivity is the crucial feature which underlies the dimension axiom, that is to say,
on the normal bundle v in the way that has been described above, and we obtain a canonical identification Crit.(cp~f) =
Referring to similar investigations by means of the product property (1.10) this functorial concept may be extended to projections M xN
--+
N .
Then, finally, the homology functor for arbitrary smooth maps cp : M general is obtained from the factorization (1.12)
cp = (id, cp)
~ Z ,
if M is pathwise connected.
Crit.f
Now considering a tubular neighbourhood of cp(M), we are supplied with a function which can be extended to a Morse function on the entire manifold N, such that the Morse complex of f forms a subcomplex of C.(cp.f) up to identification. Hence, every closed embedding induces a chain homomorphism for Morse homology.
'[ff2 :
Hrt°rse(M,z)
--+
N in
Products and Further Extensions As we have observed above, the natural operation f EB g for Morse functions .in some local framework plays a crucial role within this kind of Morse homol ogy theory. It is thus quite revealing to see that this feature gives rise to a tich variety of extensions to further items of algebraic topology, for example to product operations. Making use of the well-known dualization concept by means of the hom-functor, which provides a cohomology theory starting from chain complexes, together with the corresponding functorial behaviour with respect to the diagonal map 6.:M~MxM
we recover the construction of the cup-product. 0 '[ff2
into the closed embedding of the graph manifold and the projection.
At the end of this chapter we shall give a brief outlook on the pos sibilities of the treatment of features like the Thom class or the Euler class
14
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
associated to a vector bundle within the framework ofthe Morse (co-)homology theory. This possibility is due to the concept of relative Morse functions. If we are given any vector bundle 1f : E ~ M endowed with a Riemannian metric, the latter gives rise to the fiberwise quadratic, decreasing function
-qm(X)
=
-(x, x)m, 1f(x)
= mE
M .
Combining this function with any arbitrary Morse function f on the base M we obtain a relative Morse function fEB (-q) for the pair (E, E\{O}). Then the natural identification Critd 9! Critn+kf EB (-q) should yield the starting point from which one can develop further elements of algebraic topology concerned with vector bundles.
1.3
Remarks on the Methods
As we have already mentioned, the essence of this treatise on Morse homology is the methodical relation to Floer homology. The main techniques which will appear within the analysis refer to Banach calculus on Banach spaces and Ba nach manifolds, for example the fundamental contraction mapping principle, as well as to Fredholm theory, which means either the theory of linear Fredholm operators or of nonlinear Fredholm maps. The framework for this calculus is typically infinite-dimensional. The purpose is to give a largely self-contained presentation. We also add a detailed deduction for the infinite-dimensional Ba nach manifolds which arise during the discussion and for which it is particularly troublesome to give an appropriate reference. Before we come to a listing of the analytic programme which ought to serve as Ariadne's thread through the labyrinth of infinite-dimensional analysis, we first give an outline of the prime investigations. The main interest of this approach to Morse homology in contrast to earlier treatments is the analysis of the trajectory spaces of negative gradient flow. Instead of analysing such spaces geometrically as transversal intersection manifolds WU(x) rl1 W8(y), we shall treat them as zero sets of a nonlinear operator
(1.13)
F=
() {)t
.
+ V' f : 'Y f---' 'Y + V' f
0
'Y
on a Banach manifold p~:~ of curves. This happens in strict analogy to Floer's manifolds of instantons. In our case p~:~ denotes the Hilbert manifold of H 1 ,2_ curves6 'Y : lR U {±oo} -------> M 6These are square integrable together with the first weak derivative.
15
1.3. REMARKS ON THE METHODS with fixed endpoints
')'(-oo)=X, ')'(+oo)=y. It forms the infinite-dimensional fundamental space for our analysis. Now, exactly like in the case ofthe nonlinear Cauchy-Riemann oper a.tor with the additional Hamiltonian term in Floer's approach, the linearization of the elliptic operator F turns out to be of Fredholm type. This is largely due to the asymptotic ellipticity provided by the non-degeneracy of the Hessians a.t the critical endpoints. The crucial observation which gives rise to relative Morse theory is the statement that the local index of F is given by the relative Morse index J-L(x) - J-L(Y). This follows from the analysis of the spectral flow of the linearization of V' f as the curve between the Hessians H 2 f(x) and HZ f(y) with values in the set of endomorphisms in the pull-back bundle of TM along the trajectory')'. The next step is to identify the classical Morse-Smale condition as the regularity of the zero section as a value for the non-linear operator F. Thus, provided a generic Riemannian metric, we can conclude the manifold property of the trajectory space M!,y = F-1(O) from the implicit function theorem. The convincing advantage of this Banach calculus is expressed as the fact that the analogous results on the trajectory spaces for the time-dependent gradient flow follow directly from a simple and immediate generalization of F to () {)t
+ V'h t
We will recognize that these analytical methods allow us to unify the proofs of • the chain complex identity
{)2
• the chain morphism identity
=0
{){3if!{3a
• and the chain homotopy identity
=
ifJ{3a{)a
{){3iJJ{3cx - iJJ{3CX{)CX = if!fa - ifJg
a
to a large extent. The intrinsic deduction of these three fundamental identities is a consequence of the study of the respective trajectory spaces. That study will involve the questions of "compactness" "gluing" and "orientation" for the totality of the trajectory spaces
{ M!,y I (x, y) E Crit f x Crit f} . We shall obtain the above three identities from discussions of coherent orienta tions on all these trajectory spaces and of cobordism relations with respect to these orientations. In fact "compactness" and "gluing" are complementary con cepts which yield the result that the trajectory manifolds without boundary 7 7with respect to the H 1 ,2_topo!ogy
,
"_~~::-..::;,;.;=.:~",,-====:~_~=:.::.=:;-.;;,;c.-.,,,,=..::;==--,=-:;::::-.=.=-=~=="'=-:='-=~;::;-"'::":.;'.:===
16
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
M~,y are compact up to the splitting-up of trajectories, that is, up to the exis tence of sequences which converge to so-called broken trajectories in the Cl~ topology. These are tuples (Ul, ... , U.,) of trajectories from lower-dimensional trajectory spaces with coinciding critical endpoints,
Ui(+OO)=Ui+l(-OO) for i=1, ... ,IJ-l and Ul(-OO) =X, U.,(+oo) =y . "Gluing" amounts to exactly the reverse process, namely to mapping such broken trajectories equipped with an additional suitable parametrization into the appropriate higher-dimensional trajectory space,
1.4. TABLE OF CONTENTS
17
[F3] , [F5], [F6], [McD], [S], [S-ZI] and [S-Z2]. Whereas in these treatments only Floer homology groups with coefficients in Z2 are considered, a new joint paper [F-H], by Floer and Hofer, presents the method of the so-called coherent orientation of certain Fredholm operators, which allows one to generalize the theory for coefficients in Z. After these remarks on the methods we now present the fundamental . analytic programme which is exactly the same as for Floer homology: 1. analytical setup, definition of the trajectory spaces
2. analysis of the index problem
Mx,y x My,z
3
(u,v)
1-+
U#pV E
Mx,z, P ~ Po ,
such that the sequences (u#PnV)nEN with Pn - t 00 correspond exactly to the aforementioned obstructions to compactness. This complementarity of glu ing and compactness engenders a cobordism relation between the trajectory manifolds in the sense of the Cl~-topology. Especially for isolated trajectories, compactness guarantees that there are only finitely many trajectories to count. Finally, 'coherent orientation' describes an orientation concept for these trajectory spaces which is respected by those cobordisms. This concept is based upon analysis of the so-called determinant bundle, which is a line bundle on the topological space of Fredholm operators for given fixed Hilbert spaces. The idea is to generalize the classical notion of the orientation of a finite dimensional manifold within this special framework of Fredholm maps. Since the tangent spaces of the trajectory manifolds may be identified with the kernels of the linearized Fredholm sections F, this new concept also yields an orien tation for an appropriate composite of kernel and cokernel of a non-surjective Fredholm operator. Thus, orientations of trajectory spaces are well-defined even if no regularity (Le. the property of being a manifold) is guaranteed. This turns out to be exactly the right concept for an oriented cobordism analysis. We thus obtain the proofs for the above three fundamental identities by means of a calculus of oriented cobordisms for the trajectory spaces associ ated to the negative gradient flow of a Morse function. Moreover, it is worth mentioning that the class of Fredholm operators which after trivialization are of the type
~ . H 1,2(JR JRn) at + A . ,
-t
L 2 (JR JRn)
"
A(±oo) has real non-zero eigenvalues, forms the key feature for the entire methodological foundation of this approach to Morse homology. Discussions of the analogous analysis of the Floer type instanton spaces, which correspond to the trajectory spaces, can be found in [Fl], [F2],
3. transversality: regularity results 4. compactness 5. gluing 6. coherent orientation.
1.4
Table of Contents
As a guide to the reader, we once again briefly sum up the contents of the monograph: Chapter 2 comprises the entire analytical work on the trajectory spaces except for the orientation problem. The organization is firmly related to the above analytic programme. The purpose is to develop the complementarity concept of compactness and gluing as described above. Section 2.1 contains the construction of the trajectory spaces as zero sets of appropriate sections in Banach bundles on Banach manifolds of curves. Section 2.2 analyses the . Fredholm property of these sections and identifies the Fredholm index as the relative Morse index by means of the spectral flow. Section 2.3 is devoted to ·the transversality problem. The regularity result is obtained from a parameter version of the theorem of Sard-Smale. Section 2.4 gives an account of the effect ·of splitting up of trajectories as an obstruction to the strong compactness of the trajectory spaces. This gives the first half of the crucial complementarity of compactness and gluing. Section 2.5 establishes gluing as the reverse operation ·by means of the Banach contraction mapping principle and finally yields the first basic results on the cobordism relations among the trajectory spaces. Chapter ,3 on the subject of orientation, is separated from Chapter 2 on trajectory spaces because of its methodical complexity. In this chapter we shall develop an orientation concept for Fredholm operators which generalizes the notion of the orientation of a finite-dimensional manifold, so that together
:,:::::.'::::","::::::':;;'~:,'.:"'"::~~~:::::,:=.:-:,:::=---=:==::'"~::~::::,.:.:"-.:.~:~~:=:"~:;;:--~'===-~=:::::::.:==:::~::::::::--':'.::.::-':::::"'-:"":'::~::::====-===-=.~~
18
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
1.5. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
19
with the outcome of Chapter 2 we obtain a theory of oriented cobordisms for our trajectory manifolds.
them I am especially grateful to Stefan Handzsuj, Claudia Putz, Prof. Gordon Wassermann, Tilmann Wurzbacher and to Birkhauser Verlag.
Chapter 4 finally contains the main proofs for the construction of Morse homology. Section 4.1 is devoted to the three fundamental identities stated above, which are proved by means of the oriented cobordisms calculus. In Section 4.2 we go through the axioms of Eilenberg and Steenrod and fi nally come to the uniqueness result in Section 4.3, where the link to any other standard homology theory is established.
Zurich, April 1993
Chapter 5 presents an account of the possibilities for recovering the product operations and the naturally present Poincare duality. Finally, in this chapter we give an outlook on possible further developments toward algebraic topology on vector bundles. Chapter A of the appendix gives all the technical details which are necessary to construct and handle the Banach manifold of curves P;:~ to gether with some Banach bundles on P;:~ which turn up within the analysis of trajectory spaces. Chapter B, finally, is intended to yield the missing link between the geometrical definition of the boundary operator according to Thorn, Smale, Milnor and Witten and the definition within this present work. There we verify the equivalence of the coherent orientation concept with the classical concept of transversal intersection of the unstable and stable manifolds for the gradient flow WU(x) rh W8(y), as far as the trajectory manifolds are concerned.
1.5
Acknowledgments
The author was partially supported by DAAD-Procope and the Graduiertenkol leg 'Geometrie und Mathematische Physik' at the Ruhr-Universitat Bochum. This monograph is an outgrowth of my diploma thesis completed in January 1992 under the direction of Prof. H. Hofer at the Ruhr-Universitat Bochum. I am very much indebted to my teachers Helmut Hofer and Ralph Stocker, from whom I learned much of this material and whose stimulating courses have generated great enthusiasm for the subject. I would like to express my deep gratitude to Professors Hofer and E. Zehnder for convincing me to publish this work and for their constant encouragement and invaluable support. I am also very grateful to Martin Reimann at the University of Bern for his warm hospitality and his stimulating interest. I profited from innumerable discussions with friends and colleagues. I am particularly indebted to Dietmar Salamon, Graeme Segal, Jurgen Jost and Norbert A'Campo for their advice and encouragement. Many people generously devoted considerable time and effort to reading the manuscript and helping me improve the exposition. Among
Matthias Schwarz
~-=:::::=::==:=:-=.:: . .::::::=.::.:====:::.:::==--=----=..-:='==::-":::======-~.-':::='::':::=:=:""~
_n
~.:============::;:--====:::.-=.:-.:;==::::::====,;:.:::::==:.::.:.=
Chapter 2
ccThe Trajectory Spaces 2.1
The Construction of the Thajectory Spaces
In this chapter we shall construct the trajectory manifolds needed for the def inition of Morse homology. These trajectory spaces associated to the negative gradient flow correspond to the moduli spaces and instanton manifolds in Floer . homology theory. In the most general form appearing in the following analysis, these trajectory spaces are composed of the solutions of the non-autonomous ordinary differential equation
(2.1)
.
'}'=-
'Vh t
VI + \h \21'Vh \2
o'}'
t
t
Tbe scaling factor in the denominator has been chosen in order to guarantee compactness in the case of time dependency (see the section on 'compactness'). To give a preview, the following trajectory spaces will be investigated: • The time-independent case ht == 1 yields the negative gradient flow of I. It serves to define the a-operator in the Witten complex. The time-independent trajectory spaces are denoted by M~,y. • The time-dependent case of a Morse homotopy (see Definition 2.40)
r
h nfl
& 113
with fth~{3 = 0 for ItI ~ R will be studied in order to construct the transformation homomorphisms ll 13a which provide the means for identi fying homology groups associated to different Morse functions. Analogous
22
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
to the time-independent case, we denote these time-dependent trajectory h a /3 spaces by M Xa ,x/3'
2.1. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
Lemma 2.2 For each junction fECI (iR, IR) there is a constant c(f) > 0, such that the following estimate holds:
• Finally, we shall analyze the parametrized case of the so-called A-para metrized trajectory spaces used to define the chain homotopy operator, Le. Ha/3 M Xa ,Yf3
_ -
{
(A,')')
where Ha.{3 :' [0, 1] x IR x M homotopies.
H~f3,xf3' A E [0,1] } I ')' E M Xa --+
,
IR is a generic homotopy of Morse
1f'(t)l:(
c(f)
for all t E IR .
3
(1 + t 2)2
Proof. Due to the definition we have able to choose c(f) to be
f
0
h -1 E C 1 ([ -1, 1], IR). Hence, we are
c(f) = sup l(foh- 1 [-l,lJ
By close analogy to Floer homology we shall employ methods for the analysis of the required properties which basically rely on the calculus of Fredholm operators and their orientation. In order to obtain the results about the trajectory spaces in an ana lytical way they will be equipped with a local Banach space structure. In fact, we will represent them as sub-manifolds of suitable Banach manifolds. On the one hand, with respect to the Fredholm operators mentioned above, it seems worthwhile to study a local H 1,2(1R, IRn )-structure. On the other hand, we are interested in compact IR-curves, that is to say in mappings with lim ')'(t) = x and resp. y EM t-+±oo
')':IR--+M
Therefore, it is with respect to endpoints x, y E M chosen in a specific way that we shall construct the Banach manifolds P1;~ with H 1 ,2 (IR, IRn )-structure on which the entire calculus is founded. It should be emphasized that due to this differentiable structure these manifolds of maps cannot be identified with sub spaces of the Hilbert manifold H 1 ,2 ([0, 1], M) of which the reader familiar with Klingenberg's variational approach to the geodesic problem might be reminded. Definition 2.1 We compactify IR as iR = lRU{ ±oo} equipped with the structure of a bounded manifold by the requirement that h:
{
iR
--+
t
f--->
[-1,1] t
C~y
= C~y(iR, M) = { U
Owing to this differentiable structure on iR we obtain the following character ization of the asymptotic decrease of Coo (ffi}smooth functions:
00
h'(t)
o Actually, the boundedness of
f and f' already yields the following:
Corollary 2.3 Given A E C 1 (iR,GL(n,IR)), there is a constant c(A) > 0 such that the estimate II As 11 1,2 :( c(A) Ils111,2 holds for all s E H 1,2(IR,lRn), where (As)(t)
= A(t)· s(t), t
R
E
Corollary 2.4 Let fECI (iR, IR) satisfy the asymptotic condition f(±oo) = O. Then it holds f E H 1,2(1R, IR). 1 Froof. It is clear from Lemma 2.2 that f' E L 2 (1R, IR) holds. The computation for arbitrary to, t E IR relying on Lemma 2.2
I f(t)
- f(to)
I
I :(
= x, u(+oo) = y}
<
( (h- 1 )' 0 h) (t) = _1_ = (1 + t2)~
be a diffeomorphism.
E Coo(iR, M) I u( -00)
)'1
and conclude the proof with
v'1+t 2
Additionally, given arbitrary endpoints x, y E M we define the set of smooth, compact curves C~y as
23
lt Ilt
f' (7) d7
I :(
to
c(f)
Ilt to
d;
to 7
I=
c(f).2 d7
(1 + 7 2 )
c(f) Ir
2
- t
I
2
o2
1
. implies the estimate If(t)1 :( c(f)r 2 , t E IR
due to the assumption that f(±oo) L2(1R,1R). lWe may even derive
=
° as
to
--+
±oo. This proves f E
f E Hl.l as becomes clear in the proof.
0
,
" = -
l . ."
......
!IlL
mm~~~~'m:-WM-"-~-~I\ii~~~-\,~~'~1f~~,ii~~5ii
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
24
I
2.1. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
25
I
Definition 2.5 Now let ~ E Vec(i~:) be a Coo(iR)-smooth, finite-dimensional vector bundle on iR and let ¢>: ~ ~ iR x lR n be a smooth trivialization. 2 Then using the induced one-to-one mapping ¢>* between the associated vector spaces of sections we are able to define H~,2(~)
= ¢>:;-1(H 1,2(lR,lRn ») = {¢>:;-l(S) I s E H 1,2(lR,lRn )}
.
It is immediate from Corollary 2.3 that ¢>* induces a Banach space topology on the vector space Hj,2(~) in a way which is independent of the particular choice of the trivialization ¢>, because the change of trivialization from ¢> to if; under the assumption of smoothness is represented by some A = if; 0 ¢>-l E Coo (iR, GL(n, lR»).
I
Proposition 2.7 The set of curves P;:~ c C~,y(JR, M) with given endpoints x, y E M is equipped with a Banach manifold structure via the atlas of charts { Hi,2(h*V) , eXPh } hEC~lI(i,M) Additionally, the following inclusion relations hold:
(2.3)
exp: TM:J V
--+
M ,
where V stands for an open and convex neighbourhood of the zero section, we denote by h*V the induced open and convex neighbourhood of the zero section in the pull-back bundle h*TM, for any smooth, compact curve hE Coo(iR,M).
Definition 2.6 Regarding the Sobolev embedding Hl~~ '---+ CO we are led to the map 12 eXPh: H R ' (h*V) --+ CO(lR, M) (2.2) Sf---> expos, (expos)(t) = eXPh(t) ·s(t)
dense
c
= { exp os E
CO(iR, M) Is
E H~,2(h*V), h E C~y(iR, M) }
dense
c
°
CX,y(lR, M)
We shall obtain the following representation of the tangent space,3
U H R,2(s*TM) 1
1 ,2 = H 1 ,2(pl,2*TM) = Tpx~ R x~
SEP~:;
This is a Banach bundle on P;;; with Hl,2(lR,lR n ) as characteristic fiber. By strict analogy to H~,2 we are able to define a section functor (as defined in the appendix) Li, : Veccoo (i) --+ Ban which is endowed with a Banach space topology given by L2(lR,lR n ). This lends itself to the Banach bundle
(2.5)
Li,(P~:;*TM) =
U Li,(s*TM)
sE'P;:;
Then, the second fundamental proposition developed in the appendix is
Proposition 2.8 Let f E Coo(M, lR) be an arbitrary, smooth real function on M. Then, given critical points x, y E erit f as endpoints, the gradient field 'V f induces a smooth section in the L 2-Banach bundle, 1 ,2 F'. p x,y
--+
L R2 (pl,2*T x,y M)
S
f--->
8+'Vfos.
which is well-defined for all hE Coo(iR, M). Thus, we are able to define 1 ,2 = p1,2(lR M) p x,y x,y'
12
Px:y(lR, M)
Moreover, there is a countable sub-atlas.
(2.4) Once again, it seems worthwhile to underline that we have not de duced this space H~,2(~) C Hl~:(~) from a finite measure on iR but from toplinear isomorphisms with Hl,2(lR, lRn ). The discussion of the properties of this so-called section functor Hi,2, which are fundamental with respect to the development of the Banach manifold we desire, shall be deferred to the section on manifolds of maps in the appendix. At this stage, we shall be satisfied with a brief definition of this Banach manifold P~:~ as we claimed it to be. Starting off with the exponential map on the complete Riemannian manifold M,
-
C~y(lR, M)
Actually, the study of the trajectory manifold M!.y is founded upon exactly this section F. If we substitute the time-independent vector field 'V f by the time-dependent, suitably scaled vector field
X _
The following proposition will be the first result of the discussion in Appendix A concerning the structure of the set p~:;:
t - Jl
'Vh t
+ Ikt I2 1'Vht /2
'
3The extension of H~·2 and Lji to the set of curves p~:~ will also be studied in the
2lR is contractible.
appendix.
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
26
the associated, more general section F Xt yields the manifold of time-dependent trajectories in an analogous manner. It should be emphasized that by the definition of h t (see Morse homotopy) X t is again a gradient field for ItI > R. In this most general situation throughout the whole treatment we obtain the local representation of the section F
(2.6)
Floc:
H~'\-y*V) -> L~b*TM), '"Y E C~,xfi(JR,M)
Floc(~)(t~= '\7t~(t)
+ g(t,~(t))
2.1.
27
THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
is continuously differentiable.
s satisfies
(s' 0 h) (t) = 8(t) . (1 + t2)~
(2.7)
Thus, we have accomplished the proof if we have shown
lim 8(t)· (1 +t2)~ =
t---+±oo
O. This property of the asymptotic behaviour of the gradient trajectories is immediate from Lemma 2.10 Let X: U(O)
,
from the local trivializations of the bundles Hi,2 (P;,;; *TM) and L~(P;,:;* TM). Here, g: JR x '"Y*V -> '"Y*TM is smooth and fibre respecting at each t together with g(±oo,O) = O. Moreover, the asymptotical fibre derivatives F2g(±oo,0) are conjugated to the Hessians of and f(3 at Xc> and x(3, respec tively. In the following section we will concentrate on this type of map Floc, between Banach spaces. There, it will turn out that it is merely the asymptotic behaviour at the ends of the trajectories which proves significant.
r'
The fundamental link with the trajectory spaces of the (negative) gradient flow is now provided by the following simple proposition. Given critical points x and y of f E COO(M, JR), it holds that
-> JRn be a continuously differentiable vector field defined on a neighbourhood of 0 E JR and let 0 be a critical point of X such that the linearization DX(O) is non-degenerate and symmetric. Then, there is an f > 0 such that every solution
with lim s(t) = 0
8 = X(s)
(2.8)
t---+oo
satisfies the following estimate: There are constants c > 0 and to on s and satisfying (2.9) Is(t)1 ~ ce- Et for all t ~ to .
E
JR depending
Proof of the lemma. We start by defining the non-negative function 1
a(t) = 2( s(t), s(t)) ,
L 2(P;,:~*T M) are ex actly the smooth curves which solve the ordinary differential equation that is by means of (2.8): a'(t) = (X(s(t)),s(t)). One more differentiation
Proposition 2.9 The zeroes of the section F : P;,;~
->
yields (2.10)
8=-'\7fos and which submit to the convergence condition lim s(t)
t~-oo
a"(t) = (DX(s(t)) . 8(t), s(t))
+ (X(s(t)), X(s(t)))
The continuous differentiability of X at 0 gives rise to the identity
= x, lim s(t) = y
(2.11) IX(s(t)) - DX(O)· s(t)\
t~oo
Proof. Due to the assumption, each zero of this section represents a weakly
= R(s(t)).
Is(t)1 with lim R(x) x--o
a" (t)
(2.8),(2.10)
~
(DX(s(t)) .X(s(t)),s(t))
-:Y=-'\7f°'"Y (DX(O) . [X(s(t)) - DX(O)s(t) as its weak derivative. The asserted property follows by means of iterative insertion and differentiation from the smoothness of f. In principle, this is nothing more than elliptic regularity. In fact, compared to the analogous but less trivial result in Floer homology, this principle should be mentioned.
P;,;;
For the converse, due to the definition of and Lemma 2.2, it is sufficient to show that for any solution s of the differential equation obeying the convergence condition demanded above, the composition
=0
and thus to the following estimate:
differentiable and continuous curve with
s = so h- 1 : [-1,1] -> M
.
+ DX(O)s(t)]
,s(t))
+ ( [DX(s(t)) - DX(O)] . X(s(t)), s(t)) (2.11)
~
(DX(O)~(t),DX(O)s(t)) - <5I X
- IIDX(O)II R(s(t)) (s(t), s(t))
(s(t))lls(t)1
for t ~ to(<5), so that s(t) ~ ro is small enough. That is
a"(t) ~ IDX(0)s(t)1 2 - f Is(t)1 2 for arbitrary t ~ to(f), f > 0
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
28
Given any arbitrary 8 > 0, the step before the last stems from the continuity of DX(s(t)) and the symmetry of DX(O). Applying (2.11) once again and choosing a suitable 8 = 8(E) leads to the last estimate. Due to the fact that DX(O) E GL(n, lR), we have
c = xESinfn IDX(O) . xl > 0 If we now choose
(2.12)
E
=
Fredholm Theory
The aim of this section is to develop the Fredholm properties of the operators h iJ which are needed in order to define the trajectory manifolds M! y' M x : ,x iJ and M
HaaiJ iJ'
x
,y
At first, we shall be content with considering linear operators on
the trivial vector bundle 1R x lRn , of the type
i, we obtain the crucial inequality
a"(t) ~ ~ Is(t)1
2
=
ca(t)
for all
t
~
(FAs)(t) = s(t)
to (c, s)
we reproduce the estimate (2.12) in the form
6"(t) ~ c· 6(t) for all t ~ to
= 0 and t--->oo lim 6(t) = O.
According to these properties the function 6 cannot have a positive local maximum at any TO > to. This leads to the estimate
a(t) ~ a(to) e-y'C(t-to)
for all t ~ to(c, s)
4
o
concluding the proof.
Actually, because of the recursive relation given by s = X(s) the gradient trajectories turn out to have an exponential asymptotic decrease in each derivative. Therefore, they are 1R-differentiable infinitely many times and Proposition 2.9 has been proven. 0 This proposition also holds immediately for the time-dependent tra jectories, because for large times we have to dp..al with ordinary gradient fields. After these preparations, we have managed to represent the trajectory spaces as zero sets of smooth sections in Banach bundles on Banach manifolds. In order to extract the fundamental result about M!,y, namely the manifold property, we need a further transversality condition: F : p1,2 ...... L 2(pl,2*TM) x,y
+ A(t). s(t)
with s E H1,2 (lR, lRn ) and A E C~ (lR, End(lRn ))
Hence, the assertion is concluded from the following maximum principle: Set ting ao(t) = a(to) e-y'C(t-t o) and 6(t) = a(t) - ao(t)
with 6(to)
2.2
I
.
1
29
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
2.2.1
,
.
The Fredholm Operator on the Trivial Bundle
Definition 2.11 An operator A E End(lRn ) is called conjugated self-adjoint if it is self-adjoint with respect to some scalar product. Additionally, we shall henceforth use the following notations: X - H 1,2(lR lRn ) Y = L 2(lR lRn ) " " S = {A E GL(n, lR) I A is conjugated self-adjoint}, A = {AEC°(lli,End(lR n )) I A±=A(±oo) ES}.
Here, S describes the set of the Hessians appearing in Morse theory. Thus,the following definition makes sense: Let J-L(a)
=#
(O'(A) n lR-)
for A
E
S
be the so-called Morse index of A, where a(A) denotes the finite spectrum oj A. Moreover, we regard A as normed vector space with respect to 11.11 00 , We now wish to study the following map:
Cg(lR,End(lRn )) 3 A
(FAS)(t) Here,
t-+
(FA: X ...... Y) ,
= s(t) + A(t)· s(t) .
F: Cg(lR,End(lRn ))
......
.c(X;Y)
x,y
has to intersect transversally the zero section in the L 2 -bundle. This so-called Morse-Smale condition is not fullfilled in general. But if we admit minor vari ations of the Riemannian metric on M, this regularity condition appears to be generic with respect to the parameter set of Riemannian metrics on M. This result shall be investigated in the section on transversality. 4This lower bound to depends on s solely via the condition and given a small ro(X) .
Is(t)1
< ro,
for t ~ toes)
describes an affine map, which is continuous due to the estimate
~
hence,
II (FA - FB)(s)ll o IIA - Bll oo Ilsllo
(£ ~
I[FA - FBII.c(x;y) ~
1
I(A - B)s12 dt) :1
II A - Blloo
IIA - Bll oo
IIsll 1 .
'
_
_ . . . m _""""11
",,,,"",,,,,iiik&OMU"""'O
t
a_. LE.EU - - -......lUi
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
30
Actually, the central statement of this section is that F associates a Fredholm operatorS FA E F(X; Y) to each A E A, so that the following formula holds:
Let us now start with a sequence (FX/<,)kEN C R(F) converging in Y; that is to say, without loss of generality, we can assume (Xk)kEN C
indFA = JL(A-) - /1(A+) . This is the so-called relative Morse index, which is determined by the spectral flow of A.
Proposition 2.12 Given A E A, the linear operator FA : X Fredholm operator.
->
Y
is a
The essential ingredient of the proof of this Fredholm property is provided by the following fundamental lemma about semi-Fredholm operators, bounded linear operators with closed range and kernel both of finite dimensions.
Lemma 2.13 Let X, Y and Z be Banach spaces and F E £(X; Y), K E
K.(X; Z) and c> 0 with (2.13)
Ilxllx ~ c( l\Fxlly
+ IIKxll z ),
for all
31
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
x EX.
Xo,
FXk ->
YEY .
If (xkhEN is unbounded, we switch to the normed sequence
II~~\I'
Thus, it
holds without loss of generality that (Xk)kEN,
1
Ilxkllx = 1, l\Fxklly ~
k
for all kEN.
According to assumption (2.13) there is a convergent subsequence of (xkhEN
because of the compactness of K and the convergence of (FXk)kEN. Upon
consideration of a further subsequence, this leads to
Xk ->
= 1 and Fx = 0
x, Ilx\\x
in contradiction to the construction of X o· Therefore, the sequence (Xk)kEN must be bounded, so that the same argument, based on (2.13), again yields a convergent subsequence. This implies the identity y = Fx
for some x
Xo
E
Then F is a semi-Fredholm operator.
D
Although this lemma is a well-known, standard technique for investigating Fredholm operators, we nevertheless give a proof for the reader who is not quite familiar with this type of analysis. Proof. First, let us regard an arbitrary sequence (xkhEN within the set
S
= {x E ker FI
Ilxll x
= I}
Then assumption (2.13) and the identity FXk
=0
Hence, R(F) is closed in Y. Proof of proposition 2.12: The proof consists of four steps. We shall obtain the semi-Fredholm property from the asymptotic behaviour via a compact operator as in Lemma 2.13 by expressing the action of the operator in question during a compact interval of time. After this main part of the proof, the finiteness of the dimension of the cokernel follows from a formal adjunction of FA· Step 1: Let A E A be a constant map from "i to S. Then, there is a constant c > 0, such that the estimate
IIsll1 ~ c I\FA-sllo
for all kEN
holds for all
sEX.
Proof. By F: Y --=--. Y we denote the Fourier isometry, where we use the notations X = H 1 ,2(lR,Cn ) and Y = L 2(lR,C n ) throughout this calculation.
yield the estimate Ilxk - xlli x ~ c
IIK(Xk - xl)ll z , for all k, lEN.
Owing to the compactness of K, the sequence (K Xk)kEN and therefore also the sequence (xkhEN have convergent subsequences. Thus, S is compact and the kernel of F has finite dimension. Second, due to this finite dimension the theorem of Hahn-Banach implies the existence of a closed sub-space X o C X satisfying the relation ker F EBtop X 0 = X . 5This is a bounded linear operator with both kernel and cokernel having finite dimensions.
In particular, it holds that
F(s)(t)
=
Additionally, let w: F(X)
it F(s)(t), t ->
E
~
for all
8
E
X
Y be the operator W(8)(t) = t . s(t), t
that we obtain the identity
F(FA(S)) and therefore (2.14)
= (iw
FA- = F- 1 0 (iw
+ A)
+ A) 0
0
F(8)
F: X
->
Y .
E
lR so
.........- - _ .
......
-
~
-:>
32
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
Now let us assume A E S, so that Ao = min lu(A)1 > consider
B 1 (w), B 2 (w) : C n
-+
Cn
°
holds. We further
----~.
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
Proof. Step 1 provides us with the estimates
II sl11 (
,
B 1 (w)·x = (1 +w2)~x, wE JR.,
+ u(A)
As a consequence, the inverse B 2 (w)-1 exists and satisfies II B
i 1 (w)11 =
lA-II =
sup
'\E<1(B 2 (w))
~= 1 IAI JA6 + w2
sup
.\E<1(A)+iw
;1 + \2
I
2
w .2 ~ max ,
(1)
= c(A) .
Ao' 1
We henceforth conceive B 1 , Bi 1 E Co (JR., End(Cn )) as multiplication operators in .c(X; Y), so that we obtain the inequality
IIB1Bi111u>o
Il slll
lis-III + Ils+lll
=
with
(B1BilF~, F77>o ~
IIB Bi 11oo 1
1
11~llo 1177110
1
B 1 Bi
1
FIIL:(x;y)
Il slll
~ c(A)
IIF-
B2F
IlsIII (
c(T)
E
silo
and for an f
for all
0 and
-T and
t~T
.
s±llo ~ IIFAS±ll o + f IIs±llo .
SEX, sl [-T, T]
~
c( IIFA-s-/lo + IIFA+s+ll o) Cf (iis-il o + /ls+ll ) o
~ c
IIFASllo + Cf IIsl11 ,
~ together with an appropriate T(f)
<
Il sl l ~
1 ~ Cf
Step 3: Given any A satisfying
E
IIFAsllo'
for all sEX with sl[-T(€),T( = 0 .
A, there is a Banach space Z and a K
~ c(
IIFA Ily + 11K x/l z )
T
T
-T
-T
T
~ J (~ 1051 2
A, we find constants T > 0, c(T) > 0, such
IIFAsllo
FA)
J Is + A Sl2 dt = J (105/2
and owing to (2.14) the inequality which we asserted above.
Step 2: Given an arbitrary A that it holds that
t(
for all
for all x
E
lC(X; Z), c > 0
E X
In fact, FA is a semi-Fredholm operator.
Proof. Let T(A) be as provided in Step 2. Then it holds that
~ c(A) ,
such that we conclude the estimate 1
f
>
This at last implies
Ilxll x
Due to (2.15) this yields
IIF-
~
f
(Ii FAs-li o + IIFAs+ll o)+ c IIFAsifo + Cf Ilsllo c
Il sll l
IIF-
=
for all
f
IIFA±s±llo ( 11FA8±11 0 + II(FA± -
~ c(A)
Putting all this together we are led to the required estimate by the combination of 1 1 Ilslli = I/Jl + w2 F sll~ = B 1 Bi F F- 1B 2F sll~
(F-1BIBi1F~, 77>0
SEX.
Restricting ourselves to s± E X with s-I[-T,oo) = 0 and s+I(-oo.Tj - 0, respectively, we obtain the inequalities
(
(2.15)
for all
Let us now consider sEX equipped with the property sl[-T,T] = O. Then we find s± as above fulfilling s = s+ + s- such that
Summing up we obtain
IIB 1 (w). Bi 1 (w)11 ~,
IIFA±sllo
IIA-A(t)11 ~ IIA+ - A(t)ll
and hence = iw
c(A±)
We therefore define c = max (c(A+),c(A-)). Given an arbitrary A E A, there is a T€ > 0 large enough such that
B 2(w)=iw+A,WEJR. ,
o It' u(B2(w))
33
= 0 .
-
I
As I 2
)
-T
+ 2(05, As) + IA sl2 ) dt
dt
due to the computation of
181 2 + 2 (8,
As)
+
IA sl2 ~
2 isl 2 - IA sl2 1
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
34
from
2
Is+2As1
~
Therefore by means of IA(t)· s(t)1 max[_T,T] IIA(t)ll, we conclude T
JIs +
A sl2 dt
~~
-T
(l sl2 + [sI2) dt
-T
c
={
T
J
2 Isl dt
C
JIs\2
1,
In particular, we can deduce T
J
(r, ¢)o = -(Atr, ¢)o, for all ¢ E CO'(lR,lRn )
2 s
~ c (l l + Is + A sl2 ) dt
and
~
for a c >
a large enough.
II sl11 ~
~
C
with the proprties
r E W 1 ,2
,8(t) #0 for It I E(T,T+l)
c ( Ilsll£2(l-T-l,T+lJ) +
II(3FA s ll o + 1[(1-(3) FA s ll o ) IIFA Silo)
.
Considering the following composition of a continuous restriction map and the Rellich compact embedding,
K: H 1 ,2(lR, lRn )
~
H 1 ,2 ([-T-l, T
~.
L 2 ([-T- 1, T
+ 1], lRn ) = Z
,
we obtain ----t
Z
s
f-t
sl [-T-l,T+l] E L ([-T- 1, T
2
r = At . r
.
Consequently, we know that rEX and r E ker F_At, because -At E A. Therefore, there is a toplinear isomorphism ~
ker F_At
By strict analogy with Step 3 we conclude dimker F-At the proposition.
<
00
thus proving 0
Having seen that the operator FA is a Fredholm operator, the fol lowing analysis will result in a proposition expressing the associated Fredholm index in terms of the relative Morse index. At this point it should be metioned that only the spectral flow of A E A appears to be significant. This means the 'number of eigenvalues which change the sign'. In the proof we shall transform A successively without altering the Fredholm index into an operator of a shape that can be analysed easily. Concerning the focal class of operators we shall henceforth use the following notation:
Definition 2.14 Prom Proposition 2.12 we consider the subset
+ 1],ll~n)
K:X
with
coker FA
That is
(11(3sllo +211,8sII0 +
.
But by definition, this means the weak differentiability of r. Hence, r E L 2 is once weakly differentiable with r = At. r E L 2 . Summing up, we obtain
11(3 s + (1 - (3) sill ~ 11(3 sill + 11(1- (3) sill c(ll(3sllo + IIFA((3s)ll o + IIFA((1-;3)s)lI o )
=
the relation
(r,s+As)o=O, forallsEH 1 ,2.
we are able to combine the estimate (2.16) with Step 2:
II sl11
Step 4: FA is a Fredholm operator. Proof. Up to this point, we know that FA has a finite-dimensional kernel and a range that is closed in Y. Hence, the cokernel of FA is a Banach space satisfying
because Y is a Hilbert space. Thus, let r E R(FA).L, that is
dt
-T
(3 E Coo (lR, [0, 1])
ItI ~T+l It I ~ T
0,
35
coker FA ~ R(FA).L , T
-T
Defining a cut-off function
(3(t)
and setting
a satisfying
J
(2.16)
IIA(t)1I . Is(t)1
-T
Hence, there is a c > T
~O.
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
+ 1])
as a compact operator. Thus, Lemma 2.13 provides the asserted semi-Fredholm property.
E = F(A) = {FA
E
£(X; Y) IA
E
A}
c F(X; Y)
and denote the equivalence class of operators from E with respect to the relation B± = A± by epA = {FB EEl B± = A±}, A EA.
The following lemma will play a decisive role for the index theorem.
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
36
Lemma 2.15 Given any FEE, the class subspace of F(X; Y).
ep
Proof. Let F = FAo E E be arbitrary and define map
is contractible within E as a
e = SF'
Then we study the
S with K(T,FA ) = FA(T) ,
A(T)=(I-T)·A+T.Ao, that is
FA(T) ~ e for all T E [0,1], as A(T)± = A± = At·
K:
[0,1] x S
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
As a conclusion from this lemma, the index map ind: E ---> Z turns out to be constant when restricted to the class epA' In other words, ind(FA ) is determined uniquely by the endpoints A± E S. With this in mind we now come to the final step of the calculation of the Fredholm index. Actually, we carry out an equivalence transformation, namely an appropriate conjugation of the operator FA : Let A E A, that is, A± E S. Then there exists a C± E GL(n,lR) satisfying
--->
C±A±(C±)-l =diag(..\f,.",..\~) , so that the eigenvalues
..\t E o-(A±) are ordered by sign, Le.
We obviously have
K(O,·)
= Ids
and
K(l,·)
= FA o
sgn..\t ~ sgn ..\;+1 . •
Thus, we must show the continuity of K in both variables, so, let us start with lim Tn
(2.17)
n~oo
=T
and
lim FAn
n~oo
= FA
within
e,
lim I/FA" - FAII.c(x;y)
We must verify Assuming an €
which additionally is asymptotically constant. This means
=0 .
C() t
}~~ IIFA(T) - FAn(Tn)llqx;y) = 0
> 0 and a subsequence
Additionally, the ends C± can be chosen in order to satisfy det C± > 0, so that both C+ and C- lie in the same pathwise connected component of GL(n, IR). Thus, there is a curve C E C DO (iR,GL(n,IR)) with ends C(±oo) = C± ,
that is n---+DO
={
C+, t ~ T C- , t ~ _ T
!\
=1
and
II
--->
0, for k
+
(FCf.(C-l)+CAC-1S) (t) . Here, ft(C-l)(t) = 0 holds for
(c£t(C- l )
~ T. Thus we compute the ends as
+ CAC- l )± =
diag (..\f, ... , A~)
CyFAC;l E 8 D ±
---> 00 €.
ItI
= D±
and we obtain the relation
ITnkl IIFA - FAnk 11.c(x;y)
in contradiction to the assumption of the above
Y,
(CyFACX1)(S)(t) = C(t). (ft + A(t)) . (C-l(t). set)) set) + (C(t). :t(C-l)(t) + C(t)A(t)C-l(t)) . set)
+ IT - Tnk I II A oll.c(x.y) ,
Tnkl II A II.c(x;y)
--->
identities hold:
II(A(T)-Ank(Tnk))'Unkllo ~€ for all kEN.
IIFA - FAn k .c(X;Y)
X and Cy : Y SI--*C,s.
It is obvious that C represents a toplinear isomorphism and that the following
II(A(T)-Ank(Tnk )) .unkll o 11[(1- T) . A + TAo - (1 - Tnk ) . Ank - TnkAo]. unk 11 0 II (A - A nk ) . u nk + (T - Tnk)A o . unk +(TnkA - TA + TnkA nk - TnkA) . unk 110
+ IT -
--->
)11 ~ € , for all kEN, "k "k .c(X;Y) (T
Owing to assumption 2.17 we are led to convergence by
~
°.
We shall henceforth denote by C both multiplication operators
we find a sequence (U nk )kEN eX, such that
Ilunkil l
~ T lor some >
(nk)kEN satisfying
Cx : X
FA(T) - FA
37
o
.
Owing to the fact that C x : X ..§:. X and C y : Y ..§:. Y are isomorphisms, the identity ind (CyFAC X1 ) = indFA
'''''-='-'-':'::-~;;::
. - ._,-, --_..._.. ' ,-, - -_.. _:..-;:. -'.". "........
"_._'".""~~'._'
..,_._'--,.,.'".-:--" .."'"'-,,--_._-- . --;=,..,.
_ _
_
. _ ._ _ ••••
_,_~.
.....
u ••". _ _
_.'-'::'::'-
._.
-
_._...
~,
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
38
~l'
follows from the composition rule of Fredholm indices. So, to sum up, it is sufficient to compute ind FD for an element D E A having ends of D± = diag (At, ... , A;). This enables us to reduce the proof of the following propo sition to a nearly explicit computation.
39
FA. These transformations preserve the Fredholm index but do not leave the dimensions of the kernel and the cokernel invariant in general. Regarding the question of such invariance transformations we refer to Section B in the appendix, where we shall make use of another method to obtain a diagonal shape comparable to Proposition 2.16. In fact, that technique will preserve dimker FA and dim coker FA, too, and we obtain the formulas
Proposition 2.16 Given any A E A, the F'redholm index of FA equals the relative Morse index, indFA
2.2. FREDHOLM THEORY
= /L(A-) -/L(A+) .
Proof. It is sufficient to compute ker FA and coker FA when A is of the shape
2.2.2
dimker FA
#{kE{I,
,n}IA;
O}
dim coker FA
#{kE{I,
,n}IA;>O and At
The Fredholm Operator on Non-Trivial Bundles
A(t) = diag (AI (t), ... ,An(t)) where sgnAi(±OO) and
~
We now discuss the general case of smooth vector bundles ~ on iR endowed with a Riemannian metric, so that Hl,2(~) and L2(~) are well-defined. The problem is that we have to generalize the time-derivation by a covariant derivation which is a priori noncanonical and which might disturb the Fredholm property.
sgn Ai+1 (±oo), i = 1, ... , n - 1 ,
Ai(t) = const for It I
~ 1 .
Under these circumstances s E H I ,2(lR,lRn ), s(t) = (Sl(t), ... ,Sn(t)) lies within the kernel of FA, S E ker FA, exactly if it represents a global solution of the system of differential equations
Definition 2.17 Suppose that we are given the Riemannian bundle iR with a covariant derivation 'V induced by a connection. Then we denote by E~, V' the class of operators
Si(t) = -Ai(t) . Si(t), i = 1, ... , n , with the bounded functions Ai : lR times shows that
----+
FA :
lR. Now, explicit calculation for large Si E H I ,2(lR, lR)
with A E CO(End(~)), such that A(±oo) is non-degenerate and conjugated self-adjoint on ~I{±oo}'
holds if and only if
A+ > 0, as ~
S'i(t)
= {
e->.;-t, e ->.+t \,
t
<
The first question is, whether the Fredholm property is well-defined for all FA E E~,V'. Choosing any trivialization of ~ on iR, we obtain the following representation for the covariant derivative: 'V triv S = .Q. s + rs S E H 1,2 (lR lR n ) (2.18)
1
t> 1
Having in mind the ordering of the eigenvalues by sign, we compute dimker FA
# {k
E {I, ... , n} I A; < 0 und At
at'
t
"
where r E Coo (iR, End(lR n )) stems from the Christoffel symbol associated to 'V and the respective trivialization. It is now decisive how 'V~riv transforms under a change of the trivialization 4> E COO (R, Gl( n)). We compute
> 0}
max (/L(A-) -/L(A+),O) .
By the same method of computing we obtain the formula (2.19)
dim coker FA
,
FAS = 'Vts + As,
Si(t) = -Ai(t) . Si(t), t E lR and 0 i-
A:< 0 and ~
HI,2(~) ----+ L2(~)
= max (/L( -A-) -/L(-A+), 0) = max (/L(A+) -/L(A-), 0)
¢-I'V;riv(¢S) =
(gt + ¢-l¢ + ¢-lr¢) S
Therefore, the trivialized operator FXiv transforms as
from the isomorphism coker FA ~ ker F_At = ker F-A. Computing the differ ence between the dimensions of the kernel and the cokernel amounts to proving the asserted formula indFA = /L(A-) -/L(A+). 0
(2.20)
v = gt + ¢-I¢ + ¢-lr¢ + ¢-l A¢
¢-l FX,i ¢
Since due to the iR-differentiability ¢ vanishes asymptotically, i.e. ¢( ±oo) = o according to emma 2.2, the only problematic issue which might afflict the Fredholm property is the asymptotic behaviour of r, i.e. r(±oo).
It seems worthwhile to point out that by this method of calculating
the index, we have executed transformations in order to simplify the operator
I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -........,.,---------~--..' - -_ _ --.-- .. ---.-------.....\Oo......~ ~___._____.::.;.;;.;;::_..,;.~~==;;;.,-=.:z;;..;:::;,__=.;:..;~~;;:';.~,;,;~~~
40
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
I.
Definition 2.18 We call a covariant derivation V' on a JR-bundle ~ Fredholm admissible if any trivialization gives rise to asymptotically vanishing r -terms, i.e. r(±oo) = o. As we observed above, this property holds for every trivializa tions if it holds for one.
2.2.3
Definition 2.21 Let ~ be a Riemannian Coo (R)-vector bundle with a Fredholm admissible covariant derivation as above and let 0 C ~ be open and satisfying the following: There is a s E C8"(O with s(JR) C 0, and Ot = 0 and convex for all t E JR.
Proof. For the sake of simplicity we also denote the curve in local coordinates by u. With respect to these local coordinates on M together with a local trivialization of E the covariant derivation V' on E is represented by means of the Christoffel symbol r, Le.
+ r(p)(v, w)
.
Fred(~ V') = {F: H 1 ,2(0)
+ r(u(t)) (u(t), ~(t))
Proposition 2.22 Each F E tial DF(so) E
r(t) =.r(u(t))(u(t),.) , we immediately deduce the identity r(±oo) = 0 from u(±oo) = O. Hence, u* V' is Fredholm admissible. o
8 FB C E triv
I
(Fs)(t) = V'ts(t) + f(t,s(t)) , } . f : 0 ---+ ~ as above
Fred(~, E(,V'
{s E
Hl,2(~) I ~(JR) CO}
the open
V') is a Fredholm map with its differen
for all So E H 1 ,2(0) ,
so that the local Fredholm index is determined by the formula
Thus, provided an admissible V', the Fredholm property of the above de fined operator FA E E(,V' depends solely on the asymptotic behaviour of A, Le. A( ±oo). We obtain this property for FA via an arbitrary trivialization ¢> : R x IRn -=. ~, that is E
L2(~)
Additionally, let us denote by H 1 ,2(0) = subset of Hl,2(~).
.
For these identities concerning the covariant derivation the reader is also re ferred to [Kli). Since the above r-term is now given by
¢>-l FA¢>
---+
,
dt
V't~(t) = ~(t)
n ~t is open
Further, let us assume a map f : 0 ---+ ~ that is smooth and fibre respecting, such that it holds f(±oo,O) = 0 and the fibre derivatives are non-degenerate and conjugated self-adjoint, i.e. J.l(D2!(±oo,O)) is well-defined. Considering such maps f we are able to define
This yields the following local representation for the induced covariant deriva tion u*V', where we denote u*V'..d.. by V't : (2.21 )
Generalization to Fredholm maps
Finally we are able to state the result which we need for the class of Banach space maps upon which the entire analysis is founded.
Lemma 2.19 Let ~ = u* E be a pull-back bundle with respect to a JR-curve u E COO (JR, M), where 7f : E ---+ M is a smooth Riemannian bundle on the manifold M with a fixed covariant derivation V'. The induced covariant derivation u* V' on ~ is Fredholm admissible.
V'vw(p) = Dw(p) . v
41
2.3. TRANSVERSALITY
ind DF(so) = J.l(D 2 f( -00,0)) - J.l(D2!( +00,0)) Proof. It is clear from the properties assumed for f : 0 identity holds for all So E H 1 ,2(0): DF(so) = FD2fo8Q E
,
B± = r1(±00)A(±00)¢>(±00)
---+ ~
that the following
E(,V' .
Hence the proof is immediate from Proposition 2.20.
0
Here, ¢> induces the toplinear isomorphisms
¢>x : X ¢>y : Y
-=. Hl,2(~), -=. L 2 (~)
2.3
(¢>xs)(t) = ¢>(t) . s(t),
Transversality
analogously , In this section we shall obtain the result that the trajectory spaces come equipped with the structure of finite-dimensional manifolds. As it has been al ready mentioned above, we obtain this property only if we restrict to a generic set of metrics or homotopies of Morse homotopies, which in this situation oper ate as parameters. As regards this genericity result the fundamental technique for the proof is based on a parametrized version of the theorem of Sard-Smale, which is adapted to the given situation of sections in Banach bundles.
which are again denoted by ¢>. Finally, we are able to transfer all results from the trivial case in a manner which is independent of the particular trivialization: Proposition 2.20 Given a Fredholm admissible covariant derivation V' every FA E E(,V' is a Fredholm operator with the index
on~,
indFA = J.l(A-) - J.l(A+) .
it
42
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
2.3.1
2.3.
The Regularity Conditions
It should be emphasized that the proof relies crucially upon the Fredholm property of
Definition 2.23 We call a subset 1:; C X of a Baire space Q-set, if it is a countable intersection of open and dense subsets and therefore dense, also. We then call a set G C X generic with respect to a condition of the points of X if this condition is fulfilled for a Q-set 1:; C G. Proposition 2.24 Let G and M be Banach manifolds and T : E --+ M Banach bundle on M with fiber IE. Additionally, let
'[JT2 0
'l/J
0
--+
0
'l/J
0
--+
Proof of proposition 2.24: Owing to the given countable trivialization of E we are able to assume without loss of generality that E is a trivial bundle. This is to say that we have a smooth map
be a be a is a
with respect to a Banach space IE, such that 0 E IE is a regular value and the maps
nu
that
countable trivialization {U, 'l/Ju}. Thus,
(2.22)
lEu and
= {m
(2.23)
E M
E x F
= ker
for all z
= (g, m)
E Z ,
is a Fredholm map endowed with the same index as
ker D1f(z)
= TzZ n TmM = ker D 2
,
of finite-dimensional vector spaces with the assumption that D 2
Lemma 2.25 Let
--+
ker D
1f:Z--+G,
We call the main result of this section the transversality result. The reader may notice that transversality in this sense and concerning the trajectory spaces is equivalent to the Morse-Smale condition, which is also defined in a way that describes a kind of transversality. The essential step of the proof is based on the following technical lemma, which can be proved easily by straightforward methods on Banach spaces.
Let
=
Now the main step of the proof is to conclude that the restriction of the projection map to this Banach manifold Z,
Given a generic parameter set 1:; C G, the section
=
TzZ
as follows via local coordinate charts from Lemma 2.25 (!) and from the implicit function theorem.
Another way of putting this would be to say:
Z =
is a smooth Banach manifold with associated tangent spaces given by
lEu is a Fredholm map with index r for all g E G.
Then there is a Q-set 1:; C G, such that the set Zg =
43
TRANSVERSALITY
(2.25)
.
DI
------. f--->
E / R( D 2
[D I
Having in mind the identities
G be a Fredholm
v=D1f'(v,w)
,
and
D I
for each pair (v, w) E TzZ c TgG x TmM, we immediately deduce the isomor phism property of DI
such that H is a closed subspace of Ex F. ,;~~ jD'
...
r--------------------
--------------------------------------1-
II
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES'"
I
44
cokernelof D 2 cI>(z) has a finite dimension, D 1 cI> appears to be an isomorphism between finite-dimensional cokernels, (2.26)
D 1 cI>: coker (D1l"(z)) ~ coker D 2 cI>(z)
Hence, the equations (2.24) and (2.26) yield the Fredholm property of the projection map 1l". Finally, we are able to apply the well-known theorem of Sard-Smale to this smooth Fredholm map between Banach manifolds. It leads to a 9-set ~ C G Of regular values of 1l".
I
Now let b E ~. If cI>(b, m) does not vanish for any m from M, 0 is trivially a regular value of cI>b. Therefore, let us consider an m E M satisfying cI>(b, m) = O. We then have to show that the operator (2.27)
DcI>b(m) = D 2 cI>(b, m) : TmM
~E
is onto. Let 'Y E E be given arbitrarily. Due to the regularity of b with respect to cI>, there is a pair (0:,/3) EnG x TmM satisfying (2.28)
On the other hand, b is also regular with respect to 1l" : Z ~ G, that is, given any 0: E TbG we find an (0:', /3') E T(b,m)Z, such that it holds
norm 1·1 and a covariant derivation. Given a sequence real numbers, we define
Xl'"
This norm
I ,11,
E
TpM}
I Ilsll,
< 00 }
It is easy to verify that (C'(~), 11,11,) is a Banach space if C'(~) is non void. An explicit construction of a sufficiently large set of smooth sections with suitably chosen compact support, which the reader can find in [F3], gives rise to the following lemma. (fn)nEN
such that the Banach space C'(~)
Remark Obviously, the following inequality holds:
11,11,
~
II-II",
if 0 < f n ~ f~ for all n E N
In other words, we have a continuous embedding of C" in C'. Summing up, we get the sequence of embeddings C" c~. C' c~. C k c~. CO for all kEN .
(2.31) Subtracting equation (2.30) from (2.28), we find a preimage of'Y under the map D 2 cI>(b, m) of the form
This yields the proof.
Xi
of positive
gives rise to the vector space C'(~) = { s E COO(~)
0= DcI>(b, m) . (0:, /3') = D 1 cI>. 0: + D 2 cI> . /3'
'Y = D 2 cI>(b, m) . (/3
(fn)nEN
Ilsll, = Ek~O fk sUPM lV'ksl for all s E COO(~) , lV'ksl (P) = max { IV' V'xks(P)llllxtli = ... = Ilxk 11= 1,
0:' = D1l"(b,m)· (0:',/3') = 0: .
Hence, (0:,/3') belongs to the kernel of DcI>(b,m), Le. (2.30)
Definition 2.26 Let ~ be a smooth vector bundle on M endowed with a bundle
Lemma 2.27 There is a sequence is dense in L 2 (~).
'Y = DcI>(b, m) . (0:, /3) = D 1 cI>. 0: + D 2 cI>· /3
(2.29)
45
2.3. TRANSVERSALITY
- /3') .
o
It is the aim of this section to obtain a generic set of smooth Rie mannian metrics, each of which satisfies the Morse-Smale condition. Within the given framework it is sufficient to fix an arbitrary metric 90 and to find a generic set of variations with respect to 90. By this we mean a set of smooth sections A E End (TM) which are fibrewise self-adjoint with respect to 90, positively definite and which differ from the section of identities by a suffi ciently small amount. We then vary V' f in terms of A . V' f. In order to be able to apply Proposition 2.24 to our transversality problem, we need a Banach manifold structure upon this parameter set of smooth sections in End (T M).
Definition 2.28 Setting
Endsym,go (TM) {(p, T p) E EgO I T p positively definite w.r.t. (-, -}p = 90(P)}
Ego Tgo
we now define the vector bundle Ego on M. It consists of the endomor phisms which are self-adjoint with respect to 90, so that it forms a subbundle of End(T M) ~ M. Additionally, Tgo represents an open neighbourhood of the submanifold nM in EgO C End(TM). Due to the above remark C'(~) ~ CO(~) is a continuous embedding and therefore we obtain
9go
= C'(~o) = {X E C'(Ego ) IX p
as an open neighbourhood of
nE C'(Ego )'
E (Tgo)p f.a. P EM}
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
46
Referring to the local coordinates and the trivialization of L2(P~:~) we compute the represer.tation of as
Thus, 9go is a suitable Banach manifold of parameters with regard to our regularity analysis. It should be mentioned that each tangent space T x 9go at X E 9go has the form T x 9go = C«Ego ) .
loe
9go x H 1 ,2b*O)
~oexp,~
)
Proposition 2.30 Given any parameter A E 9go '
A = loe(A,') : H 1 ,2b*O) ~ L 2b*TM)
is called regular, if it fulfills the condition:
Given any lR-critical point Xo of h, i.e. =
(A. V'h t
Since C«~o) ~ CO(~o) is a continuous inclusion, loe is also smooth with respect to the parameter variable A. We may now state the decisive proposition, where we denote loe again by <1>.
tt ~ ~R -R for some R ~ 0 ,
V'ht(xo)
~ L 2b*TM)
(A,~)t-+ V't~+e(~)''Y+V'2exp(~)-'
Definition 2.29 A -finite homotopy h a{3 : lR x M ~ lR, i.e. satisfying
r,
:
1
In order to prove the central regularity result already for the time-dependent case which includes the time-independent one as a special case6 we still need a further restriction on the homotopy h a {3 :
h(t , .) _- { f{3,
47
2.3. TRANSVERSALITY
is a Fredholm map with the constant index J.L(x) - J.L(y). regular homotopy, 0 E L 2 is a regular value of <1>.
0 for all t E lR , ~x~TM
the consequently well-defined operator from
Moreover, if ht is a
Proof. a) The Fredholm result is an immediate conclusion from Lemma 2.19 and the investigations in Section 2.2.3, because
a + H 2h (xo) : H 1 ,2(x TM) ~ L 2(x TM) t o o
at
for all A E 9go
A E Fredb*TM,'Y*V')
is onto.
b) The focal regularity result is now obtained as follows: 2 The In this framework, H h t (xo) E End(TxoM) denotes the well-defined (f) Hes differential of has the form sian of h t at xo. D(a,~) . (B, 17) = D 1 (A,~) . B + D2<1>(A,~) '17 Generally, this regularity condition is not fulfilled. But if rand f{3 are func tions with isolated critical points, we can always find a regular, finite homotopy between them. This is deduced by the following argument. Let us start from a non-regular lR-critical point Xo of h a {3 by assumption. We then choose a func tion k E Cgo (lR x M, lR) with suitably small support and satisfying dk t (xo) i- 0 for some t E lR. Let us now replace the homotopy h a{3 by h'a{3 = h a{3 + k. This replacement can be iterated for all at most countably many non-regular lR-critical points within a compact interval of time. We thus obtain a regular, finite homotopy. In particular, h a {3 is a regular homotopy if it is trivial, that is to say if h t = for all t E R
Here, D2<1>(A,~) E ~,.TM is a Fredholm operator of the already well-known type. For sake of computational plainness we choose the short notations
2
d = Dl(A,~)· BE L b*TM) ,
d(t) = V'2 exp(~)-l(t) .
BV'ht (
9go
X p~,2 ~
(A, 'Y)
,y
t-+
'Y +
L 2(pl,2) x,y
A.
J1 + kt/ 1
6h t
= 0 for all t E
-
AV'ht(AV'ht , BV'ht ))
2
( 1 + 1 kt 1
.
I
A V' ht 1
2 )
~
together with
Let us now study the following map: :
2
(BV'h t IAV'h t 1
3
r
+ Ikt l2
V' gOh t
2 .
I
A . V' go h t 1
2
IR .
·'V!'< . i-"
.I·
oexp,~) (t)
a(t)
(lktl2
x(t)
(V'h t 0 exp,~) (t)
y(t)
((AV'h t ) oexp,~) (t)
B(t)
(B 0
exp,~)
(t) .
oexp,~
)
(t)
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
48
2.3.
Now let (A,~) E 9go X H 1 ,2 satisfy ell(A,~) = O. Then ~ is smooth, too. Since due to a) R(D2ell(A,~)) is a closed subspace of £2 with finite codimension, the same is true for R(Dell). Thus, let us start from any vector c E £2 within the finite-dimensional subspace of £2 satisfying (Dell. (B,17) ,
(2.32) for all
c) £2
=
TRANSVERSALITY
Since
0
49
is positive and P ha.s a non-negative spectrum, it holds that
(n + oP) C i= 0 Therefore, there is a z
(Bx, z)
(2.38)
0
i= 0
satisfying
=
0
for all B E Endsym(TpM)
A simple computation shows that the space of symmetric endomorphisms com plies with the property:
(B,17) E C'(E go ) x H 1 ,2(J*TM)
It remains to show that c(t) vanishes for all t E R The relation (2.32) leads
For any pair v,
in particular to
W
i= 0
there exists a symmetric B with (Bv, w)
i= 0
.
Thus (2.38) gives rise to the conclusion (2.33)
( D 2ell '17,
c) £2
= 0
for all 17 E H 1 ,2
.
As we already analysed in the Fredholm section, due to the smoothness ~ E Coo, this implies that c can be expressed a.s the solution of some non-autonomous linear differential equation
= (\lh t
0
expoy ~)(t)
=0
for all t E IR .
However, due to the identity ell ( A,~) = 0, it follows that s = expoy ~ must be a constant trajectory. This leads to a contradiction, a.s we a.ssumed h t to be a regular homotopy thus implying the surjectivity of D 2ell. 0
c(t) = X(t) . c(t)
(2.34)
2.3.2
with respect to a suitable trivialization of i*TM. If c is not the zero section, the uniqueness result for ordinary differential equations implies that c vanishes nowhere, Le. c(t) i= 0, for all t E R Briefly, given c i= 0, we obtain
(2.35)
x(t)
(2.39)
(D 1 ell(A,~) . B , c) £2
= 0
c E COO(i*TM) with c(t)
Combining Propositions 2.24 and 2.30 we now are led to the result about transversality.
for all B E C'(Ego ),
i= 0
The Regularity Results
Theorem 1 Given a generic set of smooth metrics, the trajectory spaces Mt,y and M~~: are closed submanifolds ofP;:~ of the finite dimension p,(x) - p,(y).
for all t E R .
Remarks. Due to the above discussion about C' this is generally true for all BE L 2 (Ego ), that is especially for all B with compact support. Choosing B with a suitably small support we may also give a pointwise formulation of (2.35) for a single t E R: Let us fix any arbitrary t E R. Then there exists a
• A priori, we can only speak of local dimensions, because they are in duced by the Fredholm indices of the local linearizations of the Fredholm section. These indices are only local analytic invariants which depend continuously on the underlying point of the zero set. The fact that they are equal on each component of this trajectory space follows from the mere dependence of the index formula on the fixed endpoints x and y in this special framework. In fact, if we look at the analogous Fredholm problem in Floer homology, we observe an additional parameter in the index formula, which involves a certain Chern number a.s a strictly local invariant, in general. In contra.st to our situation, the trajectory spaces in Floer homology may have different dimensions for different components.
C E TpM, C i= 0 with p = expoy~(t) ,
satisfying the equation (2.36)
( Bx + o(Bx(y, y) - y(y, Bx)),
c) =
0
for all B E End(TpM), which are symmetric with respect to (-,.) = go (', .) on TpM. Let P be the symmetric operator
• There is a corresponding result for the time-dependent ca.se of homotopy trajectories, when the Riemannian metric is homotoped over a finite in terval of time along with h o.13 . Let arbitrary generic metrics a.ssociated to the functions f o. and f13 be given. Then there is a generic set of a.ssociated homotopies gf13, such that M~~: ,g",{3 has the property of a manifold.
I
pz
=
z (y, y) - y (y, z)
r!
I~ II
Then (2.36) may be written a.s (2.37)
((n + oP)Bx, c)
= 0
for all B E Endsym(TpM) .
,' , A
.:;'
f·
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
50
Finally, we have to study the case of A-parametrized trajectories: Let h~13 and h~13 be finite homotopies of the form
fa, hf13(t,.) = { f13,
t ~-R t~ R ,i
= 0,1 ,
2.4. COMPACTNESS
being a Fredholm operator for each A yields the finiteness of the codimension of R(G). Additionally, it is immediate from the continuity argument that the index of G(A) is constant on the entire interval [0,1]. Hence, we compute the index of G by means of the index formula indG2(0)
and let H a 13 be a A-homotopy satisfying H a 13 : [0,1] x lR x M
r,
\ )_ { H' 0113 (/\, t,' f13, H a13(o , ..) ,
= h 0a13 ,
---+
ind G(A) = indG(O) = 1 + /L(x a ) - /L(Y13)
t~ -R t~ R
H a13(l , . , .)
[0 , 1] (A, 1')
X
p1,2 X ,Y{3
---+
a
= ha13 1
L 2(p1,2* TM) Xo:,Y/3
~ (i'(t) + (V~') 01') (t))tElR
with X a E Crit(fa) and Y13 E Crit(f13). Corresponding to the first remark above, the Riemannian metric determining V may likewise be (A, t)-dependent. The following transversality result holds: Theorem 2 Let h~13 and hr 13 be regular, finite homotopies together with its associated Morse-Smale metrics. Then there is a generic set of A-homotopies H a13 of the above form and a generic set of suitable homotopies of the Rie mannian metric, such that (Ga 13 )-l(o) is a (/L(x a ) - /L(Y13) + l)-dimensional submanifold of [0,1] X p;~2,Yi3'
Proof. Apart from the Fredholm property which is needed according to Propo sition 2.24 with respect to the fixed local trivialization of the Banach bundle L2(P;~2'~i3TM), the proof of this regularity follows in a way that is analogous to Proposition 2.30. And this Fredholm property is concluded as follows: Given the local trivialization at 1', we consider the linearized map
G
: lR x H 1 ,2(')'*TM)
---+
L 2(')'*TM)
with
o i3
It should be mentioned at this stage that, generally, M{!"'y is a bounded "" 13 manifold and that it is due to the regularity assumption at A = 0,1, that the boundary satisfies the relation
H"'i3
H"'i3
12
8M X""Yi3 = M x ""Yi3 n {O, 1} x PX~,Yi3
u'"
Thus, there are no interior points E M~~:i3 which belong to the parameters A = 0 or A = 1. For a schematic picture of this situation the reader is referred to Figure 4.4 on page 146.
2.4
Compactness
In this section we wish to study the compactness properties of the trajectory spaces in question. The fundamental feature which gives rise to the special results in this context is formed by the discrepancy between the H 1 ,2_topology prescribed by the analytic methods and the q~c-topology on the set of the solutions of the ordinary differential equation
i'=-Vf°'Y . Actually, this q~)c-topology appears to convey geometrical significance rather than the H 1 ,2_topology. Due to the deduction from the implicit function theo i3 rem the finite-dimensional manifolds M~ Y and M xh : ,x 13 are obviously manifolds without boundary. Thus, in relation to the dimension one is naturally led to the question of compactness. In the case of relative Morse index /L(x) - /L(Y) = 1 this would immediately imply the finiteness of M~,y, and the case of dimensions 1 and 2 would allow an easy classification of the diffeomorphism type. I
(T,~) ~ (G 1(A)' T + G2(A)'~) ,
G2 (A) . ~ = Vt~ + A(A) . ~ , G 1 : [0,1] ---+ L 2(')'*TM), G 2 : [0,1] ---+ I;'Y'™
= dimkerG 2(0) = /L(x a ) - /L(Y13)
and due to the fact that G 2(0) is onto, as
lR
Then we consider the 1-parameter family of sections,
Ga 13
51
both smooth .
First, let us observe that the regularity assumption for the homotopies h~13 and hr13 implies that the operators G2(0) and G 2(1) are onto. Second, G 2(A)
As it will turn out throughout this investigation, the essential ob struction to the convergence of subsequences in the H 1 ,2_topology is formed by the geometrical splitting-up into the so-called broken trajectories. Actually, it
===:E2
5;
tEt==.: f,:MitdbEtfn:z . ntt~;:;~;:;=:E ;:;:C:;:;;~=:~; :rr.:;Zejr='~:;~7~~:;:~;~~~5~=:~~~1e~~~~W«4~~h§.
__W_';;
u.,
is in relation with the IR-action on Mf that the q~'c-topology appears to be ap propriate for the description of this phenomenon. Due to the converse analysis concerning the gluing operation in the next section, the broken trajectories play the role of boundary points with regard to the trajectory manifolds. Briefly, we shall conclude the central results aimed at the construction of the canonical a-operator and of homomorphisms within the Morse homology from a kind of oriented cobordism equivalence for isolated, simply broken trajectories.
2.4.1
shall make use of the identification Mt,y ~ WU(x) n WS(y). We consider the smooth evaluation map Pl,2(IR x,y , M)
Eo:
---->M ~ 'Y(O)
'Y
The smoothness of this map follows immediately from the representation by suitable local coordinates, EO,loc:
The Space" of Unparametrized Trajectories
Hi,2(h*D)
---->
~
U(h(O))
c
Th(o)M
~(exPh(1)oEooexPh)(~)=~(0),
The aim of this subsection is to analyse the essential property of the trajec tory manifold Mt,y in the time-independent case, namely the symmetry with respect to additive reparametrization of the trajectories. This action is called 'time-shifting'. We shall henceforth use the designation 'time-independent' or 'unparametrized' trajectories for the orbits of this time-shifting operation.
where EO,loc is continuously linear. If we restrict the evaluation map Eo to the trajectory manifold Mt,y, we obtain an embedding
Let 'Y : IR ----> M be a solution of the differential equation 'Y = - \7 f 0'Y. Then, obviously, the same property holds for the shifted curve 'Y.T = 'YT = 'Y(' + T), as we compute
because the differential
(2.40)
Eo : Mt,y
proves injective at each 'Y E
---->
T1(o)M
Mty.
Specifically, let us consider a tangent vector O. This argument analogous to (2.34) in Proposition 2.30, that ~ may be treated as solution of a linear, ordinary differential equation. Thus the identity ~ == 0 is concluded from the uniqueness with respect to the initial value ~(O) = O. As a consequence the evaluation map leads to the diffeomorphism between the manifolds (2.41 )
lR x M~,y
---->
~ E T1Mt,y = ker DF("() satistying ~(O) =
Proposition 2.31 The additive group lR acts smoothly, freely and properly on the manifold Mt,y by
M ,
DEo ("() : T1M~,y DEo ("() . ~ = ~(O)
a at ("(. T) = i{ + T) Moreover, it holds that 'YOR) = ("(. T)(i) for all 'Y E Mt,y, that is the unparametrized set of points 'Y(i) remains unchanged. It is in this sense of point sets that we shall use the expression 'geometrical' behaviour. We make this observation of symmetry precise by the following proposition.
'---+
Eo:
Mt,y
~
'Y
~
WU(x)
n WS(y)
'Y(O)
Mt,y
(T,'Y)~'Y.T='Y(-+T) ,
as it was already mentioned in the introduction. It is obvious that Eo identifies the group action (T, 'Y) ~ 'Y. T with the negative gradient flow,
provided that the endpoints are distinct, x =f. y, so that Mt,y consists of non constant trajectories. Proof. Notwithstanding the purpose of developing the Morse homology in strict analogy to Floer homology, that is to say by means of the Fredholm analysis which solely takes into account relative Morse theory, we shall build a bridge to classical Morse theory at this stage. Let us deviate here from the purely relative concept in order to elucidate the geometrical relations with the dynamical system which is provided by the (negative) gradient flow. This proof
n WS(y)
lR x (WU(x) n WS(y))
---->
WU(x)
(t ,p)
~
Wt(p) .
This gradient flow restricted to WU(x) n W8(y) represents a smooth, free and proper lR-action. Thus the equivalence 'Y •
yields the proof.
T
= (Eo loW
T 0
Eo) ("()
o
'i.
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
54
't~
Given
In order to describe the orbit space Mt,y = Mt,y/R of the so called unparametrized 7 or time-independent trajectories, we define the smooth function (2.42)
f ° Eo : Mt,y ~ R with depb) . ~ = df (-y(0)) . ~(O) = (\7 f(-y(O))
2.4. COMPACTNESS (s,~) E
55
ker DWa(O, 1'), the equation 0= DW a(O,1')' (s,~) = "y.
ep =
S
+~
follows. From "y = -\7f 01' we obtain ~(O) = s· \7f(-y(O)), such that (2.43) implies the identity ~(O) = O. Hence we conclude the injectivity of Dw a (0, 1') together with the surjectivity due to the dimension argument. Finally, we obtain the proof of the assertion from the identity
,~(O))
Definition 2.32 Let f(y) < a < f(x), such that 1'(0) is not critical for any l' E ep-l (a). Then a. is a regular value of ep and
Wa(7, 1')
M~:~ = ep-l (a)
because
is a (J.t(x) - J.t(y) -l)-dimensional submanifold of Mt,y and thus ofP;;;, too.
cPr
=
cPr (w a (0,1')) ,
is a diffeomorphism according to Proposition 2.31.
Summing up this geometrical investigation we obtain
-Ix,y -== MIx,y /Tll> M ~
~
D
wa as a diffeomorphism
MI,a x,y'
From a geometrical point of view the orbit space Mt,y represents exactly this transversal intersection of a surface associated to a regular level of f with the manifold WU(x)nWS(y), which gives an equivalent description of the trajectory space Mt,y as we have already seen. The reader is also referred to [Bo] and [S]. The following proposition yields an appropriate description for the orbit space.
which appears to be quite suitable in order to describe the differentiable struc ture on the space of unparametrized trajectories provided by the negative gra dient flow of f.
Proposition 2.33 The map
2.4.2 The Compactness Result for
U nparametrized Trajectories
,T,a . 'J:"
•
R x MI,a x,y
~
(7,1')
f---+
MIx,y 1'.7
First of all, let us state once again the fundamental assumptions for the in vestigation in the following text. Let M be a complete finite-dimensionalllie mannian manifold and let f be a smooth function on M satisfying suitable conditions as studied above such that
represents a JR-equivariant diffeomorphism with respect to the trivial JR-action on the left and to the action studied in Proposition 2.31 on the right side.
-I _ I / JR Mx,y - Mx,y
Proof. Due to Proposition 2.31 the JR-equivariance
Wa (7
represents a (J.t(x) - J.t(y) -1 )-dimensional manifold. The first observation with respect to this statement is that the function f does not necessarily need to be a Morse function. It is sufficient for f to give rise to a transversal intersection of df and M as a zero section within the cotangent bundle T* M, and we need a metric which is generic with respect to the Morse-Smale condition.
+ CT, 1') = Wa (7, 1'). CT
is obvious. It is similarly straightforward to verify the bijectivity of wa by means of Proposition 2.31 and the uniqueness for solutions of ordinary differ ential equations. Thus it is sufficient to prove that
DW(7,1') : JR x T-yM~:~ ~ T-yerM{y is an isomorphism. Let (s,~) E JR x T-yMt:~. Then (2.42) yields the identity (2.43)
df(-y
I"'V
'ji '&~
(0)) . ~(O) = 0 .
·.~..·; i
7This parametrization by the time variable t must not be confused with the dependence on an additional parameter A as will be considered below.
. L:':
:.;1•~:.•. .
:.
,
If we now wish to study the compactness properties of the trajec tory manifold associated to f, wehave to introduce further conditions on this function. In fact, we do not really need f to be a Morse function in the sense of coercivity, but to satisfy a more general condition as is fixed in the following definition.
Definition 2.34 We say that the function f fulfills the Palais-Smale condition, which generalizes coercivity, if the following holds:
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
56
(P-S)
Every sequence (Xn)nEN C M, such that (If(xn)1 )nEN is bounded and IV' f(xn)1 -+ 0 converges, has a convergent subsequence.
A subset K C Mt,y is called compact up to broken trajectories of order 1/ or up to (1/ -I)-fold broken trajectories exactly if for all (Un)nEN C K: Either (Un)nEN possesses a convergent subsequence, or there are critical points x = Yo, ... , Yi = Y E Crit f, 2 ::::; i ::::;
1/
and connecting trajectories together with associated reparametrization times Vj
E
M£j,YH"
(Tn,j)nEN
C
lR., j = 0, ... , i - I ,
2.4. COMPACTNESS
We are immediately led to the conclusion: Corollary 2.36 If, moreover, it holds that /-l(x) = /-l(Y) finite set of unparametrized trajectories.
u nk "Tnk,j
Cl~c
~
Vj
for some subsequence (nk) kEN. This convergence of trajectories Wj $ W in C~Y(~' M) shall henceforth be called weak convergence, and the weak convergence of unparame trized trajectories with respect to suitably provided reparametrization times is denoted by geometrical convergence. The geometrical convergence is sketched in Figure 2.1. Referring to these terms
Yo. Vo
+ 1,
then Mt,y is a
In order to give a proof for the central compactness result we first state an immediate consequence of the Palais-Smale condition. Auxiliary Proposition 2.37 If f satisfies (P-S) , there is a constant depending merely on f, x and Y, such that the set
K;'Y
such that we obtain the convergence
57
= {z E M I f(y)::::;
f(z)::::; f(x), lIV'f(z)11 ::::; f}
f
>0
is relatively compact.
The following lemma shall express the 'geometrical compactness' of the un parametrized trajectory spaces in terms of compactness of the parametrized spaces with respect to the C~c-topology.
Lemma 2.38 Every sequence subsequence
(Un)nEN C
Mi,y possesses a weakly convergent
u nk C,C:c -+ v E Coo (TDl ~, M) . Proof Essentially, the strategy for proving this lemma is to execute a transition from the H I ,2_topology of the Hilbert submanifold Mt,y to the C~c-topology. It appears to be of crucial importance that we have a uniform bound on the HI,2-norm for the trajectories with fixed endpoints x, y E erit f. The q~c convergence will, in principle, follow iteratively by elliptic regularity. The fact that the trajectories (Un)nEN arise from the negative gradi ent flow with respect to the fixed endpoints x and y yields the uniform estimate
YI.~"
t
(2.44) jIUn(T)1 dT= j
VI
Y2 •
t
2
Let d be the Riemannian distance on M. Then the estimate t
d(un(t), un(s))
::::;
~oposition 2.35 If f satisfies the Palais-Smale condition, the manifold
Mt,y is compact up to broken trajectories of order /-l(x) - /-l(Y).
j
IUn(T)1 dT
s
Figure 2.1: Weak or geometrical convergence toward a simply broken trajectory the central statement of this section is given by
for all s::::;t.
s
Holder
::::;
.j It 'I
,U IU.(T)I' s
(2.44)
::::;
J It - sl ..;
f(x) - f(y)
r'-.
dT
y"c;(
y
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
58
gives rise to the equicontinuity of (Un)nEN in CO(JR, M). In order to be able to apply the theorem of Arzela-Ascoli we still have to analyse the pointwise convergence. At this stage the uniform L 2 -bound on the derivatives Un as well as the (P-S)-condition appear to be the decisive arguments. Thus let us choose a fixed to E JR. According to Auxiliary Proposition 2.37 we can assume without loss of generality the inequality
!(V'f 0 Un)(to) I ~E Due to the asymptotic decrease
(tn)nEN
c
lim
Itl-oo JR, such that for all n E N:
(2.45) lV'f(un(t n )) I
for all nEN.
59
compact intervals. This amounts to stating that there is a
v E CO(JR, M) with v(t) = lim u nk (t), t E JR, s.t. k-oo CO ([-R,R]) Unkl[-R,R] ---+ vI [-R,R] for all R~O. The fact that the trajectories (U nk )kEN are solutions of the ordinary differential equation U = - f (u) associated to the smooth gradient field implies the C k _ convergence
V'
IV' f(un(t)) I = 0 we can find a sequence
Unkl[-R,R]
Ck([-R,R]) ---+
E
Lemma 2.39 Let (Un)nEN
J 8
with
In(s) =
lun(r)1 dr
0
Un (r )I
~ E,
by means of (2.45) for t n ~ r ~ to gives rise to the estimate ~
(1) -E
J~;
in (to)
(r)dr
tn
~
~~
J
d(f:sun ) (r)dr = f(un(tn))
V E
COO(JR, M) ,
Proof The first step of the proof is to observe that it is sufficient to show that the elements Un of the sequence converge uniformly toward x and y, respec tively, for ItI ----* 00. If this is true, Lemma 2.10 and the associated marginal remark on the dependence to = to(s) imply the existence of a fixed T ~ 0, such that we observe uniform exponential asymptotic convergence with respect to local coordinates at x and y: (2.46)
IU n ,loC x,lI(t)1 ~ cX ,ye->'x,lIl t l
for
ItI ~ T
and for all n EN.
Without loss of generality we can assume that the entire sequence lies within a coordinate neighbourhood of v in p~;~, (Un)nEN c Ol,2(v). Then referring to the local coordinates of the Hilbert manifold
d -(f 0 un)(r) ds
tn
$
such that v E Mt,y is a trajectory in the same trajectory space. Then the sequence (Un)nEN is also Hl,2-convergent,
Hence, we obtain the upper bound from to
M~,y be a weakly convergent sequence
p',2
d(foun)(r) = -1V'f o u n (r)1 2 ds
din -(r) ds
o
Un ~ vEMfx,y
the only step remaining in order to achieve pointwise convergence is to find an upper bound for (in (to) ) nEW Calculating
IV' f
c
Un
tn
din (r) = ds
., WIth v=-V'fov
[-R,R]
for all s E [tn, to] .
Thus the auxiliary proposition helps us in fixing the points (un (tn)) nEN within the bounded set K:'Y. In other words, there is an ro > 0 such that the estimate d(Un (tn), x) < ro holds for all n EN. Referring to the inequality
d(x,un(to)) < ro+ln(to)
V
iteratively for all kEN, thus concluding the proof.
lV'f(un(s)) \ ~
= E and
2.4. COMPACTNESS
Un = expv ~n, ~n E Hi,2(v*TM) ,
~ f(un(to))
to
f(x) - f(y) E
Since (un (t) ) nEN is a relatively compact set for each fixed instant t E JR, the theorem of Arzela-Ascoli provides a subsequence (u nk hEN converging on
the weak convergence
'coo
~n~O
together with the uniform estimate (2.46) finally imply the asserted H 1 ,2- con vergence. Thus we have to show the following uniform asymptotic convergence at y (and analogously at x):
2.4. COMPACTNESS
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
60
Given any neighbourhood U(y), there is an associated to E lR. such that the relation un(t) E U(y) holds for all t ~ to and n E N.
61
in contradiction to the assumption of tk
and un. ~
V
E
Mty.
0
Proof of proposition 2.35:At this stage we finally explore the obstruction to the strong Hl,2-convergence of the given sequence (Un)nEJII of unparametrized tra jectories. As we remarked above, Lemma 2.38 leads us to the weak convergence
Let B(y) be an isolating, open neighbourhood of y, that is B(y)nCrit f = {y}. Then the (P-S) condition on f guarantees that
N€ = {p E B(y) I If(p) - f(y)1 < E, lV'f(p)1 < E}, E > 0
Coo (Tn> M) un. Cl~c ----+ vErn.,
(2.48)
and thus to a trajectory associated to the same negative gradient flow,
forms a fundamentaLsystem of neighbourhoods of y. Moreover, we notice that
Uun(lR.)
U =
coo
--+ 00
(:t +V'f) OV=O,
nEJII
but we cannot necessarily conclude that this eventually new trajectory lies in the same trajectory space M~,y. In fact, it is the lR.-invariance with respect to the parametrization by time which gives rise to the possibility of the so-called geometrical splitting-up of the sequence of trajectories. Given any convergent subsequence of parametrized representatives according to Lemma 2.38, the re lation (2.48) implies the estimate
is a bounded set. This is clear from the decomposition
U=
U{Un (t) II V' f
0
Un (t ) I ~
E}
U{Un (t) II V' f
U
nEJII
0
Un (t ) I < E }
nEJII
In analogy to the proof of Lemma 2.38 the sets {un (t) uniformly bounded and
U{un(t) IIV' f 0 un(t)1 < E} C K:'Y
II V' f 0Un (t) I ~ E}
are
f(v(t)) E [f(y),f(x)]
Consequently, the set of possible manifolds of trajectories M~,ii' which might contain the element v, is already confined by the condition
nEJII
In consequence of the boundedness of U, the vector field V' f is globally Lip schitz continuous on U. This fact together with the equicontinuity of (Un)nEJII from Lemma 2.38 gives rise to the existence of a constant c such that the estimate 11V'f oun(t)I-IV'f OUn(S)11 < c· Jjt"""=Sf
0
un. (s) I >
~
Itk - sl < 4c2
for
='.
8
~
f(f;)
f(x)
~
f(x) .
Of course, we have to verify that v is an element of such a trajectory space condition as follows: First, relation (2.48) implies the confinement by
f(v(T)) E [J(y), f(x)]
(2.50)
Let us now prove the uniform convergence asserted above by contradiction: If we assume that there is an E > 0 together with sequences nk --+ 00 and tk --+ 00 satisfying lV'foUn.(tk)1 > E for all kEN, then we first deduce, due to (2.47),
IV' f
~
M~, ,y' anyway. We deduce this from (2.48) and the fundamental Palais-Smale
lV'foun(S)1 > lV'foun(t)l-cJjt"""=Sf for all s,tElR.,nEN
E2
f(y)
(2.49)
holds uniformly for all n E N. Hence we conclude the inequality (2.47)
for all t E lR. .
is relatively compact.
i:
such that the solution property (2.51)
v = -V'f
2
for all T E lR. 0
Iv(s)1 ds = f(v(T)) - f(v(-T))
v gives rise to the estimate
~ f(x) -
f(y)
for all T E lR.
00
,
Thus we obtain the finite £2-norm
and thus, second,
J
Ivl 2 ds < 00 and in consequence of this
-00
'j
the asymptotic behaviour
f(Un.(tk)) -f(Un.(tk+8)) =
j
t.+,5
lV'foun.(s)lds > 8.': 2
t.
E3
(2.52)
8c 2
3 E
t-+±oo
= t-+±oo lim v(t) = 0
Finally, by combining the Palais-Smale condition on f with (2.50) and (2.52) we deduce the relation v E M~,ii with respect to critical points which satisfy the estimate (2.49).
From this we extract the estimate
f(Unk(tk)) - f(y) > 8c2
, lim V'f(v(t))
for all kEN, ,,~l;,
, a'
Now, we have to study separately the different cases for x and y. Considering the first possibility, v E Mt,y, we immediately obtain strong Pi:~ convergence from Lemma 2.39. All the other cases which lead to the splitting up into broken trajectories, that is, without loss of generality,
v
E
M~,yl
with f(y)
2.4.3 The Compactness Result for Homotopy Trajecto ries Essentially, the statements on the compactness of the trajectory manifolds for the a-operator may also be transferred to the trajectory spaces of the homotopy morphisms. However, since we restrict our considerations to Morse homology, we shall work out the following proofs for the compactness result under more specialized assumptions. This will simplify, for instance, the step of the uniform L 2 -bound.
< f(y') ,
can now be controlled by means of suitable reparametrizations. Let us choose any regular level a en f satisfying f(y) < a < f(y') and a reparametrization of (u nk ), Uk = U nk • Tk = U nk (. + Tk), (Tk hEN C IR ,
Definition 2.40 Let us remember that the coercivity property of the Morse functions appeared as an essential part within the proof of the compactness result for unparametrized trajectories. Turning now to the time-dependent situation of a homotopy between Morse functions we have to guarantee an analogous kind of coercivity. We call a smooth homotopy h = h o. {3 : IR x M ----t IR between the two Morse functions rand f{3 a Morse homotopy, if htO = h(t,') satisfies the following condition:
such that the identity f((u nk • Tk)(O)) = a holds for all kEN. If we ap ply Lemma 2.38 once again to this sequence Uk, a further weakly convergent subsequence
_
Ukl
c~c_ ------;
V
is extracted such that it complies with the estimate
(2.53)
f(y) ~ f(V(+oo)) ~ f(v(-oo)) ~ f(y')
= 00,
if
x M, d(xo, X n )
----t
h,
a
.
.
hsO
00 8
=
ah
at (s,·) = 0
for all
lsi
~ R .
Thus, the (IL(X o:) - IL(X{3))-dimensional manifold of the so-called homotopy trajectories (h-trajectory) comprises the solution curves U a {3 of the ordinary non-autonomous differential equation
that this iterative process of reparametrization stops at broken trajectories of order IL(X) - lL(y) at the latest. This can be seen immediately from the inequality
(2.54)
i'(t) =
Vh t
VI + Ih l 1Vhl 2
t
lL(v(j+!) (-t.oo)) < ... < IL(X) , with the ends fixed at the critical points
which necessarily holds after restriction to non-constant trajectories and suit D able renumbering. Thus the assertion of the proposition follows. Remark It seems worth emphasizing, once again, that instead of the strong compactness condition for the sublevel-sets Ma(f) = f-l(( - oo,aJ), which is meant by the coercivity for classical Morse functions, the Palais-Smale property defined above is thoroughly sufficient for the compactness result of the trajectory manifolds M~~~, which plays an essential role in the definition of the a-operator.
C IR
(tn, Xn)nEN
Now let us conSIder a smooth, regular Morse homotopy f o. :::: fl-'. Apart from the demanded coercivity property it particularly holds that
IL(V(j)(-oo)) -1L(V(j)(+oo)) > 0 ,
=
lim h tn (x n )
n----;.CX)
Iterating these procedures of sorting by the values of f at the ends of the trajec tories and executing suitable reparametrizations gives rise to a process which provides us step by step with either Hl,2-convergent subsequences or merely Cl~c-convergent subsequences tending toward constant, i.e. trivial, trajectories, or it 'recovers' new critical points of f. It is due to the Morse-Smale estimate for the Morse indices at the ends of the non-constant trajectories,
lL(y) < ... < IL(V(j) (-00))
63
2.4. COMPACTNESS
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
62
Xa
o,(t)
and x{3 of f o. and f{3, respectively.
As to this manifold we are again provided with a compactness result similar to that in the time-independent case. Once again the only obstruction against the strong Hl,2-compactness consists of the CI~c-convergence toward broken trajectories. This time we additionally must distinguish between the IR-invariant trajectories with respect to fa and f/3 and the h o. /3-trajectories. The convergence behaviour of homotopy trajectories is expressed by
.j~
.
~
8Note that this definition relies crucially on the completeness of the Riemannian manifold.
--------
~
.._-- --;;--
1JI~'
"r.n:rm
¥i.
-~~~wro~~~~,,¥;E~~~~~g'1f1'~~~~V-;¥~~~~"it»~i"'illi1i!Alf~1i!f;-f<~~
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
64
Proposition 2.41 Let (Un)nEN C M
h 13 :
0 XO:'Xfj
2.4. COMPACTNESS
be a sequence of h Otf3 -trajectories.
The computation
Provided that there is no Hl,2-convergent subsequence, there exist critical points Xa = x~, ... , x~
E
Crit(Ja), x~, ... , x1
= xf3 E Crit(Jf3)
65
d dsh(s,"((s))(t)
,
1 ~ k + l ~ J..l(x a ) - J..l(xf3)
h(t,"((t)) (2~4)
(2.56)
and (h af3 -)trajectories j
Jf3
va EM xa,xo: i i+l, Vf3 EM Xf3'X/3 j HI' Vaf3 E
lim h(t,"((t)) = t-->t+
(T~,n)nEN, (TJ,n)nEN
C
with 0
~
i
~
"((t)
c~o
---->
k - 1 and 0
i
j
va<' Un' Tf3,n ~
j
~
c~c
--t
j
vf3
and Un
00 .
Applying the identity (2.54) once again we deduce
IR ,
lim 1'(t) = 0 t-->t+
such that up to the choice of a respectively suitable subsequence weak conver gence of the form Un . Ta,n
0
together with (2.55) yields
h af3
Mxa,x13
together with reparametrization sequences
i
2) (ht - VI +l\lhtl 2 Iht 1\lht l2 J
r
i
+ \lh t '1'(t)
C{~)c --t
o
and hence a contradiction to the supposed maximality of "(.
v a f3
Auxiliary Proposition 2.43 There is a uniform L2-estimate for the homo topy trajectories with fixed endpoints. It is given as
l - 1 holds. Moreover, the inequality
J 00
J..l(X~) < ... < J..l(X~) ~ J..l(x~) < .. , < J..l(X~) is satisfied.
2
11'1 dt < C(X a , X(3),
E
M
h af3
Xa ,xf3
-00
Proof. First, we may estimate the integral by means of the identity (2.56). This yields
Provided that we are able to prove a statement on the Cl~c-conver gence in the case of homotopy trajectories, which is analogous to Lemma 2.38, the proof of this compactness result is accomplished according to Proposition 2.35. The weak convergence which proves crucial for this compactness result is obtained as follows:
00
J
00
2
11'1 dt
(2~4)
lim h(t,"((t))
t-->t+
= 00
,
if t+ is finite. Thus, provided that t+ is finite, it follows that
(2~6)
t->t+
S
00 .
2
00
-00
VI
l\lhtl dt + Ih t n\lh t l 2
h(t,"((t))) dt
-00
'1;"'1:'"
I,:,
R
(2.57)
r(Xa<) - ff3(Xf3)
h(t, "((t))dt
-R
f L;IIi
.~,
'·1
lim dd h(s,"((s))(t) =
J
00
Auxiliary Proposition 2.42 Each solution "(: (C(to, xo), t+(to, xo)) ~ M of the non-autonomous differential equation (2.54) satisfies t+(to,xo) = 00, that is the 2-pammeter flow is global in forward time direction.
Proof. Let a maximal solution of (2.54) "( : (t-, t+) ~ M be given. Due to the completeness of the metric space M and the requirement of coercivity (2.53) to the Morse homotopy h af3 it holds that
2
l\lhtl dt ~ 2 1 + Ih t \2J\lht I --.;:
J -J (d~h(T,"((T))(t) +J
-00
-00
(2.55)
for all "(
I:,
'I"""',
;~
:i"\
j
Since we deal with coercive Morse functions, the compactness of the set {x E M I r(x) ~ r(x a )} implies the relative compactness of the set {"(( -R) E !v! I"( E M Xa ,xl3}' As a consequence the continuous 2-parameter flow from Auxiliary Proposition 2.42 yields the fact that
U"( ([- R, RJ) ,EM xa ,xl3
is relatively compact
·",.~c""";-~,,,-,,--
(2.58)
"':;i;~.;:.,;;.;;._-'C . ",.",-"-",,,,,.,..~.
~_,._'~-,
C-' -,;,',...,,"'_, ',-,0"_.":.,...., cc __ ,
__ ~;,~,~:"",,,<.m __ ~ __ •. ".~V"_ ... _ ~~
67
Obviously the divergence Tk - t -00 follows, that is, without loss of generality, < - R. Since rcparametrization leaves the uniform estimate from Auxiliary Proposition 2.43 invariant and since we can further asjume pointwise conver gence of subsequences, we are able to deduce the weak convergence
Therefore the uniform bound
K
"';;::;.;
2.4. COMPACTNESS
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
66
/~~ ...::;:..:=.;:.~.::.-
Tk
K(x a , xf3)
su p { /h(t,)'(t))/I
tE[-R,R],)'EM~:~xfJ}
exists. Finally, the uniform L 2-bound is obtained from (2.57) as c(~a,Xf3) = r(x a ) - ff3(xf3)
+ 2KR
u nk
(2.62)
.
COO •
Tk
~ v' EMf" y,y'
toward an fa-trajectory up to the choice of a suitable subsequence. An analo gous reparametrization algorithm thus leads us to the assertion. 0
o
Corollary 2.46 Let us state an important conclusion from Auxiliary Proposi Corollary 2.44 In particular, we obtain a compactness result for the h-tra tion 2.42. Since the set {x E MI!"(x) ~ !"(x a )} is compact, the same is true jectories as point sets from the auxiliary proposition together with the time for the set constant Morse junctions at the ends of the Morse homotopy:
U )'(i)
(2.59)
is relatively compact .
{ )'(+00)
'YEM"ct'''fJ
Lemma 2.45 Let (Un)nEN C M~:~xfJ be a sequence of h af3 -trajectories with fixed endpoints. Then there is a weakly convergent subsequence E
Coo (1Tll M) Jl'l.,
'i~":: I'
1J I:,;
'1; "
v E M~~fJx"(3 0: I
with
r(x~) ~ r(x a ), ff3(xf3) ~ ff3(x~) . fJ
The proof of Proposition 2,41 is carried out now in accordance with principally the same scheme as for the time-independent trajectories. The only difference consists of the distinction between the lR-invariant trajectories and the h-trajectories: Proof of proposition 2.41: It is sufficient to consider the case f(x~) < f(x a ). Once again, let a be any fixed regular value from (J(x~), f(x a )) and choose a reparametrization sequence in accordance with the condition
f (u nk (Tk))
=
a.
}
~: ;,
The compactness result for the parameter trajectory manifold M~ct~:fJ associ ated to a generic homotopy of Morse homotopies is obtained according to the same scheme as for homotopy trajectories. We recall that this manifold of A parametrized trajectories (provided that we deal with a compact discrete set)
forms the basis for the definition of the chain homotopy operator lJtf3 a . Since
the parameter dependence
~ ~'
o
(2.61 )
'Vh t
VI + ... 0)'
2.4.4 The Compactness Result for
A-Parametrized Trajectories
•
Proof The proof is accomplished by strict analogy to Lemma 2.38. Auxil iary Proposition 2.43 gives rise to the equicontinuity of the sequence. The subsequent Corollary 2.44 yields the pointwise convergence for approriate sub sequences. It is worthwhile to mention that at this point we crucially relied on the coercivity of the asymptotically constant homotopy. The assertion now follows analogous to Lemma 2.38 together with the property
(2.60)
"y =
due to the auxiliary proposition. Thus, each critical point X a E Crit fa can be connected to only finitely many critical points xf3 E Crit ff3 via h af3 -trajecto ries. In fact, this will be the reason that the homotopy morphism f3 a , which will be dealt with in Chapter 4, is indeed well-defined.
Relying on these preparations we are now able to prove the crucial weak con vergence also for the homotopy trajectories.
CJ':c V U nk -----t
I r('Y(-R)) ~ r(x a ),
J
H>,
=
H(A,', '), H: [0,1] x lR x M
-t
lR
:1\1,:
~.. ;~
:,:; .',If' (~:'
,:~.,;~'
~
j "
is smooth and the parameter set compact, there are analogous uniform esti
mates. Once again, the only obstruction to the Hl,2-compactness occurs as the
C~c-convergence toward broken trjaectories. Here, these broken trajectories
consist of one H~f3 -trajectory and several fa- and ff3 -trajectories depending
on the dimension and the connected component of the trajectory manifold.
In particular, we deduce the conclusion that M{fctfJ ct, y fJ represents a finite set {(Al,Ul), ... ,(AII,UII )} with Ai i= 0,1, provided that we deal with
the relative Morse index /-l(x a ) = /-l(Yf3) - 1.
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
68
2.5
Gluing
2.5. GLUING
69
Theorem 3 Given a compact set of simply broken trajectories K
c M{y
x
Mt,z' there is a lower bound PK ~ 0 and a smooth map In the last section we saw how the broken trajectories associated to the time independent and time-dependent gradient flow form an obstruction to the com pactness of the trajectory spaces. By introducing the gluing operation we now intend to complete the complementary concept of 'gluing' and 'compactness' as was described in the introduction. The gluing operation #P will map simply broken trajectories, that is, pairs of the form
(U, v)
E
Mx,y x My,z ,
into the higher dimensional trajectory space Mx,z in a way depending on an additional positive gluing parameter p. At first we restrict ourselves to the trajectory spaces of the time-independent gradient flow associated to a fixed Morse function. Principally, the construction of the gluing map for trajectory spaces in the time-dependent and A-parametrized case is accomplished similarly with regard to the technical details. As to notation and the main ideas for the proof we follow the concept of gluing that was developed in [F6] for the symplectic case. For a compact presentation of this principle which in general is related to C. H. Taubes, the reader is referred to [F4].
2.5.1
Gluing for the Time-Independent 'frajectory Spaces
The crucial problem concerning the gluing operation we are looking for is its dependence on noncanonical assumptions. For example, it appears that the compactness of the set of broken trajectories (u, v) E Mx,y x My,z, which are to be 'glued together' and mapped into Mx,z, is an indispensable prerequisite. The crucial problem, however, is the lack of uniqueness. Notwithstanding the fact that given a compact set of broken trajectories we can always construct a gluing map, which embeds the glued trajectories in a unique way, this is per formed in a necessarily noncanonical way. Clearly, any suitable composition with certain diffeomorphisms on the space of trajectories provides us with an other, different gluing map endowed with the same convergence behaviour with regard to the compactness-gluing cobordism. A consequence of this uncertainty is the lack of a natural, immediate law of associativity,
#:
K x [PK,oo)
(u,v,p) satisfying: The map #p: K
'----t
t---+
--+
ML
u#pv
Mt,z is an embedding for each gluing pa
rameter P ~ PK· Moreover, given a compact set R C M{y x unparametrized trajectories, # induces a smooth embedding
'#: R x [PR'oo)
'----t
Mt,z
of
Mx,z ,
such that we obtain weak convergence toward the simply broken trajectory ~
'#' U pV
coo - 10e +
(AU,VA)
as P tends to infinity, P --+ 00. On the other hand we obtain the converse result that any sequence of unparametrized trajectories converging tr: a simply broken trajectory finally lies within the range of such a gluing map #.
The gluing procedure may be sketched as in Figure 2.2.
x
y.d'
~
z·
Figure 2.2: Gluing for unparametrized trajectories
?
(u#Pt V)#P2 W ~ U#Pt(V#P2 W) . The result, which will be sufficient according to our concerns with homology theory, is stated as follows:
In relation to the investigation in the last section this theorem sup plies us with a far more detailed characterization of the obstructions to com pactness of the unparametrized trajectory spaces Mx,y, at least as concerns the relative Morse index 2. Actually, these obstructions are described topo logically as cylindrical ends R x [PR' 00) with the set R of simply broken
70
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
2.5. GLUING
71
trajectories as a cross section. It should be mentioned that a treatment of higher dimensional trajectory spaces would require a more involved analysis. But in principle we are led to a kind of cobordism theory as we have already explained in the introduction. This is what we call the 'compactness-gluing' cobordism.
Due to the compactness of K we find a finite covering by such neighbourhoods UiL x Uv yielding the constant
The construction of the gluing map is carried out in three steps: First, we establish a smooth pre-gluing map #~, which glues broken trajecto ries (u, v) E Mx,y x ;\1y,z rendering a smooth curve in P;:~, such that the image (u#~v )(iR) differs from u(iR) u v(R) by a sufficiently small amount and, moreover, such that the convergence toward the unparametrized trajectories
In the following chapter, on orientation and gluing with respect to Fredholm operators, especially such asymptotically constant curves will playa significant role. These curves allow us to define the simplest kind of gluing operation,l1 namely
U
T(K) = max T(u, v) . {(iL,v)}
ck:c (Au, vA) # 0pv ------->
~(t + p), v(t-p),
t
~0
t~O
We thus obtain
ill/v
is provided for p --t 00. The crucial second step will provide a procedure of associating nearby trajectories from Mx,z to these preparatorily glued curves, which represent approximate solutions of the negative gradient flow, in a unique way for large gluing parameters p. In order to guarantee uniqueness we in prin ciple use a normal bundle of Mx,z within P;:;. However, this normal bundle is not supplied canonically. By means of the projection along the noncanonically transversal fibres 9 we find a contracting map. Due to the Banach contraction mapping principle and in consequence the implicit function theorem, we obtain a unique solution of the negative gradient flow if the gluing parameter p is large enough, that is to say that we differ little enough from the original trajectories up to time-shifting. Third and last, we have to verify the embedding property. This is largely owing to the uniqueness lO guaranteed by the Banach fixed point theorem, if p is large enough.
+1
with T = T(u, v) .
Definition 2.47 Throughout the whole section we will use the following cut-off functions:
/3± : :i --t [0,1] , which are defined by
I, /3-(t) = { 0,
t
~-1
t~O
and
/3+(t) =
{O,1,
t
t
~0
~
1
We are now able to define the preliminary, approximative gluing map, that is the so-called pre-gluing map,
#0:
Let us assume as in Theorem 3 that K c M~,y x Mt,z is a compact subset. Then given any pair (u, v) E K, we choose smooth curves (iL, v) E C~y x C:;:z appropriately such that within the Banach manifolds P;:~ and there are coordinate neighbourhoods UiL and Uv containing the previously given trajectories: u E UiL and v E Uv .
Kx
[Po, (0)
(u,v,p)
Pb:;
In particular, let us choose iL and v asymptotically constant at the common endpoint y: iL(t)=y, t~T
v(t) = y, t ~ -T ,for some T = T(u, v)
for all p ~ T
E C'::z
We shall henceforth use the symbol # for the gluing operation concerning trajectories as well as for the gluing of asymptotically constant curves.
The Pre-Gluing Map and the Uncanonical Normal Bundle
9In fact, this can be formulated as a retraction. lOstill referring to the noncanonical normal bundle
(u#piJ)(t) = {
(2.63)
r-+
--t
P;':~
u#~v
by (2.64)
u#~v
=
eXPiL#pv
(/3- . [exp,fil (u)]p + /3+ . [expZ1(v)L p )
for Po = Po(K) > T(K) + 1. Here, (iL, v) are chosen suitably with (u,v) UiL x U" referring to the above covering. The notation .:it, :'llf,J\··
:i: '~r
a
j
Up(t) = u(t + p), t E JR describes the time-shifting that has been already studied above. llNote that this does not concern non-trivial trajectories of the gradient flow.
E
'-,'-. -: : -
~-----~~~~'=" ~-~~ ~--
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
72
'"
;,
;,."':
It is easy to verify that the definition of u#~v is independent of the individually chosen coordinate charts from the fixed atlas, as the equivalent representation
(2.65) (u#~v)(t) =
up(t), expy[,8- expy1(up) +,8+ expy1(v_p)](t), { v_p(t),
,8-V'2exp~~:~p]
8 8p (u#~v)(t)
up(t), [ { V'2 expy· - ,8+V'2 expy E
v_ p
------ -
= - -------=- - -
2.5. GLUING
73
consists of determining the correction term between the actual gluing of trajec tories and the already defined approximate pre-gluing in a way which is inde pendent of the trivialization. Actually, this amounts to the below construction of a normal bundle LJ...
t ~-1 It I ~ 1 t~1
Throughout the following investigations we will use the notations
x = (u, V, p)
follows from the asymptotic behaviour of u and v and the definition of u#pv. Hence it is only with respect to the lower bound Po(K) that the definition of #0 depends on the choice of the covering of K. Moreover, the two equivalent representations (2.64) and (2.65) yield the smoothness of this pre-gluing map #0. We conclude the differentiability with respect to u and v from (2.64), and formula (2.65) implies the differentiability with respect to P yielding the formula 12
(2.66)
-~~-~=:=::,-~~~
E K x
[Po, 00),
Px,z = P,~::, Po: Px,z ----7 L 2(P;,zTM)
W:)(
= u#~v E
Jf--t"y+V'JoJ,
where we refer to the local representation with respect to w E C'::z:
(2.67) Pw
~
t ~-1 (t), It I 1 t~ 1
=
V'2 exp~l oPo 0 expw : H 1,2(w*TM) cOw
----7
L 2(w*TM)
Since the broken trajectories (u, v) E K are composed of smooth curves, the nonlinear operator Pw ,,- E Fred(w~TM) is well-defined as well. The Rieman nian metric (.,.) on M induces well-defined Riemannian metrics
-v_p(t), L 2 ((u#~v)*TM) .
J(~(t),
(~, O~,2
((t) )-y(t)dt
IR
(~,
Remark As we will see in Proposition 2.50 below, already this pre-gluing map #~ has the embedding property if p is large enough, Le. p ~ p(K) for p(K)
for
large enough. This can be seen from the fact that the differential associated to the map (2.64) ker DFu x ker DFv
(~,
()
----7
H1,2((U#~v)*TM)
f--t
V'2 exp (,8- (V'2 exp-1~) p +,8+ (V'2 exp-1 (L p )
0;,2 J
(V't~, V'tO~,2 + (~, O~,2 E
COO
X,Z
C
together with the associated fibre norms (see the appendix)
1 ,2 p X,Z
11·111,2 and 1/.11 0 ,2 on the bundles
H 1,2(p*X,Z TM) c L 2(P*xlz TM) . Thus the smooth map #0; K x [Po, 00) ----7 Px,z supplies us with the Hilbert bundles H = #0* H 1,2(p*xlz TM) and L = #0* L 2(P*x1z TM)
will prove injective for large p. In the following considerations we provide the fundamental struc tures which will serve to find the actual gluing map according to the Banach contraction principle. We shall construct suitable Hilbert bundles, a linear glu ing version, which is injective, and a normal bundle which is to guarantee the uniqueness of the gluing operation.
on the base space K x [Po, 00). Additionally, the inclusion i : K '---* Mx,y x My,z
induces the Hilbert bundle
It is worth mentioning that if we could cover K by only one sin
1,2 ( H 1,2)2 = i* (H IMx,y
gle pair of coordinate neighbourhoods, we would be able to reduce the whole problem to the trivialized framework. Then we could renounce this somewhat extensive bundle constructions. The trouble in the non-trivial case, however,
X
H 1,2
IM y ,.
)
on K x [po, 00). According to these bundles Hand L we are able to identify the map Fw ,,- from (2.67) for W x E #o(K x [Po, 00)) via the pre-gluing map #0 : X f--t W x with the fibre restriction of a smooth bundle map
12For the definition of V'2 exp the reader is referred to Definition A.15 in Appendix A.2.
")fJ1•... ;',
"
a ·
,- .------_._--_._-_:-:=--""'
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
74
H~O
-
F
\$ /
2.5. GLUING
75
(H 1 ,2)2
L
K x [po, 00)
In this context 0 denotes an open neighbourhood of the zero section, such that the boundary is properly bounded away from the zero section with respect to the norm 11-11 ,2' This is concluded by means of the injectivity neighbourhood 1 associated to the exponential map, the compactness of K and the construction of the pre-gluing map, because the image of the curves u#~ v (i) remains within a compact neighbourhood. This bundle map F: H ~ 0 - L together with the identification Fx = Fwx thus has the explicit representation
=
[(gt + V7 f) oexpupe] (t), V72 expv_)C)-I. [(gt + V7 f) expv_ p C] (t),
V72exPu)O-I. {
0
Fup(e)(t), { FV_p(C)(t), with
eE H
1 ,2
Up'
CE H 1 ,2
V_ p '
t
~-1
t
~
1
t ~ -1
t ~ 1
~r(-00,-11 == ~1(-00,-11 til
"'1[1,00)
-
t
= "'1[1,00)
'
,
and we obtain the identity
Fwx (0) = Fo(w x ) Moreover, the fibre derivative
D 2 F(X)(0) = DFwx (0) : H x - Lx
(~#x()(t)
a
at + X(t) . We shall henceforth use the shorter notation =
~p(t),
[
2
{ V7 exp· (_p(t),
+
exp=~ :~p
J3-V7 2 J3+ V7 2 exp
~1
t ~-1
] (t),
(-p
t
ItI ~1
The fibre derivative V72 exp is taken at the points exp;1 (u#~v (t», exp;1 (up (t»
and exp;1 (v_ p (t», respectively
This corresponds exactly to the linearization of (2.65).
#0
as it is given by equation
The crucial point of the construction of the gluing map can be found in the process which deduces the linearization of the trajectory gluing from this lin ear version of the approximate gluing #0. By the linearization of the actual trajectory gluing we mean a projection onto the tangent bundle of Mx,z as a subbundle of HI~x.%' But it is exactly this projection map which cannot be canonical within our construction. We need the concept of orthogonality, which is global with respect to K, namely the normal bundle of Mx,z as has been already described above. So, let us consider the following candidate for a normal bundle:
Definition 2.49 Since D u = DF" and D v = DFv associated to (u, v) Mx,y x My,z are surjective Fredholm opemtors, (ker)2
at 0 is exactly the linearization of F o , which has been already studied as a Fredholm operator of the type
Dx
H
\ffi/
K x [po, 00)
Fwx(~)(t)
L
=
U
E
ker Du x ker D v C (H 1 ,2)2
XEKx [Po,oo)
is a subbundle with constant and finite dimension. Then the following vector space is well-defined for any X E K x [Po, 00):
L1.. = x
{v x E H
1 ,2 x
W
=H I x
(vx,
~#p( )~,2 = 0 } for all (~, () E ker Dv. x ker D v
•
DFwx(O), X E K x [Po, 00)
Definition 2.48 We are able to define the linear version of the pre-gluing opemtion as a bundle homomorphism by
The following first, fundamental proposition within this discussion of the gluing problem states that these vector spaces represent the fibres of the normal bundle we are looking for.
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
76
"{f
Proposition 2.50 There is a lower parameter bound PI ~ Po, such that for any gluing parameter P ~ PI and broken trajectory (u, v) E K the Fredholm operator D x : H x ~ Lx is onto and the composition of #x with the L 2 _ orthogonal projection onto ker D x induces an isomorphism
cPx
= Proj~e~ D" 0 #x : ker D u x ker D v
2.5. GLUING
Therefore it is sufficient to show that, given any broken trajectory (u, v) E K, we can find a lower parameter bound p( u, v), such that cPx is onto for all P ~ p(u,v). This is due to the assumed compactness of K which implies a uniform constant p(K), such that cPx is onto for all X E K x [p(K), 00). Hence we can conclude
-=-. ker D x
dim ker D x
We deduce from this first result that ker D =
77
(c:!:)
U ker D x
~
+ dim ker D v
dim ker D u
J.L(x) - J.L(z) = indD x ~ dimker D x
which gives rise immediately to the identity
xEKx[Pl,oo)
dim ker D x = dim ker D u
is a subbundle of H on K x [PI, 00) with the finite dimension J.L(x) - J.L(z) and that #1(ker)2 : (ker)2 ~ H
and which consequently implies the asserted isomorphism property of all X E K x [p( K), 00).
represents a bundle homomorphism. Hence, we obtain
L.L =
U
+ dim ker D v cPx
for
Therefore, let us choose an arbitrary, fixed broken trajectory (u, v) E
K. Then it suffices to find a constant C < 0 and a lower parameter bound p,
L~
such that the uniform estimate
xEK X [PI ,00)
L.L
ffitop
IIDx~ll£2 ~ c 11~11£2
(2.69)
as a finite-codimensional vector bundle on K x [PI, 00) satisfying the relation
"
holds for any p ~ jj and ~ E
R (#I(ker)2) = H .
L.L
ffitop
This is clear, because there is a
~ E ker D x with (~, R(#x)
In fact, as we shall see below, we are led to the decomposition (2.68)
Lt.
J(
)L2 = 0 , J(
if cPx should fail to be surjective. But owing to (2.69) this ~ E the zero vector.
ker D = H .
Summing up these arguments we may say that L.L can be considered to be the normal bundle which is needed for the gluing construction.
Let us now prove the estimate (2.69) indirectly. quences (Pn)nEN and (~n)nEN satisfying the conditions
Proof of proposition 2.50: Concerning the central feature, the proof of this nonlinear gluing theorem is essentially patterned on the proof for an analogous gluing operation in Floer homology as can be found in [F-H]. As we already noticed above, the operator D x = DFw " referring to
(2.70)
Pn
~ 00, ~n
E
Lt
has to be
We assume se
L~n' II~nIIL~n = 1 and IIDxn~nll ~ 0 .
First, we wish to deduce the convergence H
w x = u#ov E pl,2 P x,z
1 ,2
~n ~ 0
is a Fredholm operator satisfying the identity
from these assumptions. As a matter of simplification we shall transfer the situation to the trivialized case of lR.n . Because we have chosen the broken trajectory (u, v) E K to be fixed and due to the fact that, provided any large gluing parameter P, the piece of curve U#~VI[-l,l] lies within the normal neighbourhood N(y) of y with respect to the exponential map, we obtain
indD x = J.L(x) - J.L(z) According to the assumption that the Morse-Smale condition be fulfilled, the Fredholm operators D u and D v are onto. Hence we obtain the expressions
U (u#~v)*TM
dimker D u = indDu = J.L(x) - J.L(Y), dimkerDv=indDv=J.L(Y)-J.L(z) .
pE[po,oo)
t
';\:,.
I /
~:,,-
This is immediate from the trivial spectral flow associated to the constant curve A y . Now let f3: IR --+ [0, 1J be a smooth cut-off function of the type
as a trivial vector bundle on ffi: x [po, 00 ). Thus starting from a trivialization lP : TMjN(Y) --+ N(y) xIR n we find further trivializations lP u and lPv of u*TM y and v*T M respectively together with
U (u#~v)*TM
lP:
---+
[po,
x ffi: x lR
00)
1,
(3(t) = { 0,
n
pE[po,oo)
and let r n notation
satisfying the relations lPl [1,00) == -
Cl
I
~ sup IlPu#ov(t) ~ tER
C2
lP X : H~,2
--=-. H
,2(1R,lR
with
)
0<
(;1
~ IllPxll op ~
1
~~( ~) rn
rn
.
~
r . C+ IIDXn~nIIL2 + II(D y - DxJ~nIIL2([_rn,rn]) n
~
~ • C + IIDxn~nIIL2 +
+
IIDy~nll£2([_rn,rnl)'
C
=
[~BJ I~I
1
r n
sup IIA Xn (t) - AyIIEnd(Rn)
tE[-rn,r n ]
--+
L 2 (IR "lRn )
sup IIA Xn - AyIIEnd(Rn)
~
JI~nll£2
sup JIA Xn (t) - Ayll
tE[-I,ll
[-rn,r n ]
+ (~n)nEN C H ,2(1R,IRn), II~nllL2 = 1 with l
Here, A Xn is a curve
=
Due to assumption (2.71) and the estimate
n =!!.. H ,2(1R at + A Xn . , lR )
that is
IIDXn~nllL2
--+
sup IIAu(t + Pn) - Ayll
tE[-rn,-l]
0 .
+
sup IIAv(t - Pn) - Ayll ,
tE[l,rnl
A Xn
n
E Coo (ffi:, End(IR ))
where all terms on the right side tend to zero as u and v converge exponentially to the critical point y, we conclude
determined by the trivialization lP Xn ' Referring to the trivialization lP y TyM --+ lR n we obtain
A y = lP y ' D(V'2 exp;1 .(V' f
0
lim IIDy(Wn. ~n)IIL2
n--->oo
expy)) . lP;1
Dy
a
at + A y
=
induces an isomorphism
D y : H 1,2
131'f>pl is the norm of 'f>p : TpM upon TM.
-=-. lR
n
=0 .
Therefore, the isomorphism D y from (2.72) yields the Hl~;-convergencewe wish to verify. Finally, this result can be transferred back to the non-trivial case, that is
as a constant operator which is conjugated to the Hessian H 2 f(y), so that the Fredholm operator
(2.72)
dt·
r~ II~(,·: ')~nll£2
(;2 .
Next, these uniform estimates enable us to consider assumptions (2.70) above without loss of generality for the trivial case
(2.71)
~(f3rn )(t)
f3r n(t) = f3( ~), s.t. rn
~
Concerning the class L 2 we are led to an analogous result.
D Xn
be the sequence r n = ~Pn' Additionally, we choose the short
IIDy(Wn . ~n) II £2 11(f3~n) . ~n + f3r n . Dy~nll£2
for all P ~ Po ,
P
n
It I ~ ~ ItI ~ 1
These preparations give rise to the following series of estimates:
and for all p ~ Po the isomorphisms l
--+ 00
== lPvl (-00,-1]
such that we obtain the uniform estimate 13 0<
79
2.5. GLUING
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
78
(2.73)
1 • 2 ([ c H Xn -rn,rn ] )
<"n
---+
0 .
By this conclusion, that the supports of ~n become more and more concen trated at the asymptotic ends as n increases, we are now able to transfer the estimate IIDXn~nll£2 --+ 0 Xn
--=-. L 2 with respect to the Riemannian metric (.,.)
t
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
80
for the varying Fredholm operators to the fixed operators Dv. and D v:
IIDu(,81-Pn~n'-Pn)IIL~
11;31~nll£2
+ 11,81 Dv. pn ~nIIL~pn
"Pn
11;31~nll L 2xn +
11,81 DXn~nll£2Xn
II~nIIL~J[-2,-1,J) + IIDxn~nIlL~n
- ::;;
According to assumption (2.70) and the above estimate (2.73) we are led to the convergence
IIDu(,81-Pn~n,-pJIIL2 --> 0 .
" Since Dv. is a Fredholm operator, this amounts to the existence of an (); E ker Dv. with _
H 1 ,2
-
(};Pn II £2
--> 0 .
V-Po
--> 0,
(); E ker Dv. ,
-->0,
'YEkerDv
'
The contradiction with the former assumption is now caused by trying to piece together all these different conclusions in the series of identities: 1
lim II~nIIL2Xn
= 3
'Y
=0
-
F
\$ /
L
Additionally, we want expw 'Y(X) to comply with the geometrical convergence toward the broken trajectory" (u, v) as the gluing parameter P tends to infinity, P --> 00. Since we are provided with the convergence property for u#~v due to the construction, we shall be satisfied with a sufficiently rapid convergence for the correction term, 'Y(u#~v)-->O as p-->oo.
)
lim (,81~n, ~n) £2 n
Xn
+ lim (,8~l~n, ~n) L2 n
We shall derive all these results from the existence and uniqueness theorems which are supplied within the Banach space calculus. In this frame work the bundle L.L guarantees the (noncanonical!) uniqueness. It is essentially the fixed point calculus due to a contraction mapping which will lead us to the necessary correction term. We will obtain this contraction mapping from Proposition 2.50, that is the bundle decomposition (2.68), which gives rise to the vector bundle isomorphism
Xn
as supp(l -,81 - ,8~1) C [-2,2] (2.74)
-
0
n--+(X)
lim (,81~n + ,8~l~n + (1- ,81- ,8~l)~n, ~n )L2" n n (2:2:
satisfying F
K x [Po, 00)
Summing up, we observe the following approximate behaviour:
11,8~l~n-,8+'Y-pnIIL:n "n
for X E K X [PI, 00)
finally represents a gradient flow trajectory. That is to say that we are searching for a section
H-:JO
"Pn
11,81 ~n - ,8- (};Pn II L2
expw" 'Y(X)
with respect to the formerly defined bundle map
In an analogous manner we are provided with a 'Y E ker D v satisfying the relation 11,8~1 . ~n - 'Y-PnIIL2 --> 0
(2.74)
Up to now we have merely analysed the pre-gluing #0 as an approximate version of the gluing operation. However, the thus defined curves W x = u#~v are not yet trajectories for the negative gradient flow. Resorting to the normal bundle L.L constructed above we now try to find the correction term for #0 with respect to the actual trajectory gluing. Moreover, this correction term has to be provided globally on the entire base space K x [PI, 00). This requires K to be compact. In other words, our aim is to find a 'correction section' 'Y in the bundle H on K x [PI, 00) in a unique way, so that
'Y : K x [PI, 00) --> H
,8l-Pn . ~n,-Pn ~ (); In particular we obtain the convergence 11,81 . ~n
81
The Trajectory Gluing
IIUi-)l-pn~n'-Pnt~ + 11,81-PnDu~n,-pnIIL~
::;;
2.5. GLUING
. (~\ hm}J (};Pn' ~n 1£2 n Xn
(+ + l'1m n ,8 'Y-p
n
,~n
\IL2 Xn
lim ((};#Xn 'Y, ~n)£2Xn n 0, as
~n E
L;n
The proof of the assertion follows.
for all n E N
o
"" D 1£l- : L .L --=-. L2
82
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
2.5. GLUING
83
(un#~m vn)*TM «Pm,n. (u#~m v)*TM
Thus, considering the inverse map14 G: L 2 ~
L-i-, G = (D 1L-I-)-l
\m/
,
we can extract the following estimate from a refinement of the proof of Propo sition 2.50:
iR Lemma 2.51 There is a lower pammeter bound P2 ~ Po and a uniform constant C K ,l > 0, suc.h that the isomorphism G satisfies the estimate
IIGx~lll,2,x ~ C K ,l 11~llo,2,x for all X E K
X
[p2' (0), ~
E
L~ .
Proof. The decisive feature within this proof is the uniformness with respect to the broken trajectories (u, v) E K. An equivalent statement of the assertion via (= G x . ~ E L~ is given by:
1I(1I1,2,x ~ CK,l IID x . (1I o,2,x
for all (E L~, X E K
X
[p2, (0) .
In order to carry out an indirect proof similar to Proposition 2.50 we assume a parameter sequence Pn --+ 00 and associated broken trajectories ((Un, vn))nEN C K together with
relying on the definition 1
II D Xn (n II O,2,Xn
1 •2
-----t
(u,v)
yields the convergence of the induced Banach space isomorphisms
-=. H Xn1,2
1
and L 2Xnn
-=. L 2Xn' respectively ,
with «pn(s)(t) =
and
= 1 and
H
(un,V n )
II
satisfying the conditions lI(n 111,2,Xn
Let us henceforth use the notations Xnn = un#~n Vn and Xn = u#~n v. Then the explicit construction of the pre-gluing map #~n together with the H 1,2. convergence
(n E L~n' Xn = un#~n Vn
(2.75)
0
--+
0 .
II
as n goes to infinity, n
In contrast to Proposition 2.50 the main difficulty lies in the estimate for an inconstant sequence ((Un, vn ,)) nEN instead of a fixed pair (u, v). Therefore we construct an appropriate transformation to the situation of such a fixed pair. Due to the compactness of K, we can assume without loss of generality an H1,2·convergent sequence, that is in particular a CO·convergent sequence
0
D Xnn - D Xn
0
Xnn
-----t
L2 ) -----t l
Xn
1
0
--+ 00.
Moreover, given any f E (0,1) the convergence
=
1 for all (n E L~nn
into the estimate
(un, Vn )
CO -----t
(U, v) E K . 1- f
Considering the contractability of the curves u, v and
u#~v
neighbourhood U of u(iR) U v(iR), a trivialization
Xn,m(iR) = un#;m vn(iR) c U
we find an open ..::.
U x jRn and
holds for all m, n ~ no .
In order to transfer assumption (2.75) to the fixed broken trajectory (u, v), we consider the following homomorphism family between vector bundles on iR 14The reader is referred to [F6] or [F4] in the case of Floer homology.
~ II (prL~n
0
~ 1+f
for all n ~ no. Piecing everything together we come to conditions similar to those in the proof of Proposition 2.50. Now confined to the fixed pair of trajectories (u, v) and using the notation
~n = (prL~n
0
L~n
we obtain the conditions
111~nliI,xn -
11
~
E,
IIDXn~nll
--+
0, Pn
--+ 00 ,
--.-.------.-.---=.=---=.:-~.="'C• • ' " " S # L = ' .7.~'-'=,"_'"_---::______=~~~--:-'·-----
:-'-:.- : ..: - _ .--- -~.:.-
--"' __.:
'--.
--- ~~--f.i:f';;--':_':; ._- .._ .... _-_..- -•.:-.-:" -=-~-=-=--=-~. ::::::.':::=~~~~::~~-~~:~~~:::'~~;;:~~~~~~::~~~~~~~~L,"'O;O=-~:~~~~
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
84
as
I (prR(#xn)
0
((n)11
<1>n)
1,Xn
~0
lim II~n Ilo,xn
=0
for some suitable constant C
~
C lim
.
85
'1': E ~ E, 'P(x)
+ C)
11'P(x) II ~
II~nllo,xn
1I'P(x) - 'P(y)11
lim II~nllo,xn = 0
1 - t ~ lim II~nlll'Xn
as stated above. Thus we have proven the uniform estimate of the assertion. D
F be a smooth map between Banach spaces of the
+ D f(O)
.x
+ N(x)
Let us further assume G: F
~
E to be a right inverse,
f(x) = f(O)
D f(O)
0
G
with dim ker D f(O) < 00
=
idp ,
and let C > 0 be a constant such that the contraction property IIGN(x) - GN(y)11 ~ C( Ilxll
+
Ilyll) Ilx - yll
is satisfied for all x, y E B f (0) with t = 5~' Then the initial condition IIGf(O)11 ~ ~ implies the unique existence of a zero point of the map f Xo E Bf(O) n G(F) , which additionally fulfills the estimate Ilxoll ~ 21IGf(0)11
1
1
t(2 +Ct) = t(2
1
+ 5) < t
=
IIGN(x) - GN(y)11
~
C 2t Ilx yll =
~
1 211x-yll
2
5 Ilx
yll
Hence we find a unique Xo E Bf(O) satisfying the identity 'P(xo) tionally we obtain the estimate
Let us now introduce the zero point lemma which is central within our Banach space calculus. ~
t
2 + Ct 2 =
due to the assumption. Moreover, 'I' contracts on Bf(O) as we immediately see from
contradicting
Lemma 2.52 Let f : E form
= -G(J(O) + N(x)) ,
we easily calculate the inclusion relation, as x E Bf(O) yields the estimate
.
> O. But this would imply the inequality
lim II~nlll,Xn ~ (1
~-~::.-~.=:-:-=~:..;.::=.. -~:;;;y -:;ii~~~~~~~~~~~~'="'~~~~i:i.<~"i=.~~~~~~~ __
Proof. The proof is accomplished as a direct application of the contraction mapping principle. Considering the mapping
On the other hand, the convergence IIDxn ~nllo ,Xn ~ 0 leads to the estimate lim Iltnllo,xn
~:,,'-""'-'_ ----::=-"_ .....'l'_. _ •
2.5. GLUING
Hence we are finally able to conclude as in Proposition 2.50: n->oo
---.• _ ---_ ~
Ilxoll -
= Xo.
Addi
1 11'1'(0)11 ~ 11'P(xo) - '1'(0)11 ~ 2 Ilxoll
Thus we deduce the inequality Ilxo II < 2 IIG f(O) I and complete the proof.
D
It is by means of this fundamental lemma that we shall later prove the existence of the necessary correction section "( : K x [pk, 00) ~ L1-. Let us choose a fixed X E K X [P2, 00) and let us consider the smooth mapping between the Banach spaces F . H 1 ,2 ~ L 2 x· X X ' that is, explicitly, 15
Fx(x) with Fx(O)
=
'Vtx
+ 8(x). Wx + 'V2 exp(x)-1
. ('Vf
0
expw x) x
= F(w x ), DFx(O) = D x ' Considering the expansion Fx(x) = Fx(O)
+ Dx(O) . x + Nx(O, x)
we compute the difference of the nonlinear terms as
Nx(x) - Nx(Y) =
Fx(x) - Fx(Y) - Dx(O) . (x - y)
= (Dx(Y) - Dx(O)) . (x - y) + Nx(y, x - y) 15For the notations used in this formula the reader is referred to the discussion in Appendix A.2.
2.5. GLUIUG
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
86
Thus it is sufficient to estimate
Analysis of the nonlinear dependence in the smooth exponential terms together with the compactness of K, that is
U
(2.76)
IIF(wx)ll p =
wxOR") relatively compact,
Ilxlkx + Ilylkx) Ilx - ylll,x
II~pIIHl,2([-1,O]) + 11(-pIIHl,2([O,1]))
Is(t)1 :::;: c(s)e- mt , t ~ 0 ,
The constant C K ,2 is a function of the C 2 - norm of \7 2 exp on the compact clo sure of the set in (2.76). The required estimate thus follows from this inequality together with Lemma 2.51 and with CK = CK,l . CK,2,
where the constant m depends merely on DX(O). The constant c depending continuously on s may be estimated uniformly due to the compactness of K, so that the inequality
Ilxl11,x + IIYlkx) Ilx - ylkx = IIGxF(wx)111,x :::;: CK,l IIF(wx)llo,x '
IIGxNx(x) - GxNx(Y)111,x :::;: CK ( (2.78) and IIGxFx(O)lkx
const (
According to former discussions of the solutions for the gradient flow equation, we observe an exponential decrease at the critical point 0 of the form
yields an estimate which is uniform with respect to X,
IINx(x) - Nx(y)llo,x :::;: CK,2 (
IIF(wx)llp([-l,l]):::;: const IlwxI H1 .2([_1,1])
:::;:
XEKx[po,ao)
(2.77)
87
1I<,IIL'(r-',o])
for all X E K X [p2, 00) .
~
U
IW + p)I'
dt)! "co",l(o, 0) e-
Fx : H x
estimate
o
----+
Lx
and
G x : Lx
holds for all P ~ Po and (u, v) E K. ,(X) E B,(O)
= u#~v for the
Fx(,(X)) = 0 and
n L~
lIi(x)lkx < 2CK,1
IIF(wx)llo,x '
and thus
that is, without loss of generality,
u(t) = expy ~(t), v(t) = expy ((t),
t
~
:1.
-p-1
t:::;: p+ 1
,
lIi(x)lkx < c(K) e- mp
= ~ + X: H 1,2(1R, IRn ) ----+ L(lR, lRn ) X : IRn ----+ IRn , DX(O) = Hessian of F at y
it
F
';,:.~' . ~~;
'r~
(-p .
',;h
:I.·.:'tr.··.·.. ..
.
Therefore it remains only to verify the smoothness of this correction section ,. Lemma 2.54 The unique section, : K F 0 , = 0 is smooth.
Therefore we may continue this analysis in local coordinates at y, so that we consider the situation on IR n :
+ (3+.
H x , R(G x ) = L~
complying with
F(wx)(t) = 0 for It I > 1 ,
= (r· ~p
----+
satisfy the assumptions for the fundamental Lemma 2.52 and guarantee the unique existence of a correction term
mp IIF(wx)ll o,x : :;: ae
Wx
elc. ,
Summing up, we can state that there is a lower parameter bound PK, such that, given any X E K X [PK, 00), the mappings
Lemma 2.53 There are uniform constants m> 0 and a> 0, such that the
Wx
"
yields the completion of the proof.
Finally, it remains to show that the deviation of the approximately glued tra jectories from the actual gradient flow trajectories tends to zero as the gluing parameter P goes to infinity. This follows immediately from the next lemma.
Proof. Due to the construction of the pre-gluing operation broken trajectories we immediately obtain the identity
m
Proof. we are that is diately
X
[PK,OO)
----+
L1-
n B,(O)
solving
Since we have already solved the existence and uniqueness problem, now able to regard the same zero point problem in local coordinates, with respect to a local trivialization of L1- and L 2. Then we imme obtain the assertion from the implicit function theorem together with
the smoothness of F. In particular, we are provided with a uniform estimate for the derivatives
IID'Y(x)11
~
lI'Y(x) I
const(K)·
Kc
for all X E K X [PK, 00) .
we define the induced gluing operation on this set by
o Piecing together all these results we obtain the trajectory gluing as asserted above in the shape of a smooth mapping
#:
K
X
[PK,oo)
X
(2.79)
->
Mx,z
t----+
expl.l#OV 'Y(X) p
Mx,y x My,z compact,
u#pv = [u#pv] = (U#pV)T(U,V,p) , where T( U, v, p) is determined uniquely via the condition
f( (U#pV)(T(U, v, p))) = a
This means that, after the gluing of the parametrized trajectories (uo, vo) E Mx,y x My,z, we have to execute a gauge-shifting or reparametrization by d ...), in order to get an unparametrized trajectory u#pv E Mx,z regarding
The next step is to derive the embedding property for fixed parameter P ~ PK from the embedding property of the pre-gluing map #~ and the exponential convergence IID'Y(x)II, lI'Y(x) II ~ conste- mp •
the above identification.
We shall prove this property in the following section for the gluing operation induced for the unparametrized trajectories
Now, we are able to prove the embedding result in version of
Proposition 2.56 There is a lower parameter bound Pj(, such that the un parametrized gluing map
(u, v) E Mx,y x My,z
#: K x (Pj(,oo)
The Embedding Result and the Convergence
(u,v,p) In order to arrive at the statement of Theorem 3 we are finally going to prove the embedding property and compatibility with complementary weak convergence toward the original broken trajectory as regards the spaces of unparametrized trajectories. At first, we define th~luing operation which is induced on the unparametrized trajectory spaces Mx,y.
Mx,y x lR (u, t)
Proof. The differentiability property follows immediately from the respective result for the gluing map #. Hence we have to show (a) the regularity, that is the property that
D#(u,v,p)
-..::.. Mx,y t----+
"
Uo
M~,y, "
==
u
with respect to a ft:xed regular value a from (J (y), f (x) ). By reverse argumen tation we can also consider the projection map
[. ] : Mx,y
->
(u,v,p) ,
(a): Due to the compactness of K it is sufficient to find a lower parameter bound p(u, v) for each broken trajectory (u, v) E K in such a way that the regularity of D#(u, v, p) holds for all P > p(u, v). Since the regularity of the differential of a continuously differentiable map defined upon a finite-dimensional manifold is a so-called open condition,16 this lower bound can be found as an upper __ )E K~ p(u, v) exists. semicontinuous 17 function on K, so that p(K) = max( U,v
~
Mx,y
is an isomorphism for each triple
and (b) the injectivity of the gluing map.
Ut ,
for which we implicitly use the identification (2.80)
Mx,z t----+u#pv ->
is a smooth embedding.
Definition 2.55 Let us consider the diffeomorphism already analysed above,
.
16In other words, each regular point (u,v,p) E K x [0,00) with regard to the differential has a neighbourhood in K x [0, 00) consisting of regular points. 17p upper-semicontinuous means: X n ---+ X => limp(x n ) ~ p(x).
D#
Mx,y , ;~'
11
. '1. . .1
"
:'
2.5. GLUING
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
90
for all n E N. Due to the construction of the gluing operation in the last section we compute
Hence, we shall prove the existence of such a bound for any arbitrarily chosen fixed pair ('11, v). Due to the identity dim(Kx(PR'oo))
=
=
91
J.L(x)-J.L(y)-1+J.L(Y)-J.L(z)-1+1 J.L(x) - J.L(z) - 1
D#Pn(u,V)' (~,()
V I exp (Xn, 1'(Xn)) . (~#Pn ()
~
+ V2exp( ...) . (D1'(Xn) . (~, ())
dimMx,z so that the sequence (1ID#Pn Il op )nEN C IR turns out to be bounded. Since the sequence ft(U#PnV)T(Pn) is also bounded uniformly as we see from the equation
it is sufficient to verify the injectivity of D#(u,v,p) for all P> p(u,v). This will be accomplished indirectly. Let us henceforth use the shorter notation '11 = U referring to the above identification = Ma. From the analysis of the unparametrized trajectory spaces we obtain the decomposition of the tangent space
M
a
~
(2.81)
Tu.#pvMx,z
at
A#~
U
=
Ilft(U#pn V)T(pn)t2
Tu.#pvMx,z E91R at (u#p v )
AE M~X,z (2.80) Ma = x,z
pV
C
M
x,z
a
f(y). Then we compute the
ProjT M .. ,
X,%
(D#p(u,v).(~,()+D#p(u,v).(u,-v).t)
Thus, assuming that D#(u, v, p) is not injective, we find non-vanishing tangent vectors (~, ( , t) :j:. 0 satisfying
D#p(u, v) . (~, ()
+ D#(u, v) . (u, -v) . t E IR· :t (u#p v )
V I exp (Xn, 1'(Xn)) . Xn
+ 11(11 2 + t 2 =
(2.84)
VI exp (Xn,1'(Xn)) . (~n#Pn(n
+ u#Pn(-v) + tn:t(u#~n v)) + V2 exp(...) . (D1'(Xn) . (~n + U, (n - v) + t nVn(Xn)) = 0
Exploiting the well-known identityI8 (V 2 exp-I oV I exp)(p, 0) = idTpM and the exponential decrease
1 .
We now accomplish the proof by contradiction. Let us assume the existence of sequences Pn
--+
00, ((~n,(n))nEN bounded and (tn)nEN
C
1R
satisfying the identity (2.83)
D#Pn'
(~n,(.n) + D#Pn' (u,-v) =
+ V2exp (Xn, 1'(Xn)) . V n(Xn)
yields the identity (2.83) as
Without loss of generality we can carry out the normalization
11~112
a
at(u#Pn v ) = at (exPxn 1'(Xn)) =
D#( '11, v, p)(~, (, t) =
Jf(x) - f(z) ,
and
#-
(2.82)
=
D#Pn . (~n,(n) + D#pJu, -v) VI exp (Xn, 1'(Xn)) . (~n#Pn (n + u#Pn (-v)) + [V2exp (Xn, 1'(Xn)) 0 D1'(Xn)] . ( ... )
w
:t (u#p v ) = :t (U#pV)T(U.,V,p), f(u#pv(r)) = a . =
lI%t(u#Pn v )ll£2
we deduce the same for the sequence (tn)nEN. A detailed calculation involving the formulas
This follows from the construction of the induced unparametrized gluing oper ation with
Without loss of generality we can assume a differential of by means of (2.81) as
=
~
Ih(Xn)/I, IID1'(Xn)11
which was analysed above in the proof of Lemma 2.54, we are led to the decisive convergence
(2.85)
tn' :t(U#pn V)
~0 ,
Ilxn#PnYn
18See Appendix A.2.
+ u#Pn (-v) + tnft(u#~n v)III,2
--+
0 .
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
92
According to the definition of the linear gluing version and of the pre-gluing operation, this implies convergence toward zero
Ilxn + u(1 + t n ) II H,,2« -OO,Pn -1]) n--+oo. lim llYn + V (t n - 1)IIH,,2([I-Pn,OO)) n--+oo
2.5. GLUING
93
together with the exponential decrease 'Y ( Xi,n )
lim
0
_
-
X
n + (1
+ tn) . U
H
'
,2
0 and Yn
-----+
II(Ul#~nVl)rl,n -(U2#~nV2)r2,,,lll,2 ~O .
(2.87) H
1) . v
+ (tn -
,2
' -----+
0
Taking into account that, due to the assumption and the decomposition (2.81),
the relations X
n E TuMx,y, Tu,Mx,y
Yn E TvMy,z, Tv,My,z
-
-
n!R.u = {O}, n!R.v = {O}
0 and
tn
-+
According to the construction of the pre-gluing map #0, the fixing of the time-parametrization f(ul(O)) = f(u2(0)) gives rise to the asymptotic synchronization
'Tl,n - 'T2,n
-1
'11 1
-+
0
and
tn
-+
+1
(Ul,n, Vl,n) = (U2,n, V2,n) ,
holds for all n
respectively. Hence, we deduce a contradiction.
(b): We now have to verify the injectivity of
if- : R x [Pk, 00) -+ Mx,z'
Let us
now assume the existence of sequences
Pn
-+ 00
and
(Ul,n,Vl,n) -:j:. (U2,n,V2,n) E
~
no in contradiction to the assumption.
At the end of this analysis of the gluing operation for unparametrized trajectories of time-independent gradient flow, we now discuss the relation with weak convergence toward broken trajectories as was defined in the last chapter.
Proposition 2.57 Given a broken trajectory (u,v) from Mx,y x My,z, each arbitrary increasing sequence of parameters Pn -+ 00 together with the gluing op eration for unparametrized trajectories induces the geometrical convergence 19
if-
for all n EN,
A
[Ui,n#Pn Vi,n] = (ui,n#p"Di,n)r',n ' i = 1,2 with f ((.. ')ri,,, (0)) = a. Resorting again to the compactness of consider without loss of generality the convergent sequences -+
Ui, Vi,n
-+
Vi; i = 1,2 .
Then the representation u·'Z.ln # Pn v·1.,n A
A
--
Cl:c
A
A
R
we can
The converse is also true: Any sequence of unparametrized trajectories converg ing to~a simply broken trajectory finally lies within the range of such a gluing map #. Proof. The C~c-convergence toward '11 and V arises from a respectively ap propriate choice of the value a with regard to the identification Mx,z = M~,z' Firstly, let us choose a value satisfying f(z)
-- exPXi,n 1
A
U#p"v -----+ (u,v) .
where we refer to Definition 2.55, that is,
Ui,n
0
R,
which satisfy the identity
[Ul,n#Pn Vl,n] = [U2,n#Pn V2,n]
= '11 2 = '11 and VI = V2 = V
However, knowing from part (a) that if- is a local diffeomorphism, in particular at ('11, v) E R, we find an initial index no EN, such that the identity
and
Yn
0
-+
and thus to the identities
hold and that TuMx,y and TvMy,z are finite-dimensional, and thus locally compact, we observe that the zero-convergence in (2.86) leads to X n -+
0
-----+
yields the following Hl,2-convergence with respect to local coordinates:
,
that is (2.86)
n--+oo
. , Xt,n . -- u·'Z-,n #0Pn v·'Z.,n X'l.,n
( )
A
A
< a < f(y) ,
19i.e.: weak convergence with respect to a suitable sequence r n of reparametrization
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
94
that is
2.5. GLUING
95
Conclusions a
((U#PnV)(O))nEN C M . Due to the compactness of M a we can find without loss of generality a limit point Xo E M a , ,~ ' ( ) n--->oo u#Pn v 0 -----> Xo Considering the unique trajectory s E COO(JR, M) satisfying
s = -Vf ° sand
s(O)
= Xo
,
we are led to the weak convergence
'# Pn V'"'
U
C{~c
----->
s
At the end of this section, regarding the application within our homology theory in question, we wish to discuss some consequences of the compactness-gluing complementarity which has been proven now. Actually, we shall consider the unparametrized trajectory spaces of second order and the simply broken tra jectories. This means that we restrict ourselves to the relative Morse index f..L(x) - f..L(z) = 2. Then we are able to classify the conn~ed components M~,z of the one-dimensional manifold without boundary Mx,z by the diffeomor phism type of 8 1 and (-1,1), respectively. We obtain the following Corollary 2.58 Let ¢ : M~ z ~ (-1,1) be a diffeomorphism. Then there are exactly two different broken trajectories
where the reparametrization sequence Tn for
u#.Pn v = (u#Pn vk = exp(fJ.#oPn i1)T n [r(Xn)]Tn
(Ul,Vl)
f= (U2,V2), (Ui,Vi)
E MX,Yi x Myi,z; i = 1,2
is determined by
f((U#PnV)(Tn))
=
satisfying
a .
f..L(x) - 1 = f..L(Yl) = f..L(Y2) = f..L(z)
The exponential decrease of ,(Xn) analysed above implies the estimate
b(Xn)(Tn)1
~
const· e- aPn
-t
+1
,
and, given any small E > 0, we jind gluing parameters PI (E), P2 (f) E JR, such that we obtain the identities
0
and thus the convergence (U#~n V)(Tn
) -t
(¢O#.)({Ul} x {VI} x (PI, 00)) = (-1,-1 +f)
Xo .
Hence, due to the construction of the pre-gluing operation, the condition f(xo) < f(y) gives rise to the limit point lim V(Tn - Pn) = Xo ,
n--->oo
that is,
s=
V.
An entirely analogous argument now starting from the assumption f(y) < a < f(x) yields weak convergence to the other part of the broken trajectory, coo U'# Pnv'~' U • The converse statement is an immediate result from the uniqueness provided by the Banach fixed point principle by means of which we developed the gluing maps. If we are given any sequence of trajectories with fixed endpoints which converge weakly toward a specified simply broken trajectory, the elements fi nally lie within a H 1,2- neighbourhood in which the above contraction mapping principle (see Lemma 2.52) works. Hence, these elements have to lie within the range of the gluing map belonging to this specified simply broken trajectory. ~
o Thus, we have accomplished the proof of the central gluing Theorem 3.
and (¢ ° #.) ({ U2} x {V2} X (P2, 00)) = (1 - E, 1) .
Proof. The boundary property is a consequence of the gluing theorem. The fact that the broken trajectories cannot be identical arises from the uniqueness of the correction term ,(Ui#~Vi) with respect to the uniquely supplied bundle £1. with regard to large gluing parameters. This is the same argument which was used for the last statement of Proposition 2.57. 0 From this corollary we gain an equivalence relation for simply broken trajectories with relative Morse index 2. This equivalence relation will prove crucial for the construction of Morse homology. In fact, it is the kernel of what we called in the introduction the cobordism relation for trajectory spaces. Definition ~.59 Let us dejine-ihe set!!i simply broken trajectories with fixed endpoints Mx,z = {(u,v) E Mx,y x My,z I f..L(x) - 1 = JL(Y) = f..L(z) + I}. The1J:J....the gluing cobordism from Corollary 2.58 induces an equivalence relation on Mx,z by
(Ul,Vl)""" (U2,V2) ~ (Ul#P1Vl) ~ (U2#P2V2) in Mx,z
¥¥£¥4¥
!
!!I!!!"'-
: _
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
96
decompos~
RX
Uh
CI~c # Pn V_ ---+
(Uh,
v)
.
E
h M x",x/3
X
f/3 M X/3,Y/3
t :::; P - 1 (3=p[exp;;(uh)] (Uh#pV)(t) eXPX/3 ( (3+ [ -l()J + -p eXPX/3 v -2p ) (t), It - pi :::; 1 { V-2p(t), t ~ P+1
(2.88)
_
In this framework, the lower bound Po for the gluing parameters is now addi tionally bounded below via the time interval during which the Morse homotopy
tiS
r is active, that is Po
~ f{3 .
')
Uh, V
00, we are
Uh(t),
o
'\
r
(
---7
by
Therefore, we must distinguish three different types of gluing operations:
We shall obtain the result for the mixed broken trajectories analogously to the first gluing theorem. Let h t be any regular Morse homotopy
V, p)
Proof· Essentially, the construction of this gluing operation for mixed broken trajectories differs from that in Theorem 3 merely by the definition of the pre gluing map. Instead of shifting both parts of the trajectories by the value P in opposite directions regarding the time-parametrization, we now define the pre-gluing map #0 for the mixed broken trajectory
~.~
e gluing of broken trajectories which do not contain any shifting-invariant pieces at all.
h
such that, given any arbitrary sequence of gluing parameters Pn provided with the weak convergence
with regard to the actual homotopy trajectories. However, we notice that we merely admitted Morse homotopies for the time-dependent gradient fields which were asymptotically time-independent, that is,
e gluing of broken trajectories, which consist of shifting-invariant pieces as well as of trajectory pieces corresponding to the time-dependent gradient field, called mixed broken trajectories, and
."IllIIII
~Mx",Y/3 1--+ Uh#pV ,
[Pj(,oo)
(Uh,
ueT=U T
e gluing of shifting-invariant trajectories, as analysed above,
n~'
~/3
#:
The above defined equivalence relation for simply broken trajectories of the time-independent gradient flow yields the crucial argument in the proof of the chain complex property f)2 = O. We now require the corresponding gluing results for the time-dependent and the >.-parametrized situation, in order to prove the homotopy invariance of the Morse homology in an analogous way. The essential difference between the earlier gluing operation and the gluing operation which is to be constructed later, is a lack of invariance under time shifting
for It I ~ R .
II"IIIIIII!II
97
2.5.2 Gluing of Trajectories of the Time-Dependent Gradient Flow
f)t (V'h t ) = 0
'M1!I!IIIll!11'"
Theorem 4 Given a compact set of mixed simply broken trajectories K C X M~/3'Y/3' there is a lower parameter bound Pj( and a smooth embed ding
M~",x/3
the set Mx,z into pairs of different equivalent broken
f)
_!iiI! k_UlR:rrr
UIillJIlIlIIMIIllli!II"IR
2.5. GLUING
This means that these respective broken trajectories correspond to the ends of the same pathwise connected component of .Mx,z, so that they are cobordant in the sense of 'compactness' and 'gluing '. It is obvious from the possible diffeo morphism types of one-dimensional manifolds without boundary that it holds that #[('11, v)J = 2 for all ('11, v) E Mx,z . We can thus trajectories.
il"IllI!£IlIl!'NM!IImIW
~
~ f{3
R(h t ).
The construction of a smooth gluing operation for these trajecto ries is accomplished by steps entirely analogous to that of the former gluing operation. What proves decisive for transferring the essential stages of the con struction, is the invariance under time-shifting of the H 1 ,2_ and L 2 -products along the trajectories. It is worth mentioning, that this time we can consider equivalently the gluing operation as an embedding
#p : K ~ M~"'Y/3 of compact sets K C M~",x/3 X M X/3,Y/3 for fixed gluing parameters P ~ PK as well as the embedding stated above,
#:
Rx
[Pj(, 00)
~ M~"'Y/3 .
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
98
99
In order to obtain the correction term for an h-trajectory by means of a con traction map, we choose a suitable homotopy between fa and f{3, namely
Once again, it is immediate from the representation
Uh #Pn 1; = eXPUh#oPn ii 'Y(Xn) together with 1'Y(Xn)(t) I ~ conste- aPn ~ 0, that the original trajectory (Uh, 1;) may be reproduced from the weakly convergent sequence
( ') Uh # pn v,c;:c ------+ Uh, V .
o The respective result for mixed broken trajectories of the form h
~
2.5. GLUING
(il, Vh) E Mx""y" x M Y",Yf3 is obtained likewise.
(290) .
ha"Y(t) R
= {
a h {3(t + R,·), h{3"Y(t - R,'),
t ~0 t ~0
Provided that the gluing parameters are large enough, R ~ R o, this homotopy is well-defined. We are now able to construct the required gluing operation # R using the same methods of Banach calculus as above. Essentially, the difference between this gluing operation and the glu ing in the first theorem of this chapter consists of the fact that the invariance under time-shifting for the trajectories of a given time-independent gradient field has now been replaced by the appropriate choice of the time-dependent gradient field in the case of explicit time-dependence on both trajectories. 0 Concerning this type of gluing operation we wish to discuss a special case as given in the following
Broken Pure h- Trajectories
Corollary 2.61 Given the situation of isolated h-trajectories, that is For the case of the gluing of broken pure homotopy trajectories, that is a hf3 similar operation which glues trajectories (u a{3, U{3"Y) E M~"f3x and a, ~ X M x/3''Yx maps them into the trajectory space M~"'Yx , we should present a separate co, 'Y approach. The crucial feature in this situation is that the gluing parameter p, for which the above gluing construction gives rise to an embedding into a trajectory space, if p is large enough, now also determines the target space Mxh"'Y itself. The result is stated as co, x'Y
j.L(x a ) = j.L(x{3) = j.L(x"Y) ,
"y
Proposition 2.60 Given a compact set of broken h-trajectories
K C M h"f3 X M hf3 'Y
XQ,X"
there is a lower parameter bound exists,
XI3,Xry
,
Ho, such that for any R
~
Ho a homotopy
r h"'Y(R) ': : f"Y ~
#n .
Xo:,X/3
XI3,X-y
Xo.,X')'
is a one-to-one correspondence of finite sets.
Proof. According to the above result it is sufficient to verify surjectivity. Let ua"Y be an h-trajectory from M~:~~~). Then, consideration of the solutions h"f3 hf3 'Y ua{3 E M x",xf3 and u{3"Y E M xf3 ,x'Y of the respective time-dependent gradient flow, which are determined uniquely by u a{3(O) = ua"Y( -R) and u{3"Y(O) = ua"Y(R) , leads us immediately to the broken trajectory forming the pre-image with re spect to #R' 0
together with a smooth mapping
# R·. K
there is an R > 0 such that the associated gluing map . M h"f3 x M hf3 'Y ~ Mh"'Y(R)
Mh"'Y(R)
XO!lX-y'
which represents an embedding.
2.5.3
Proof. For this case of the broken trajectories (u a{3, U{3"Y) we use again the original, 'symmetric' pre-gluing:
Let us now consider the manifold M~",Yf3 C [0,1] X p~~2,Yf3 of A-parametrized trajectories as a zero set with respect to the mapping
Ua{3(t (2.89)
(U a{3#R v {3"Y)(t)
=
+ R),
t
~
-1
jJ-[exp;} Ua{3]R (t), ItI ~ 1 eXPXf3 (+jJ+[exPX f3 V{3"Y]-R) { t ~ 1 v{3"Y (t - R) '
Gluing for A-Parametrized Trajectories
C a {3 : [0'1]X X pl,2 n ,YI3
(,\,u)
~
L 2 (pl,2 *TM) X ,Y/3
1-+
u+-1-VH a{3(A,.)ou
a
F
CHAPTER 2. THE TRAJECTORY SPACES
100
H°{3
Here, HD:!3 describes a A-homotopy h o ~ hI of regular Morse homotopies between fD: and f!3. In this framework, too, we wish to discuss the problem of a gluing operation combining such A-parametrized trajectories (A, u) with shifting-invariant trajectories of the gradient flow with respect to rand f!3, respectively, such that we again obtain A-trajectories (A', v) with A' generally differing from A. ~
~{3
Theorem 5 Let K c- M:o ,Y{3 x M£{3,z{3 be a compact set of mixed simply broken, A-parametrized trajectories (A, u>., v). Then there is a lower parameter bound Pi< and a smooth embedding
2.5. GLUING
101
In strict analogy with Definitions 2.48 and 2.49 we find a construction of a linear version of a pre-gluing map #x, this time for X = (A, u>.) #~, °v E [0,1] X p~~2,Z{3' Thus, we obtain a normal bundle L1- from Proposition 2.63 There is a lower parameter bound PI ~ Po such that the Fredholm operator DCD:!3(A, u>.#opv) ; lR x H~,2#ov --+ L; #ov is onto for >. p >. p all gluing parameters P ~ PI and mixed broken trajectories ((A,U>.),V) E R. Additionally, the composition of the linear version #x with the (lR x L2)_ projection onto ker DCD:!3(X) then induces an isomorphism: A..
'f'x =
#H : R x [Pi<' 00)
'----t
MH
(A,U>.,V,p)
f---4
(A, u>')#p v = (A, wj.)
X Q1 Z/3
HA
A Pn ) ---+ CI~c \ U>., v,
Wj. ( /I,
(
U>., vA)
and A(\ u>., v, Pn)
.lRxL~ roJker DG0{3 (x)
0
# x:
ker DCD:!3(\ u>.) x ker D v ~ ker DCD:!3(A, u>.#~v)
such that, provided any increasing sequence of parameters Pn weak convergence of the form
P
--+
--+
00, we obtain
A
As to the underlying analysis, we do not come upon anything new. We merely expand the Banach manifold, within which we are searching for the zeroes of a Fredholm map by means of the contraction principle, by the compact interval [0, 1] of A-parameters. Therefore, we will not provide a detailed proof at this stage. The strategy for proving this theorem is organized in two stages in a way which is absolutely analogous to the above investigations: At first, we have to define an appropriate pre-gluing map, in this situation similar to the time dependent case in Section 2.5.2, together with a suitable normal bundle L1-, which now lies within lR x H~,2 (p~~~Z{3 *TM). Finally, we must derive a unique smooth correction section within this normal bundle by means of a suitable contraction map.
As to the proof. Essentially, the proof of 2.50 remains the same up to expansion by lR. At this stage we wish to point to the trivialized version, which shall be mentioned again in the next chapter in relation to the discussion of induced coherent orientations. This will be treated in Proposition 3.14. Regarding a detailed proof in the trivial case together with the additional set of real parameters, the reader is also referred to [F-H]. This linear version of gluing in the trivial case is of the type lR X H ,2 X H I ,2 3 (7,~,() I
f---4
(7, f3=p' ~ + f3~p' (-2p) E lR x H I ,2 .
o Finally, considering the normal bundle L1- over R x [PI, 00), which is induced by this proposition in analogy with the former bundle L1-, and given a large enough lower parameter bound P2 ~ PI, we are again able to find a unique smooth correction section of (2.92)
'Y:
Rx
[P2, 00)
--+
L1
'Y(A,U>.,v,p) = (7,~) E lR x H~,2#ov >. p
Definition 2.62 Referring to the corresponding pre-gluing map for mixed bro ken trajectories from Section 2.5.2 for an orientation, we now define the pre gluing operation #H,o : K x [Po, 00) --+ [0,1] x P;:,Z{3
such that
by (2.91)
represents the required gluing operation. Once again we observe exponential convergence (7,~) --+ (0,0) as the gluing parameter tends to infinity, P --+ 00.
(A,U>.)#~'Ov = (A,U>.#~V) ,
where we denote by
#~
the operation from (2.88), that is
(u>.#~V)(t) = {u>.(t),
V_2p(t),
t t
~ P- 1 ~ P+ 1
,etc.
(A, u>.) #~ v = (A + 7, exp,,>.#~v~) E
M: ,z{3 o
Chapter 3
Orientation Summing up the analytical foundational results we have developed up to this stage, we notice that this knowledge about the trajectory spaces of the time independent and time-dependent negative gradient flow enables us already to build a Morse homology theory with coefficients in the field Z2. However, in order to admit arbitrary coefficient groups, Le. coefficients in Z, we still have to accomplish more elaborate results concerning the characteristic intersection numbers for the unparametrized trajectories. Referring to the introduction, we may deduce these intersection numbers from a comparison of the canonical orientation of the intersection manifold
WU(x) rh WS(y)
~
Mx,y
by the negative gradient field with some coherent orientation related to the critical points. Considering the framework of our analytical methods we need a con cept for such a coherent orientation of the trajectory spaces, which are treated as zero sets of the fundamental Fredholm map with respective endpoints. Ac tually, within this analytical context, coherence denotes the compatibility of the respective orientations with the cobordism relations from the compactness gluing-complementarity in the last chapter. In fact, the purpose of this chapter is to extend the former cobordism conc.ept for trajectory spaces to a concept of oriented cobordisms. The fundamental feature of this concept will be the no tion of orientations for Fredholm operators arising from the already well-known determinant bundle (see for instance [DonD. The reason for using this deter minant bundle for Fredholm operators may be explained as a generalization of the orientation of a manifold. Knowing that in our framework the tangent space of a trajectory manifold can be identified with the kernel of the surjective linearization of the fundamental Fredholm map, we wish to drop this regular
--------------~~----
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
104
ity assumption and define a substitute for the maximal exterior product of the tangent space, in which a non-vanishing element represents an orientation. This substitute concerning a non-surjective Fredholm operator consists of an appropriate combination of kernel and cokernel, so that a continuous variation of a thus oriented Fredholm operator preserves the orientation, whether the operator is onto or not. Hence we shall be provided with an orientation con cept for trajectory spaces including the regular trajectory manifolds as special cases.
II
--:---.---_::---~:-_._-----------_._----
.~':ail
Finally, we still have to verify that this method for obtaining a coher ent orientation on the trajectory manifolds based on the Fredholm calculus is equivalent to the classical process of induced orientations from the differential topological viewpoint. This shall be postponed to Chapter B of the appendix.
3.1
Orientation and Gluing in the Trivial Case
3.1.1
The Determinant Bundle
In order to define the orientation bundle for Fredholm operators, we require the following preparations: Definition 3.1 Let E and F be finite-dimensional JR.-vector spaces. Then, by means of the short notations for the one-dimensional vector spaces
Amax E
=
Adim E E
and A0 E = JR. ,
--- - -
3.1. ORIENTATION AND GLUING IN THE TRIVIAL CASE
105
we define the one-dimensional space of determinants with respect to E and F by
·.,;.1' . . .'· .·.
Det(E,F)
=
(AmaxE) 0 (AmaxF)* .
Now let H o and HI be ji:J;ed Banach spaces and let us denote by
F(Ho,Hd
c £(Ho, HI)
the open subset of Fredholm operators. Then we define the space of determi nants associated to such a Fredholm operator F E F(Ho, Hd as
Another point which seems worth mentioning concerns the topology of the underlying manifold M in the sense of the axiomatic homology theory in question. It appears to be founded in an abstract way within the existence and construction problem of such a coherent orientation for the Fredholm operators D u E Euo TM as u describes the trajectories of the negative gradient flow. Throughout the development of this analytical concept of a coherent orientation we keep in close analogy to the Floer homology in the symplectic case. The corresponding results can be found in [F-H]. At first, we shall review the construction of an orientation bundle for Fredholm operators in general. Then we shall verify the compatibility with the gluing calculus for Fredholm operators of the type F E E triv ' In the second half of the chapter we shall transfer the orientation concept from the trivialized framework to the manifold M, so that the topology enters when we ask for the existence of a coherent orientation. In contrast to the symplectic case in [F-H] we shall also consider non-orientable manifolds, whereby we shall need a slightly modified concept.
-_..._==-----------,. ------ - - - - - - -
Det(F) = Det(ker F, coker F) . If we further consider the continuous mapping of an arbitrary topological space X into the space of Fredholm operators ·l
~{
,~I;:
f :X
!~
~
F(Ho, Hd ,
we may define the space
U{x} x Det(J(x))
Det f =
xEX
Thus, the canonical projection map is endowed with the one-dimensional JR. vector spaces Det (J(x)) = 7[-l(X) as fibres.
The aim of this section is to show that the space Det f is a real line bundle on the topological space X. Then, the local trivializations uniquely determine the topology of this vector bundle. If we assumed dim ker f or dim coker f to be locally constant functions on X, I this result could be immediately concluded. By the following fundamental algebraic lemma we will derive the existence of the determinant bundle for general Fredholm operators without this assump tion. Lemma 3.2 Let o~
EI
dl dk_l ~ ... ~
E
k ~
0
be a sequence of finite-imensional JR.-vector spaces. Then there is a canonical isomorphism
Q9
¢: i
even
Q9 (A max E
(A max E i ) ---==-. i
i)
odd
INote that due to the continuity of the integer valued Fredholm index the continuity of one of the two functions implies that of the other.
_--7.-
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
106
Proof. Let ell, ... , eI n1 be a basis of E I . Since d l is injective we may extend the linear independent vectors d l (ell),"" d l (eI n1 ) by e2}, ... , e2 n 2 to a basis of E2. Corresponding to this first step and due to exactness, we can find successively at each stage of the sequence an extension to a basis of the form
~_-
3.1. ORIENTATION AND GLUING IN THE TRIVIAL CASE
107
on U(x). By the fundamental Lemma 3.2, we can verify that these local de terminant bundles associated to the covering
u
U(x) =X
XEX
di(eil), ... ,di (ein;),ei+II, ... ,ei+Ini+ll with
nk
= O. Then we define the isomorphism
for i=1, ... ,k-1,
¢ by
d;(ell) /\ /\ dl(elnJ /\ e21/\"'/\ e2n2 ) ( ®d3 (e31) /\ /\ e4n4 ® ... ® /\ e2j n2j ~
ell/\ ( /\e3I /\
yield a local trivialization of Detf on X. Actually, given (x,1/;,U(x)) and y E U(x), we have an exact sequence 0---. ker fey) ~ ker f,p(y) ~ R n ~ coker fey) ---. 0 ,
where
/\elnl®d2(e2I)/\ /\d2(e2n2)) /\ e3n3 ® ... ® ... /\ e2j'+1 n 2j '+1
dl(k)=(O,k) d2 (h, k) = h
Obviously, this isomorphism is independent of the special choices of the vectors of the bases, because any change in the bases operates by multiplication with the same determinant of the transformation on either side of the homomor phism ¢. 0 This lemma enables us to provide local trivializations of the de terminant bundle 7r : Det f ---+ X. (See the careful exposition in [F-H] for details.) Given x E X, we associate to the Fredholm operator f(x) a linear map 1/;; Rn ---+ HI, such that
(3.1)
l",(x):
Rn x H o (h,k)
---+
~
HI 1/;(h)
+ f(x)
.k
describes a surjective Fredholm operator. Since surjectivity is a regular prop erty, it must be satisfied on an open set in X. Thus there is a neighbourhood U(x) such that the surjectivity of
l",(y)
E
F(IR n x Ho, HI)
holds throughout U(x) together with the identity ind f",(y) = ind l1/J(x) for all y E U(x)
d3 (h) = [1/;(h)]R(JCY»)
This induces a natural isomorphism Det fey) ~ (Amaxker f,p(y)) ® (AmaxRn )* ,
Le. a natural isomorphism
Detf(y) ~ Detf.;;(y)
(3.2)
due to the surjectivity of f", (y). The corresponding calculation of the transition maps therefore provides the result that 7r :
Det(f)
---+
X
is a real line bundle. Definition 3.3 The bundle Det f is called the determinant bundle of f and any non-vanishing section in this line bundle induces an orientation for the family f : X ---+ F(Ho, HI)
of Fredholm operators. exist.
We remark that such a section does not necessarily
Thus, the mapping
f,p(y):
Rn x H o
---+
R n x HI
~(o,f.;;(y)(h,k))
(h,k)
gives rise to a real line bundle Det foP on U(x), because we now deal with the constant functions dimker f,p(y)
and
dim coker f,p(y)
3.1.2
Gluing and Orientation for Fredholm Operators
Throughout this section, we shall use the results of Fredholm theory developed in the last chapter. In order to define a gluing operation for Fredholm operators of the type 2 :l::;ee Definition 2.14.
--=--------=-------. - - - - - - - - - - - -
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
108
analogous to the construction in the last chapter, we must restrict ourselves to asymptotically constant operators, that is, to K = + A K E ~triv satisfying
it
AK(t) = const
ItI
as
~ T for a T ~
°
Actually, referring to the equivalence relation
KA
'"
La
¢:}
A± = B±
and recalling that according to Lemma 2.15 these equivalence classes are topo logically contractible, we may choose an asymptotically constant representative from each equivalence class 8 K.
--+~
(p, FA)
f-+
FAp E e(K-,L+) AK(t+p), t~O { Adt - p), t ~ 0
Ap(t)
3.1. ORIENTATION AND GLUING IN THE TRIVIAL CASE
for all p ~ Po(K,L). Here, the lower parameter bound is determined by the asymptotical behaviour
+ P)I [-1,00] == Ai == AI: == Ad· -
P)l [-oo,IJ
109
ind 0# = +0 (ind,ind)
The crucial question now is whether there is a similar orientation concept for Fredholm operators as defined above, which is likewise naturally compatible with the gluing operation. At this stage it is important to state that, due to the contractibility of the equivalence classes [K] = 8(K+, K-), the associated determinant bundles
Det[K]
--+
8(K+,K-)
are in fact orientable.
o Det (L) ~Det(K#pL) .
Second, regarding the equivalence classes e K , 8L and 8K#pL, we have to verify that the orientation on 8K#pL induced by this isomorphism is indepen dent of the choice of the actual representatives. Once again, the fundamental Lemma 3.2, by which we may transform in a natural way the Fredholm oper ators K and L into the surjective operators K1/1 and £1/1, turns out to be the decisive utility. Thus let K and L be asymptotically constant operators from
E triv
AK(·
_. ,
we can state the following relation:
Det(K)
Fp = FA(+p) ,
we are able to define the gluing operation for asymptotically constant operators K, L E ~ with matching ends K+ = L - by K#pL
--------:;-_. __.. _ ._ _._'---..---------..- - - - - - - -
First, we require an isomorphism between the spaces of determinants associated to the respective Fredholm operators
Definition 3.4 Considering the isometric lR-action
lRxE
--_.,-------,--------------------
C
.c(H 1,2(lR, lR n ), L 2 (lR, lR n ))
with matching ends K+ = L -. We find a linear mapping
'l/J : lRk
for all p ~ Po .
L 2 (lR,lR n )
--+
,
such that the Fredholm operators
Remark According to the index theorem from Section 2.2, the Fredholm index operates additively under this gluing operation, i.e. ind (K#pL) = ind K
of equivalence classes [K] =
e K,
E/ '"
K E
~
and the map
ind : E --+ Z ,
lR k
X
Hl,2
(h,u) (h,u)
+ indL
holds for all asymptotically constant operators K, L E ~ with matching ends K+ = L-. Moreover, the equivalence class eK#L does not depend on the actual gluing parameter p and the respective choice of the representatives K E e K, LEe L. In a nutshell, if we consider the set
f; =
K1/1, L1/1:
--+
L2
f-+L·u+'l/J·h f-+K·u+'l/J·h
are both onto. By analogy with the derivation of the determinant bundle, Lemma 3.2 supplies us with natural isomorphisms
Det(K1/1) ~ Det(K)
and
Det(L1/1) ~ Det(L)
concerning the operators
K1/1' L1/1:
lRk x H 1 ,2 (a,u) (a,u)
--+ f-+ f-+
lR k X L 2 (0, L . u + 'l/J . a) (0, K . u + 'l/J. a)
-:-·6:±_X
=r
._-
_._ .._~~,_
;s"O=±S53±
e=~
§~t¥t'tttt.~t~¢ifii(t"':"'":~·,~·,~ =<
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
110
We note that without loss of generality we may assume an R ~ supp(7P(a)) C [-R, R]
° satisfying
for all a E JRk ,
because the bounded linear mapping {3R:
L2
--t
L2
U
f---t
{3R'
u
associated to a smooth cut-off function (3R with compact support in [- R, R] gives rise to a continuous deformation satisfying ~
L(jR.1/J
.t(H1.2,L 2) ~
------>
L1/J
as R
__
"",~ "-~"'~"'::~=:'~.~~'''~:-'~-
''''L''~_ ~ ~~"'~~
~ ."",.,,,,-,-,,c"""""~
3.1. OPJENTATION AND GLUING IN THE TRIVIAL CASE
III
Proof. We observe that this proposition corresponds to Proposition 2.50 about the linear version of the pre-gluing of trajectories up to the finite-dimensional surjectivity extensions (IRk, 7P). Regarding these extensions with compact sup port supp 7P( a) C [- R, R], we may accomplish the proof by strict analogy. The reader is also referred to [F-H] . 0 Moreover, this 'surjectivation' by means of (IRk, 7P) comes to the core of the discussion of the trajectory gluing for the .A-parametrized gradient flow with respect to the orientation problem. There, too, the Fredholm operators D u become surjective generally at the earliest after extension by the partial derivative for the variational parameter .A. 3 Now considering the induced mapping
--t 00
,
K1/J#pL1/J : IRk and the surjective Fredholm operators form an open subset of the space of operators £(H I ,2, L 2 ). Given these surjectively extended Fredholm operators K1/J and we now define a gluing operation which is adapted to the situation:
L1/J,
X
JRk
X
H 1 ,2
--t
IRk
X
IRk
X
L2
(K1/J#pL1/J)(a,b,u) = (0,0, (K1/J#pL1/J)(a,b,u)) , which is equivalent to
K1/J#pL1/J
== (K#pL)1/J pffi1/J_p ,
Definition 3.5 Let Po = po(K, L) be the lower parameter bound associated to according to the above derivation of the determinant bundle, we are provided the asymptotically constant operators K and L, In order to take into consider with the natural ismomorphism ation the extension by 7P, we lift this lower bound to Pl = R + 1 + Po, and we (3.3) Det(K1/J#pL1/J) ---=--. Det(K#pL)
consequently define the mapping K1/J#pL1/J : JRk x JRk X H l ,2 --t L 2 by Lemma 3.2. Noting that the gluing Proposition 3.6 induces an isomorphism
(AmaXker K1/J) 0 (AmaXker L1/J) ---=--. Amaxker (K1/J#pL1/J)
for P ~ PI by (K1/J#pL1/J) (a, b, u)(t)
=
((K #pL) . u) (t)
+ 7P(a)(t + p) + 7P(b)(t -
p)
The central proposition with respect to this gluing of surjective Fredholm op erators may be stated now as
Proposition 3.6 Let Pp be the orthogonal projection in the Hilbert space JRk x JRk X L 2 onto the finite-dimensional subspace ker (K1/J#pL1/J). Then there is a lower parameter bound P2 ~ Pl such that the following holds for all gluing parameters P ~ P2 :
and resorting to the natural isomorphism (AmaxIRkr 0 (AmaxIR k)* ---=--. (Amax(IR k x IR k ))* we obtain an isomorphism for the associated determinant spaces of
(3.4)
Det(K1/J) 0 Det(L1/J) ---=--. Det(K1/J#pL1/J) ,
provided that the gluing parameter P is large enough. Finally, the natural isomorphisms yielded by the algebraic Lemma 3.2, which describe the trans formation of the determinant spaces with respect to the surjective extension, The Fredholm operator K1/J#pL1/J is surjective and the linear map i.e. Det(K1/J) ---=--. Det K, etc., ping
~: ~~x~~ ~ ker (K1/J#pL1/J) ((a,u),(b,v)) is an isomorphism.
f---t
Pp(a, b, up + v_ p)
lead us to the isomorphism for the original determinant spaces
(3.5)
Det K 0 Det L ---=--. Det( K # pL )
3See also Theorem 2 in Section 2.3.2.
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
112
The next step is to verify that this isomorphism may be transferred to the determinant bundles of the associated equivalence classes e K, 8 L and 8K#L. In other words, we have to verify the coherence with respect to dif ferent representatives. Since the equivalence classes as topological spaces are T contractible within ~triv, we may choose connecting arcs K and LT with 1 O l T E [0,1] for each pair ofrepresentatives (K , K ) and (LO, L ), respectively. We are able to repeat the above analysis starting from these arcs instead of fixed operators together with the additional argument that the set of param eters [0,1] is compact and the arcs are continuous. Therefore, we once again find surjective extensions and corresponding isomorphisms uniformly with re spect to T or dependent on T. These isomorphisms give rise to a vector bundle isomorphism on [0,1], Le.
Det K T 0 Det F
"" --=--
(KT #p F )
\~/
(3.6)
[0,1]
for P ~ pO(K[O,l], L[O,ll). Hence we deduce that our orientation concept for the equivalence classes 8 K and 8 L is compatible with the gluing which yields 8K#L.
Before we finish this section by stating the result in a theorem, we wish to mention an important property. As we already noticed in the section on trajectory gluing, due to our construction, this gluing operation itself does not satisfy an associativity rule. However the mere orientation problem can actually be solved. Let K, L, M E ~triv be asymptotically constant operators with matching ends K+ = L - and L + = M-. Then, provided suitable gluing parameters PI,"" P4, the operators (K #Pl L)#P2 M as well as K #P4 (L#pg M ) are well-defined representatives of the same equivalence class 8(K-, M+). Thus we can construct a smooth line bundle E on [0,1] with the boundary fibers
Eo
= Det«K#PIL)#P2M)
and a vector bundle isomorphism
and
E1
= Det(K#p4(L#pg M ))
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
113
[0,1] x (Det K 0 Det L 0 Det M)
~E ~
\~/ [0,1] such that <1>0 and <1>1 represent exactly the compositions of the gluing isomor phisms from Proposition 3.6 in the respective order. We sketch the proof. In principle, it resorts to the same analytical construction elements which we have used in our discussion about gluing up to this stage. At first, we define a gluing operation for three operators simultaneously with two free, independent gluing parameters. Then we have to prove the associated isomorphism property with respect to the surjectively extended Fredholm oper ators. Secondly, we have to show that, given gluing parameters that are chosen appropriately, we are able to homotope this isomorphism for three operators to the respective composition. The crucial step consists of finding a uniform estimate together with a homotopy to 0 for the difference term between the re spective isomorphisms as the gluing parameters become large enough. Finally we are able to sum up this section in the following theorem:
Theorem 6 Let K and L be asymptotically constant operators from ~triv with matching ends K+ = L - and let OK and 0L be orientations of the canonical determinant bundles on eK and 8 L , respectively. Then for all P ~ PoCK, L), the gluing operation #p: (K,L) f---'> K#pL induces an orientation OK#OL on 8K#pL = eK#L independently of p. This induced orientation does not depend on the actual choice of representatives K E e K and L E 8 L . Moreover, the associativity rule of is fulfilled, (OK#OL)#OM
3.2
=
OK#(OL#OM) .
Coherent Orientation
The outcome of the above analysis in the case of the trivial i-vector bundle i x IRn is an orientation concept which is supplied uniformly for all asymptot ically constant operators with coinciding ends. This means an orientation for
-_._---_.
114
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
the equivalence classes eKE E, and it is compatible with the gluing operation. We now intend to transfer this result to the situation of the IR-bundles u*TM induced by the gradient trajectories u. Thus we principally have to consider the dependence on the curve u. Actually, this a priori issue touches on the topol ogy of the underlying manifold. The crucial observation will be that mainly the knowledge about asymptotical behaviour suffices and that we are able to orient all Fredholm operators uniformly as one having identical end terms and associated to curves with coinciding fixed endpoints. The only delicate point is the question if two given smooth curves u and v with identical endpoints u(±oo) = v(±oo) give rise to pull-back bundles u*TM and v*TM admitting trivializations coinciding appropriately at Tu(±oo)M = Tv(±oo)M. If this is guaranteed, we may transfer the results from the last section in a unique and canonical way. It is at this stage that we come upon the problem that not all two curves with coinciding endpoints satisfy this trivialization condition on the pull-back bundles in an a priori way. The obstruction of a common trivializa tion in the above sense is hidden in the topology of the connection to a loop u . v-I (provided a suitable reparametrization). Actually, the vanishing of the characteristic class WI (( U . v-I) *T M) is the necessary and sufficient condition for the trivializability of the bundle (u. v-I )*TM. In other words, we find si multaneous canonical orientations except for curves with coinciding endpoints, which close up to n-dimensional 'Mobius bands'. This topological obstruction is in fact an expression for the orientability of the underlying manifold M.
Nevertheless, a more detailed analysis will show that already the coincidence of the trivializations at one end proves sufficient, if we only can specify in a uniform way which end is the right one. Then, the possible dif ference at the other end, which may be expressed as a fixed reflection, turns out to be irrelevant. The only essential feature is the uniform and necessarily noncanonical specification for all curves, at which end we wish to have the iden tical trivialization. Although it might look unexpected or even cryptic to the reader, it is worth mentioning at this stage that this specification is in one-to one correspondence with the dimension axiom of the later homology theory and with the obstruction to the well-known Poincare duality in the case of closed but non-orientable manifolds. We shall come back to this issue in the section 'topology and coherent orientation' within the next chapter which is central to this monograph. Finally, having accomplished the transfer of the above notion of an orientation to the non-trivial framework of curves, we shall develop the con cept of a coherent orientation by means of the compatibility with the gluing operation for trajectories from the last chapter. This coherent orientation is the main feature which allows us to set up a homology theory with coefficients in Z.
__ ._
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
3.2.1
115
Orientation and Gluing on the Manifold M
We shall accomplish the orientation process for the Fredholm operators from EU*TM not only for the trajectories of a special gradient field but in general for all smooth compact curves u E COO (IR, M). Therefore, we consider this space of curves to be equipped with the Whitney C OO -topology.4 Since we merely deal with pull-back bundles u*TM on IR, Lemma 2.19 guarantees that the induced covariant derivation from T M is Fredholm admissible. Hence, we drop V' from the notation. Definition 3.7 We call two Fredholm operators K E
E u ' TM ,
L E
EV*TM
along supporting curves u, v E COO (IR, M) equivalent if the asymptotical iden tities u(±oo) = v(±oo) and K± = L± hold. Any pair of trivializations cPu:
u*TM ~ IR x lRn
'l/Jv:
v*TM ~ R x lR n
is called admissible for such equivalent operators (u, K) '" (v, L), if the identity cPu(-oo)= 'l/Jv(-oo) holds at the identical lower ends of the curves, the relation
±1 1
cPu(+oo)· 'l/Jv(+OO)-1 =
1)
E
GL(n,lR)
( at the identical upper ends and if the equivalence defined above for the trivial framework cPu(K)
= cPuK cP:;;1
"'triv
'l/JvL'I/J;;1
= 'l/Jv(L)
is given. Let us denote the equivalence class of (u, K) by [( u, K)] or merely by [K-, K+], as it is already determined uniquely by the endpoint operators K± E End(TM).
Remark Given two curves u and v, which are connected to a trivializable loop with respect to a suitable reparametrization, Le. WI ((u. v-I)*TM) = 0, we always find an admissible pair (cPu, 'l/Jv) associated to (u, K) '" (v, L), so that
R
4Relating to the differentiable structure on introduced in the first chapter, we note that weak and strong Whitney topology on COO(R, M) fall together.
,.,1
.:-'-"
4'>:',· "" .::::~-
n..
'""'-
--
0..
"_.r.
"'"'_,,"'-"'" '
-::-;z~,;,;
- --
"Ow
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
116
,~~;;;";;~'~:'i!~~, .;<".,,,,.
~" ..?~:~~j~~;fr~it'f~~~~:~ii~~iE',;;rt2Zil~~'$;~:~;.::'=i;;~::~:::~~;*:=
~'"i~~'tt~Jc~~=~~:;;;:~Jk~;I~r;,~$~-;'~-==':;::;-,ii";'~"::i;~;~-S-~1;~":~~,;;;;:~~~~~
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
117
the identity 4>u(±oo) = 'If\(±oo) holds. Otherwise, if u . V-I yields an n Considering the determinant bundle Det e K on e K together with the orien dimensional 'Mobius band', we choose asymptotical trivializations C(±oo): tation induced by OK, we are provided with an orientation 'l/J (OK) for Tu(±oo)M ~ ffi.n, such that
'l/J(K) = 'l/J. K· 'l/J-l
C(±oo)K±C(±OO)-1 = C(±oo)L±C(±OO)-1
+1)
(
Hl,2(~) ~ Hl,2(~) and resp. L2(~) ~ L2(~)
which arise from 'l/J and which are again denoted by'l/J.
+1
S=
Then this new orientation of the determinant bundle is compatible with the original one, that is 'l/J(OK)
thus yielding C8 (+00) satisfying
8K
via the Hilbert space isomorphisms
has a diagonal shape. Then, we compose C(+oo) with the reflection -1
E
~
OK .
= S· C( +(0). Hence, there are trivializations 4>u, 'l/Jv 4>... (-00) = 'l/Jv(-oo) = C(-oo)
and
4>... (+00) = C(+oo), 'l/Jv(+oo) = C 8 (+00) or vice versa 4>... (+00) = C 8 (+00), 'l/Jv(+oo) = C(+oo), and which form an admissible pair by construction. So, to sum up, there is always an admissible pair of trivializations associated to (u, K) '" (v, L). The next lemma shows how to orient such equivalent operators si multaneously in a unique way by means of these trivializations.
Lemma 3.8 Let (u, K) '" (v, L) be equivalent Fredholm operators and let (4), 'l/J) and (4)', 'l/J') be respectively admissible pairs of trivializations. Moreover, let DetK and DetL be oriented by OK and OL· Then the pair (4), 'l/J) induces compatible orientations 4>(OK) ~ 'l/J(od on the determinant bundle of the trivialized class 8>K>-1 = 8,pL'.p-l if and only if the same is true for the pair (4)', 'l/J') on e>'K>,-l = 8,p'L,p,-1, that is 4>'(OK) ~ 'l/J'(od . Let us state separately the decisive step of the proof of this lemma as Auxiliary Proposition 3.9 Let ~ be a smooth ~-vector bundle and OK a fixed orientation for K E E~. We denote the set of sections 'l/J E Coo (End (0), which are pointwise invertible, by GL~. Further, let us choose any section 'l/J in GL~ satisfying the additional asymptotical condition 'l/J(±oo)
= id~(±oo)
.
Proof. Resorting to the structure group of ~, we reduce the given operator K E E~ and the transformation 'l/J successively to a form which can be analysed easily and explicitly. At first, we observe that we may start without loss of generality from the trivial bundle ~ = iR x ffi.n. Namely, if we choose' any trivialization 4> : ~ --t ffi. x ffi.n , 'l/J and K transform as 'l/Jtriv
= 4>. 'l/J. 4>-1
E
GL triv
and
'l/Jtriv(Ktriv )
= 'l/J(K)triv
Provided that the assertion is true for the trivial bundle, that is ('l/J (OK))triv
= 'l/Jtriv(OK,riJ ~ OK'dv
,
we can transfer this orientation equivalence to the original bundle by means of 4>, because it holds that
OK
~
0L
if and only if 4>(OK)
~
4>(od .
The next step of the proof consists of showing that it is sufficient to verify the equivalence 'l/J(od ~ 0L
for any Fredholm operator L i.e. there is a continuous arc
Lr
:
[0,1]
--t
E
F(H 1 ,2, L 2 ) which is homotopical with K,
F(H 1 ,2, L 2) satisfying
L o = K, L 1 = L .
Such an arc would then yield the equivalence
'l/J(OK) ~ 'l/J(OL) ~ OL ~ OK due to the vector bundle isomorphism
-=-c~
---_.
~ ~_='-.~=::'C="=-'-._~=-'~~~~~~~~~~~~ . . .~ ~.. -~ -=---:::~~~~~~~~~~2~~-~='~--=-~ ~~~~ 3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION 118
Det(L r ) ~Det(7jJ(Lr))
a + II
K = at
[0,1]
E GL triv
with
7jJ(+00) = ¢(-oo)
7jJ(K)
with
= 7jJ. K· 7jJ-1 =
= 7jJ(K)#¢(K)
At
= A K, Ak = AM and At = II .
Let us assume for the moment that we have already proven the assertion for the special case (3.8) N E I: triv with A~ = II .
a
-
o(L)#o(K)#o(M)
~ o(L#K#M) (3~) o((ll#7jJ#ll)(L#K#M)) '"
o
o
K+tl.,p.
Regarding the difference term we calculate the estimate
tl.,p
representing a compact perturbation of K,
Iltl.,pIl.c(Hl,2,L2) :::; Ilepllo,2 < 00 .
(3.9) T
> 0, we define
t 7jJr(t) = 7jJ( -) ,
so that the estimate (3.9) amounts to
Iltl,pr II
(3.10) Therefore, provided that arc
TO
o(L)#o(7jJ(K))#o(M).
~
1
- . const T
> 0 has been chosen large enough, the continuous
K;o:
(0,1] T
Then, due to the gluing operation, the general assertion is concluded from
(3.7)
-1
T
Since our orientation concept for I:triv is compatible with gluing, we now choose asymptotically constant operators L, M E I: triv satisfying
ll,
+ (7jJ(7jJ:-1) + ll)
at+ll+ep.
K(+oo)=K(-oo) ,
(7jJ#¢)(K#K)
AL =
:t
o
we obtain the identity
(3.7)
o
o
o
Given any
and
K,K
sin
cos\p(t)
and 7jJ(t) =
appropriately. Since we know from the assumption that 7jJ is endowed with the end operators 7jJ(±00) = II E GL+(n, JR.)
7jJ,7jJ
cos \P(t)
- sin \P(t)
= COO(i,GL(n,JR.))
and that 80(n, JR.) is a deformation retract of GL+(n, JR.), we are able to find a continuous path 7jJr from 7jJ to a 7jJo E Coo (JR, 80(n, JR.)). Moreover, by means of a continuous asymptotical reparametrization, we may find a continuous arc ending in an asymptotically constant 7jJ. Regarding such a 7jJ E GL triv , we can construct a similar gluing operation, so that, given
119
where r.p E Coo (i, 8 1 ) is asymptotically constant. We obtain the representation
We shall now simplify the section
7jJ
-~~¥~O
Considering all these reduction steps, we may start without loss of generality from the special situation
\ffi/ induced by 7jJ. Hence, we may assume without loss of generality that the op erator K E I: triv is asymptotically constant and that it is admissible with respect to the gluing operation introduced in the last section.
_ _ _ ~~
---'>F(H 1,2,L 2 ) ~
K
+ Ttl.,pro
runs merely through isomorphism operators H 1 ,2 ~ L 2 , because we already know that K
=
:t
+ II : H 1 ,2 ~ L 2
--- ==
::f~''''''''~-"-'''''_~:''''3'''-
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
120
describes an isomorphism. Finally, we see that on one side the transformation 7/Jr o maps the orientation [101*] of K onto the orientation [101 *] of 7/Jro K 7/J;:;/ . On the other side, we can deduce from the homotopy K~o that both orientations correspond to each other by continuation. Hence, we obtain the relation (3.11 )
o This result enables us to prove Lemma 3.8.
Proof of Lemma 3.8. Let us start from the orientation equivalence O(c/JKc/J-l) = c/J(OK) ~ 7/J(od = O(7/JL7/J-l)
Then we have to verify the equivalence of the orientations
(3.13)c/J'(oK)
= c/J'c/J-l(o(c/JKc/J-l))
and 7/J'(o£)
= 7/J'7/J-l(o(7/JL7/J-l))
Moreover, on the one hand, we assume the asymptotical identities c/J( -00) = 7/J(-00) and c/J'(-oo) = 7/J'(-oo), so that (7/J7/J,-lc/J'c/J-l)(-oo) =
n E GL(n,lR)
Since on the other hand c/J' c/J-l and 7/J7/J,-l describe curves within GL(n, 1R), the inequality det(7/J7/J'-lc/J'c/J-l)(+oo) > 0 follows. Thus, we are led to the identity (7/J7/J,-lc/J'c/J-l)(+oo) = n E GL(n,lR) . Altogether, we are able to apply the auxiliary proposition and hence derive the equivalence (3.14) c/J(OK) ~ (7/J7/J'-lc/J'c/J-l)(c/J(OK)) . To sum up, the assumption (3.12) implies the assertion (3.13).
0
By means of this last lemma, we now are able to transfer the ori entation concept from the trivial bundle as treated in the first section to the Fredholm operators {(u,K) IKE ~u·TM} in relation with the above equivalence relation:
~
- ",ii,·
.....""~>:it"....,."""~ .
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
121
Definition 3.10 Any orientation of an L E [(u, K)J induces a unique orien tation of the equivalence class [(u, K)], that is to say that given K '" L the equivalence OK ~ 0L holds exactly if c/J(OK) ~ 7/J(OL)
holds for any admissible pair of trivializations (c/J, 7/J).
OK ~ 0'I/Jro (K) = 7/Jro (OK) .
Regarding the continuous homotopy with respect to the variation of r E [1, roJ, we are led similarly te the correspondence of the orientations 7/Jr o(OK) and 7/J(OK) in the determinant bundle Det 7/Jr(K) on [1, roJ. From this we conclude the assertion 7/J(OK) ~ OK .
(3.12)
2::;"''':;;'';';'-''~''''"''''''''''''''''''''-
Remar k If we defined the equivalence classes to be of smaller a priori extent by the condition that trivializations with coincidence at both ends should exist, we obviously would be provided with more classes to be oriented coherently in the case of a non-orientable manifold. As we shall see from later features within the construction of a Morse homology, however, we do not have that much freedom regarding the choice of orientations for operators on curves which may be linked together yielding a 'Mobius band'. Actually, the dimension axiom will give rise to a condition on coupling between the orientations of two such classes. The crucial point worth mentioning is that we have already built in this condition by demanding the coincidence of trivializations at the negative end within Definition 3.7 of equivalence which might have seemed rather unmotivated to the reader. Assuming that we had fixed the coincidence at the positive end of the curve, we would be led to the 'wrong' dimension axiom, as shall be illustrated below in Section 4.1.4 on the example of JP>2(1R). Having accomplished the transfer to the non-trivial framework of varying curves, we now introduce a similar corresponding gluing operation by the trivialization method. We have to verify that this gluing is compatible with the trajectory gluing as regards the orientation induction by gluing. Definition 3.11 First, we once again define the pre-gluing operation from the last chapter for arbitrary curves u, v E coc> (ii, M) satisfying u( +00) = v( -00). Given P ~ po(u, v) we define
u(t + p),
u#~v(t) =
t~ ~-1
j3-(t).exp;;l (u(t+p)) , It I ~ 1 expy (+j3+(t). exp;;l (v(t _ P))) { t~1 . v(t - P) ,
Here, the lower parameter bound Po (u, v) is again derived from the asymptotical condition u(t + Po), v(t - Po)
E
U(y) . for t> -1 and t < 1 respectively
in relation with the normal neighbourhood U(y) of the exponential map. Let us now consider trivializations c/J:
u*TM
~iixlRn
7/J:
v*TM
~ iR x IR n
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
122
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION Thus, defining
by starting first from a smooth trivialization
f: TMIU(y)
---=-. U(y)
123
K¢#~L",
x JRn
= K¢as#pL",as
for
p ~ Po
=1
,
we obtain an orientation of K ¢#~L", induced by #~ in a way which is inde on the neighbourhood U(y). This induces immediately i:-smooth trivializa pendent of the construction of K¢as and L",as based respectively on K¢ and tions on the pull-back bundles ul (-l,oo(TM and vI [-oo,l)*TM, which may be L"" due to the homotopy invariance described in the last section. Moreover, extended to trivializations ¢ and 'l/J, such that the identities since there is a T ~ 0 such that f1u«-1,00j) == ¢U-l,oo], f1v([-00,1)) == 'l/JI [-00,1) K¢#~L",(t) = { (K¢)p(t), t ~ -T are satisfied. Thus we are able to define a gluing operation for trivializations (L",)_p(t), t ~ T in a compatible way: holds for all p ~ Po, the class 8K.p#~L", is also independent of the noncanon ¢#~'l/J : (u#~v )*TM ---=-. iR x JRn ical construction of K ¢ as and L", as' Finally, we may transform this glUing construction back to the non-trivial situation by means of the analogously in ¢(t + p), t ~ -1 troduced trivialization ¢#~'l/J, ¢#~'l/J(t) = f u#~v(t), It I ~ 1 { 'l/J(t-p), t~l K#~L = (¢#~'l/J)-I(K¢#~L",)(¢#~'l/J) E E(u#~v)*TM . By means of these trivializations we shall transfer the gluing operation for E triv to the pull-back R-bundles on the curves, but first, we have to introduce the condition of asymptotical constance.
Definition 3.12 Given K E K¢
= ¢K¢-l
and L E
Eu*TM
and
L",
Ev*TM,
= 'l/JL'l/J-l
We notice again that, due to homotopy invariance, the class [u#~v, K #~L] and the associated orientation induced by #~ from o([u, K]) and o([v, L]) are independent of all the above noncanonical construction elements. Summing up, we consider the noncanonical gluing operation
we obtain
#0 :
E E triv
=
[u#~v,K-, L+] = [u,K±]#[v,L±]
which induces a unique and canonical mapping of orientations
(K¢)p = (Kp)¢p ,
(¢)p
-+
(u,K)#~(v,L) = (u#~v,K#~L) ,
With regard to the time-shifting we notice the identity
because the JR-aetion commutes with the partial derivative
[u,K-, K+] x [v,L-, L+]
(o[u, K], o[v, L])
ft,
f-7
o[u, K]#o[v, L]
with regard to the determinant bundles
(¢p) .
Det ([u, K]) -+ [u, K], etc. The next step is to define the halfway asymptotically constant operator associ
Due to the construction, the homotopy invariance and particularly the associa ated to K¢
tivity may be deduced from the former trivial framework: K¢as = :t + /r· AK.p +,8+. Ak.p (3.15) (o[u, K] # o[v, L] ) # o[m, M] = o[u, K] # ( o[v, L] # o[m, M]) . and L", as analogously, having in mind the identity AL,p == AI.p' Obviously, the following relations are true: We shall round off this section by verifying that this orientation
K¢ ~ K¢as
and
L", ~ L",as
in
8K.p and 8L""
respectively.
Hence, the gluing operation already known on the trivial bundle for the operator K¢as #pL",as induces the isomorphism Det K ¢ 8IJ is> Det L", as
---=-. Det (K ¢ as #L", as)
"
concept in relation to the gluing of arbitrary smooth curves u E COO(iR, M) and Fredholm operators K E Eu*TM includes our former trajectories as a special case. Along these trajectories we consider the surjective linearizations in local coordinates D u = DFu(O) : H 1 ,2(U*TM)
-+
L 2(u*TM), u E Mx,y C C'::v
124
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
that is, the differentials of
Fu = '\7 2 exp~l O(:t
for all
+ '\7 f)
0
expu : H 1 ,2(u*D)
---+
E
7
L 2(u*TM) .
[0,1]. As a consequence, the isomorphism 2
·L D#p = Dh 1 = ProJker Dhl
In other words, the gluing #0 defined above is compatible with trajectory gluing as far as the orientation induction is concerned.
induces the same orientation on
Lemma 3.13 Regarding the gluing operation for time-independent trajectories
as
M;,y x My,z
3
(u, v) ........ u#pv
E
.L2 P rOJker Dho
Mx,z
---=-. ker Du#pv
on ~
Additionally, the identity of the classes
X
ker Du,triv x ker Dv,triv
K
holds.
lK(u, v, p)
(~,
C~A~, M) ,
........ expu#~v
(U,V,7)
c P;,';,
(7 'IK(U, v, p))
yielding the homotopy h T = H(·, 7) from #~ to #p. Provided that the gluing parameter p has been chosen large enough, the differential ---+
p
,
PrOjt:rDu#~V.triJB-~p + (3+(-p)
= Du,triv
and L
= Dv,triv
()
~ ker Kas#pL as L2
........ Projker (~p
+ (-p)
which similarly goes merely through isomorphisms. This is in fact possible, because the compact interval of time around 0, on which the curves A K88 #pL • a and AD #0 triv from COO(~, End(~n)) differ, decreases as the gluing parameter increases. The central element of this homotopy through isomorphisms is given by a continuation of the form U
DhT ( u, v) : ker D u x ker D v
---=-. ker Du#ov triv ........
ker K as x ker Las
Let us now consider ---+
D#op
throughout the remainder of the proof. It remains to show that we can ho motope this trivialized version
Proof. Let us assume any fixed pair of trajectories together with compact neighbourhoods N(u) c Mx,y and N(v) c My,z' Given the compact set K = N(u) x N(v) we choose a fixed gluing parameter p ~ p(K). Then the glued trajectory is represented as
K x [0,1]
0
~n. We denote the operators from E triv by
[u#pv, Du#pv] = [u#~v, Du#~Dv]
H:
2 Dh 0 = P rOJker ·L D#~
(~, ()
o[u, Du]#o[v, D v ]
= expu#~v
0
According to the construction of the pre-gluing map in the last chapter we can find admissible trivializations of the pull-back bundles u*TM and v*TM, such that we are led to the linear mapping
induces the same orientation o[u#pv, Du#pv] as we obtain from
u#pv
Dh 1
0
[u#pv, Du#pv] = [u#~v, Du#~v]
endowed with fixed orientations o[u, D u ] and o[v, DvJ, we observe that the isomorphism D#p : ker D u x ker D v
125
p'Ul
7 ........ [(1-7)(3-+7] ~p + [(1-7)(3++7]
H 1 ,2 (h T (u, v )*TM)
proves injective for all 7 E [0, 1]. This follows from the deductions in the last chapter in the same way as we obtain the surjectivity of DhT(u,v) and the isomorphism relation
(_p'
Actually, the proof that the corresponding linear gluing version is an isomor phism may be accomplished according to the scheme of Proposition 2.50 for each parameter 7. Hence we conclude the proof of the lemma. 0 I!I
(3.16)
·L 2
ProJker DhT
0
DhT
:
~
ker D u x ker D v - > ker D hT
5Note that the surjective operators form an open subset such that suitable asymptotically constant operators can be found.
126
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
Remark Similarly, we may state a corresponding result for the gluing operation for mixed broken trajectories, now based on a linear gluing version of the type (~,(,p)~f3=p·~+f3~p·(-2p and
-+
= l' + _I_VHQ;(3 0 'Y
. _ .• _ .. _ __,. . _>'. •• .... .
_
~
·
'
"
<
'
"
·
"
'
,
·
.
~
~
""00
,w_.~.~,
,
,
~
~
,
,
~
~
~
_
,
~
~
_
~
·
'
~
M
"
,
"
~
,
~
.
"
~
'
_
n
'
"
~
_._,."._~·,,_._,._.
,
._._._•.__ ,..• __ ., .__ . .• __•.•. __ ,...• __ ... ..·".-..
"'"'"_.,_._.",_.....,_,,..__', ...
'
.• ,, ,~_
_
•.
__
.
~
,
~
,
'
"
·
~._"_~".,
__
~
._,
__
~.""'_""
~
..
__
'
~
~
·
_
~
,
·
_
·
.
.
,
~
,
,,~~~,_'"_
_
-.,,__._ •.•.• ,•.._.•
••
_
~
,
~
;
"
"
~
•.
.
.'. ~
"
~
.
~
•
,,,~_,,,.,,_,,~,,_.~,,
~
w
·
~
~
~
,
,
~
·
,
~
_
'
,
,
.
_
~
"
"
~
·
,
~
'
.
w
~
'
,
~
_
.
~
_
~
~
<
~
<
.
_,," __",_•.__."... _,..
127
d3 (T) = [D 1GQ;(3.
T]R(D
2
Ga 13 )
AmaXker D 2GQ;(3(A, u>.) ® T>.[O, 1] S!'
Amaxker DGQ;(3(A, u>.) ® Amaxcoker D 2GQ;(3(A, u>.)
--=-. Amaxker DGQ;(3 on the components of the parameter-trajectory spaces M:!.. Thus, the choice of
the fixed orientation !!>. == 1 on T* [0, 1] ~ IR gives rise to natural isomorphisms of the above line bundles on these manifolds of A-parametrized trajectories (3.19)
As we know from the transversality results, DGQ;(3(A, u>.) proves surjective for a generic metric. The Fredholm operator D u>. = D 2GQ;(3(A, u>.) E ~u'TM with the index J.L(xQ;) - J.L(y(3), however, does not need to be surjective at all. This can merely be provided as an a priori statement for the boundary parameters A = 0,1. Hence we conclude that DGQ;(3 (A, u>.) is a Fredholm operator with index J.L(xQ;) - J.L(Y(3) + 1 for all (A, u>.) E M~'Y/3' We now wish to compare the gluing embedding
f/3 f" H ~ H #p : M xc"Y/3 x M Y/3,z/3' MXa,Ya x M ya ,z/3 :) K,---; M Xa ,z/3 ,resp.,
H
for A-parametrized trajectories with the more general gluing of Fredholm clas ses with regard to the orientation induction. At this point, we once again have to resort to the fundamental sequence Lemma 3.2. Dealing with the orientation problem is crucially simplified by the determinant bundle and the gluing with respect to classes of Fredholm operators [K] always being led back to the respective surjectively extended operator K,p : IRk x H 1 ,2 -+ L2 as far as the concrete construction is concerned. But this exactly concerns the relation between the operators DGQ;(3 : IR x H 1 ,2 -+ L 2 and D2G(~(3 : H 1 ,2 -+ L2. Let us consider the following short exact sequence: ker D 2 GQ;(3 ~ ker DGD: 11 ~ T>.[O, 1] ~ coker D 2 GQ;(3
.•. __••'._'_'
., .• , "
Det D 2GQ;(3 ® T* [0, 1]
DGQ;(3(A, u>.) : T>.[O,l] x H 1 ,2(u*TM) -+ L 2(u*TM)
(T,~) ~ D 1GQ;(3(A, u>.)· T + D 2GQ;(3 (A, u>.)· ~ .
-+
__
for all (A, u>.) EM:!.. This amounts to a canonical bundle isomorphism
associated to the A-homotopy HQ;(3 : [0,1] x M -+ lR. Given the local coor dinates (expu, V 2 expu) at (A, u>.) E M?!an Y/3 = GQ;(3-\O), we consider the corresponding linearization
(3.17) 0
• •__•
"".,~"
dl(~) = (O,~)
-+
F
H
...
d2(T,~)=T
(3.18)
L 2(pl,2 *TM) be the mapping Xal~
GQ;(3 (A, 'Y)
~_
According to the fundamental Lemma 3.2, it induces a canonical isomorphism
Orientation and Gluing for A-Parametrized Trajectories XQ'~
,-_,~.,,.
where
f3;·6 p +f3t·(, respectively.
(~,(,p)~f3;p·~(1+T)P+f3:p·((-1+T)P'TE[-l,l].
pl,2
"" ,,, __
3.2. CCHERENT ORIENTATION
We can reduce this result to Lemma 3.13 by means of a continuous variation of the form
Let GQ;(3: [0 , 1] x
~
_
~
"
._,.,,.,__• __ ,_.,'_.. _.,.__ >.,,~
~
,
0' ~
·
,
,
~
_
.
,,,,u
~,<
.
,
,
=
,
,
~
_
~
_
~
~
~
~
"
~
·
~
"
_
~
~
.
_
'
.
"
."., , ••.._, __
_
."._,_""" __ ,,.'._ •••• _•••
,.~'~."._.'._""_~~_'"_m
~
_
~
~
~
~
•• _,_ .•
.. __
~
,,~~,~,_
~
"
~
,
_
,
~
~
_
'
·
, , ' _ _ • ".
o
G
V
,
.
~
~
_
.
_
~
.,_"' __ ",·••
_
-
... P, '
_~'
'
....
'
.~
'
·
,
~
_
·
,
n
~
_
.•
.
. _..• ,._._----_._-_••__ .0-." .•-.'-_._--',.,- •.__•.,._- ... __ •
__.•_""".__,__
.,,_,,~.~._,
,_ _
'
.__....
_ _,__,_ _
-
~
o
.,_._.•
~~,
. _ ._ _ _ _...
,
••._.__.•.
• _ _•._ " " .__
~
••
~
._._••._.
~
,."••.•_.,
""._._._._".
_
•
~
.•
~
.
__. _ .
~
••• ,_~_._u
~
.__•
,
•
t
•
f
• __,
_ _"
-
._,
-
c"
.
•__••".
-
._._. ._~
-
_.__
.
.•
.
_ _ _ _ _'"
.
_ _ _ _ _ _.
_ _. _ _ _ _ _ _
-+
a
n : Det D 2GQ;(3 --=-. Amaxker DGQ;(3
.
Given any pair (A,U>.) E M?!a,Y/3' n uniformly induces an identification of an orientation of the operator D u >. E ~'L'TM with an orientation of the tangent >. space T(>.,u>.)M?!a ,Y/3'
Proposition 3.14 Let us consider the gluing operation for A-parametrized tra jectories H H M xa ,Y/3 x M Yf/3· /3,z/3:3 (( A, u>. ),v) ~ (A, u>. ) #pH v -_ (A, w>._) E M Xa ,zl3
together with given orientations o[u>., DuJ and o[v, D v ]. Then, the isomor phism H H f/3 D#p : T(>.,u>.)M xa ,Y/3 x TvM Y/3,z/3
S!'
-+
T(>.,u>.)#:v
M
H
X a,Z/3
in connection with the isomorphisms n(A,U>.)
Det·D u>.
n((A, u>.) #;;v)
Det D w >-.
AmaxT.(>',u>.) M HX ,Y/3' a H S!' AmaxT. -+ (>.,u>.) vM Xa ,Z/3 9;
-+
#:
induces the same orientation o[w):., D w >-.] as we obtain from the gluing o[u>., DuJ # o[v, D u ]. Here we use the identity of the classes of glued operators [w):., D w >-.]
=
[u>.#~v,Du>.#~Dv] .
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
128
Proof. By analogy with the proof of Lemma 3.13 we regard homotopies and trivializations at suitably large gluing parameters, so that we can reduce the assertion to the following special case. Let K, L E E triv be halfway asymptotically constant with matching ends K+ = L - . We further assume that L is already surjective and that 1/J : JR ---+ L 2 is a linear mapping, such that
K,p : JR
X
H 1 ,2
---+
L2
(T, ~)
f---t
1/J. T + K . ~
with
H 1 ,2 ---+
L 2 by
AK(t), { Adt-2p),
AK#~dt)
t ~ P
(3.20)
ffixL 2
Proj~
f---t
~(l-T)p
f---t
K",#J!L
+ ((-l-T)p,
{}p: ker K,p x ker L
((a, u), v)
9!!
(a,~+(-2p)
T
Pp(a, up + v_ p)
f---t
and compare it to the linear gluing version (3.22)
Affiaxker L ~ Affiaxker K,p # pL
induced by {} p, we observe that due to the identities ker K,p
L2
K,p : JR x H 1 ,2
---+
JR
(a,u)
f---t
(O,K,p.(a,u))
X
Affiaxker K,p 0 JR'
= Det K,p
---+
Det K
is expressed exactly by the natural isomorphisms defined above,
n- 1 :
Affiaxker K,p ~ Det K ,
the proof is accomplished.
0
Coherent Orientation Up to now we have developed a concept which enables us to join Fredholm operators K E Eu"TM along compact curves u E COO(i:, M) into equivalence classes, which may be oriented as one with consideration of the gluing operation. The last step toward the key feature of our intended homology theory consists of uniformly orienting all those operator classes in a way which is compatible with gluing, i.e. in a coherent way.
A = { [u, K]
used in Proposition 3.6. Considering the isomorphism fO> '
'd01"
'---+
Definition 3.15 Let
¢p: ker K,p x ker L,p ~ ker (K,p#pL,p) Affiaxker K,p
= Affiaxker K,p
E [0,1] ,
ker (K,p#pL)
---+
Det ¢p : Det K,p 0 Det L,p ~ Det (K #pL ),ppffi,p-p
~
we are able to transform the actual linear version of gluing into the shape used in Proposition 3.6 for any lower parameter bound Pi that is large enough. Therefore, without loss of generality, we may start from the version (3.21 )
--=-. Det (K #pL ),ppEbO
induced by {} p by analogy with the deductions in Section 3.1.2. On the other hand, ¢p yields the isomorphism
Affiaxker K,p
is an isomorphism. The proof is accomplished by exactly the same steps as are presented in [F-H] for the more general version of the gluing of asymptotically constant Fredholm operators. By means of the homotopy of the form (~, ( )
Det {} p : Det K,p 0 Det L
morphism Det K 0 Det L ~ Det (K #pL). Since the composition
~ ker (K,p#Ij L)
(a,~,()
Thus on the one hand, the choice of the canonical basis l' E JR' gives rise to the isomorphism
Using the natural isomorphisms Det K ~ Det K,p, Det L ~ Det L,p, etc., we are led to the result that Det {} p as well as Det ¢p induces the same iso
t~p
and choosing p large enough, we deduce that
{}p: ker K,p x ker L
Affiaxker K,p 0 AffiaJ
t,
(3.24)
1/J . a + K #;L . ~
129
and ker K,p#pL = ker (K#pL),ppEbo we may also state it as
(3.23)
is surjective, too. Then, defining K,p#Ij L : JR x
(K,p#: L)(a,~)
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
= ker K,p for
I u E COO(i:, M),
K E EU"TM
}
be the set of the equivalence classes of Fredholm operators along smooth compact curves. Then any map a, which associates an orientation a[u, K] of the corresponding determinant bundle Det([u, KJ) ---+ [u, K] to each class [u, K] E A, is called a coherent orientation, if and only if it is compatible with the gluing operation
a[u, K]#a[v, L] = a[u#v, K #L]
====,....., .- "--
------.-
---";--=---===,-~=."======",,==--====---=:::,==,,"====,,,=.=,,,,-,==,,=,=-===-.....O'-="'='====""="""'~'="'''''_'''=--===-~--='''"-''.==-''='''''''=-''''=--====--=-''''''_''''_-='''='='''''--==--==--==::.=.="',==
':-:~
';"::'-', ;;::...;_. _ _H.
_ ..;..-,;.--'
".
- __,_'_ _
,.~.
..,.. ::'-.._
_-••__
_";.~.::_
. CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
130
for all pairs [u, K] and [v, L], which are admissible for gluing, that is, which are endowed with matching ends u( +00) = v( -00) and K+ = L-. Let us denote the set of all such coherent orientations by CA' Moreover, we are interested in the group
r = {f E {+l,_l}A I f([u,K] #
-
-~~.,,,...
-- __ ••.. __. __ .::~_...,"""~
" ''"'''::'''''''.
,_.",,...1":.-;.J~'
~-. .--;_~~.;:"""::,:;:-:;;:,e:;:;',;::;::,_.,;,,,"''''-"_'"''''''''-
,,~_:.':- '~.,._'.
with
,'''._,''''0'.'
'"
.:''''.'<'~''
"",~"",_",,,,,,,,,-. . _:~;..;.,,,,-
_ _ _ _ _ _-;..
-':;:..
" " ; : : : ' --.:":;=;~-:"~""""'_ ",::r.'
131
v- 1(t)=v(-t), AL-l(t)
=
Adt) ,
we consequently obtain unique orientations on the classes [v, L] E S+ already fixed by the condition
O'[v-l, L -1 ]#O'[V, L] = duo] . Obviously, this proves consistent in relation to the anchoring class
[uo] E
By the following proposition we verify that this definition makes sense. Proposition 3.16 Coherent orientations exist, i.e. CA acts freely and transitively on CA by -'>
-'C""
3.2. COHERENT ORIENTATION
[v,L]) = f([u,K])' f([v,L])}
with respect to pointwise multiplication.
r x CA
_... e_•••
i= 0,
and the group
O'[uo]#O'[uo] = O'[uo]
r
CA
(f,0') 1-4 f 0' (f, 0') ([u, K]) = f([u, K]) . O'[u, K]
By means of these two types of classes from S- and S+ anchored at Xo together with the associativity of gluing as far as the orientations are concerned, we are now able to accomplish the last step toward a coherent orientation. Considering an arbitrary [u, K] E A, we find unique classes
[vu,Ko,K-] E SProof In the first part of the proof, we present an algorithm for constructing such an orientation. It is crucially related to the associativity verified above (see also [F-H]). Let Xo EM be an arbitrary point in M and let A E End(TxoM) be non-degenerate and conjugated self-adjoint, for instance Xo E Crit f and A = H 2f(xo) for a Morse function f. Then, we consider Uo E CC'O(JR, M) to be the constant curve Uo == Xo = const
a at + A E Euo TM
vu(+oo) = u(-oo)
with
and
[wu,K+,Ko] E S+
with
wu(-oo) =u(+oo) .
Then, an orientation O'[u, K] is determined uniquely by the condition
O'[v u , K o, K-]#O'[u, K]#O'[w u , K+, K o] = O'[uo] , which is well-defined due to associativity. Moreover, associativity guarantees that this construction in fact provides a coherent orientation.
together with the operator
Ko = -
s- n s+
,
0
which is an isomorphism as A E COO (End(uoTM)) is constant. 6 Thus, we are able to fix the orientation 1 0 1* for the determinant space Det K o = lR 0lR*. Briefly, the class [uo, K o] E A, called the anchoring class, is oriented by [101*].
tions
0'1
We now analyse the r-action: Given two arbitrary coherent orienta and 0'2, we define
f : A -'> {±1} by
0'1
= f . 0'2
.
Obviously, this is equivalent to
The next step is to consider the subsets
and
S- = { [u, K] E A I u( -00) = Xo } S+ = {[u, K] E A I u(+oo) = xo}
0'2
6uQ = canst also implies the identity 'V t =
for
it·
.
Hence, given two classes [u, K] und [v, L] admitted for gluing, we are led to the identity
of A and to choose an arbitrary orientation du, K] for each class [u, K] i= [uo, K o] = [uo] from S-. Considering the one-to-one correspondence S- ~ S+ induced by the reversal of the time-parametrization, that is,
[v- 1,L- 1 ]ES-
= f . 0'1
0'1 [u, K]#O'l [v, L] = 0'1 [u#v, K #L] (f 0'2)[U#V, K #L] = fl . .. # ...]. 0'2[' .. # f([ # ])· (0'2[u,K]#0'2[V,L])
[v,L]ES+ =
f([
#
...]
J) (n u , K]O'du, K]#f[v, L]O'dv, L])
=='==-=----~~-
---.&...s====
132
This amounts to
z=~ ~-"-,:+;
7;;=(777::'-=
=~ ~-------ri-
-
~=.g.=~~~~~----;-;~;;~;,;..:;,-;"
~;'""'''''''"''-~'''''''''"'':''''''''-'''';[-'-''''':-~"''''''-'''''''=''''"'''''''''''''''-~~~~.~~'-:-'''"''-'-:- ..
CHAPTER 3. ORIENTATION
1 = j[U#V, K #L] . j[U, K] j[V, L] .
Applied in both conclusion directions, this means that such a mapping j : A -+ {±1} represents an element of the group r, exactly if it transfers coherent ori entations again to coherent orientations. Hence we conclude that the asserted group action is in fact well-defined and transitive. Finally, it is straightforward to verify that this action is free. D
Chapter 4
Morse Homology Theory 4.1
The Main Theorems of Morse Homology
We introduce Morse homology theory by two main theorems about the exis tence of a canonical boundary operator associated to a given Morse function j and about the existence of canonical isomorphisms between each pair of such Morse complexes. These theorems appear as the essence from the theory on compactness, gluing and orientation which has been developed throughout the last three chapters. It is the isolated trajectories of the time-independent, time-dependent and the A-parametrized gradient flow which form the crucial features in the core of these main theorems. The following preparatory sec tion describes how we associate respective characteristic signs to these isolated traj ectories.
4.1.1
Canonical Orientations
Concerning the Fredholm classes [u, K] E A analysed in the last chapter, we henceforth denote for all trajectories u of the time-independent, time-dependent or A-parametrized gradient flow by [u] the class [u, Dul, where D u stands for the surjective l Fredholm operator yielded by the linearization of
a at + V' j,
etc.,
in local coordinates at u. Due to the surjectivity of these operators together with the representation
TuMx,y:= ker Du c H l ,2(u"TM) lexcept for the >..-parametrized gradient flow; see below
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
134
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
for tangent spaces of the trajectory manifolds, an orientation of the class [u] gives unique rise to a differential-topological orientation of the connected com ponent of Mx,y containing u. Now, in contrast with the notion of a coherent orientation, we find the following canonical orientations for the classes [u] E A in the cases of isolated trajectories u:
so that D 2 Ga.{3(>.., u>,) = DUA is onto, the natural isomorphism n(>.., u>,) : Det DUA
• In the case of the time-independent gradient flow, i.e. u E M~,y, ker D u turns out to be of dimension 1. We find a canonical orientation by -\1 f
0
u E ker D u
,
because these solutions of an autonomous differential equation are en dowed with a one-dimensional shifting-invariance. This orientation o([uJ) is briefly denoted by rUt].
n : Det D 2 Ga.{3 ~ A maxker DGa.{3 ,
01:,
I--'
is generally not a surjective operator. Restricting the analysis to a relative Morse index p(xa.) - p(Y{3) = -1, this means dimker DUA = 0 and dim coker D UA = 1 and therefore isolated >..-trajectories, we obtain by n the orientation 1 ~ (D 1Ga.{3. ,r on DetD 2 Ga.{3 = DetDuA from the canonical orientation 1 on A maxker DGa.{3 = IR. Here, we apply the canonical identification coker D 2 Ga.{3(>..,u>,) ~ R(D 1Ga.{3(>..,u>,)) We deal equivalently with the canonical orientations [> [>
1 ~ 1* on T(>"u A)M{;""YI3 and
1 ~ (D 1 Ga.{3(>.., u>,)·
on [u>" DuJ
M~o"YI3
T".(U) a[uJ = rUt]
2. for u E M~:~x/3:
T".(u)a[u] = [1 ® 1*]
3. for u E M X ",A'YI3:
4.1.2
T".(u)a[u] = [1 ® (D 1 Ga.{3(>..,u).
--+
[O,IJ ,
,)*J
The Morse Complex
Definition 4.2 Let f E COO(JR, M) be a fixed Morse function and Critk/={xECritf
I p(x)=k}
for O~k~n
the discrete subset of M containing the critical points of f with Morse index k. We define Ck(f) = Critkf ® IE as the free abelian group generated by the critical points with Morse index k, i.e. in particular Ck(f) = 0 for k < 0 or k > n. Given a fixed coherent orientation a
If we consider the I-dimensional components of M!!a" y13 , i.e. p(xa.) = p(Y{3), and regular >..-values, which means regular with respect to the projection map Jr :
1. for u E M{y :
H"'13
which was introduced on components of the parameter-trajectory spaces M!;",YI3' where
D 2 Ga.{3(>..,u>,) = D UA E 2: u>..•T M, U E M{;A y.o
H
T(>"u A)M x"',YI3
Definition 4.1 Given any fixed coherent orientation a as developed in the last chapter, we are able to associate characteristic signs T". (u) to the isolated trajectories by comparing the above canonical orientations for [u, D u ] with a, with respect to the three different types of isolated trajectories, that is
• As to the >..-parametrized gradient flow, we consider the natural bundle isomorphism from the last chapter (4.1)
~ ----4
identifies the canonical orientation 1 ~ 1* on [DuJ with that orientation on M~ ,Y/3 which is mapped onto the canonical orientation , of [0, 1] by the projection map Jr. Deciding whether two orientations [1 ® 1 *]u A1 and [1 ~ 1 *JU A2 of operator classes [DUA ; J at regular >"-values and within the same component of M~ ,Y/3 are equivalent amounts to analysing the pre-image of the projection map on the interval of >..-parameters; see also Figure 4.4 on page 146.
• As to the time-dependent gradient flow, i.e. for isolated trajectories in M~"'l3x , ker v'u vanishes, so that we may orient the trivial line bundle "', 13 Det [u] = JR ~ JR*. canonically by 1 ~ 1*.
01- u =
135
mapping (., .) : Critf x Critf
E
CA on M we now define the
--+
IE
by
(4.2)
(X,Y)C~{
L
T".(11),
for
p(x) - p(y) = 1 ,
~f
iiEM",y
0,
otherwise.
136
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
The pairing (x, y)U amounts to counting the connecting orbits with relative Morse index 1 between x and y equipped with their characteristic signs from the above definition. Here it is worth mentioning that the characteristic number (x, y)U corresponds exactly to the geometrical intersection number of
137
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
k ~ 1, straightforward computation according to the above definition leads to the equation
a2 x
L
=
L
(x, y)U(y, z)U Z
zECrih-2! yECritk_tf
L
WU(x) rf1 WS(y)/1R as described in the introduction, up to a suitable change of the noncanonical orientation of the respective critical points. This noncanonical ingredient is equivalent to the noncanonical choice of a coherent orientation. We shall il lustrate this interrelation between the present approach to Morse homology and the classical approach by Thom, Smale, Milnor and Witten in more details in Appendix B. Since Critk/ is the generating set of the group Ck(f) for k 0, ... ,n, we extend (', .)U to
(4.3)
( " . )U : C.(f) ® C.(f)
~ ;£
a;;x =
~
L
Ck-1(f)
(x, y)U y
(4.4)
Theorem 7 Given any Morse function f and any coherent orientation a, the family of homomorphisms
(Ck(f),
ankEZ
=
a2x =
L
L
a;;_l 0 a;; -
0 for all k = 0, ... ,n
Within this monograph, we call this chain complex the Morse complex , in contrast to classical theory, which denotes by Morse complex the associated cellular complex2 . Proof. Given any x E Ck(f), Le. without loss of generality x E Critk/ and 2associated to
f by
homotopical equivalence with M, see [M1]
L
Tu(U) . Tu(V)
Z
Since we already know that each of these equivalence classes contains exactly two different broken trajectories, we could deduce the assertion in the special case of ;£2 coefficients from the identity
L
1 == Omod2 .
(u.v)E[(u.v)]
The analogous general step concluding the proof,
L
(4.5)
Tu(U) . Tu(V) = 0
(u,v)E[(u,v))
will be proven in the following lemma by means of the interrelations between gluing, coherent and canonical orientation, Le. briefly by oriented cobordism theory for simply broken trajectories. Thus, the theorem is concluded from
(4.5).
0
Lemma 4.3 Let x, y, y',
(C.(f), aU)
represents a chain complex, i. e. it holds that
Z
ZECrih_2! [(u.v)]EM""./~(u.v)E[(u,v)]
yECritk_l!
This definition leads us to the first main theorem within this work on Morse homology:
Tu(U) . Tu(V)
where we denote by M x •z the set of simply broken trajectories between x and z, as was defined in the gluing Section 2.5. Now, resorting to the cobordism equivalence, we may reorder the double sum on the right hand side, obtaining
and we define a homomorphism sequence (ak)k=O .... ,n associated to (Ck)k=O, ...•n by
a;; : Ck(f)
L
zEC rit k_2! (u,v)EM"".
Z
E Crit
f be critical points satisfying
J.L(x) - 1 = J.L(Y) and let
= J.L(Y') = J.L(z) + 1
~!~!
,
~!~!
(U1, Vl) E M x•y x My,z' (U2' V2) E MX.yl x My',z be equivalent broken trajectories, i. e. (U1' VI)
rv
(U2, V2)
within M~.z .
Then, with respect to any arbitrary coherent orientation a on M, the identity
Tu (U1) . Tu (V1) holds.
=
-Tu (U2)' Tu (V2)
138
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
139
t·I··.··· ." I,:
Proof· The cobordism-equivalence signifies per definition that both broken tra jectories are mapped by the respective gluing ope~tion # into the same com ponent of the unparametrized trajectory space Mx,z, which is diffeomorphic to (-1,1). The strategy of proving this lemma is to compare the orientations which are induced by the gluing operation on this component from the re spective canonical orientations. The following relation between the canonical orientations defined above has to be verified:
[Ult] # [Vlt]
(4.6)
=
-[U2t] # [V2t] .
irl~t It,.; i ';
,.i~"-
I ,:>~Zt:-
denote the diffeomorphism which endows the one-9imensional connected com ponent with a fixed orientation vector, e E T1f;(po)M x,z 0, i.e.
D¢· e =
11~11.
a[Ul #Vl]
(Ul,V!l.::::(U2,V2)
a[u2#v2]
l1EClI.
Mx,y xffi. (u, T)
(4.7)
-..::...
Mx,y
u
f-+
T
in relation to both versions of the trajectory gluing, for parametrized as well as for associated unparametrized trajectories. Let (u, v) be a fixed unparametrized broken trajectory from the connected component Mx,zo, Po an appropriate gluing parameter and E > 0 fixed, so that we obtain the following commutative diagram, {U}c-€,)€
x {v}(_€,€)
#po • Mx,z
°
J/R
~1 (po-E,Po+E)
{U}c-€,)€
x {v}c-€,€)
((~, ~), (~, -~)) , where the embedding rp identifies the pair of tangent vectors
(~, -~) exactly with :p E Tpo (Po -
E,
E
T(uo,vo) (Mx,y x My,z)
Po
+ E).
Referring to these fixed orientations, we now have to determine whether the embedding #po acts in a preserving or in a reversing manner. According to the above commutative diagram, it identifies the pair of tangent· vectors (~, -~) with the pre-image of the vector D'lj;· :p with regard to the differential of the projection map It likewise identifies the pair (~, ~) with the vector -aa E T # vM z ° canonically induced by time-shifting. Hence, u x Ta PO , the question of orientation preserving or reversing by the gluing operation #po is reduced to the comparison of the fixed vector with the tangent vector on (-1,1) which is induced by ¢ 0 'lj; together with :p E Tpo (Po, -E, Po + E). Ex actly at this stage we derive different characteristic signs for the two equivalent broken trajectories (Ul' VI) and (U2' V2).
-fffi..
:s
Assuming the convergence lim ¢(Ul#pVl) = 1
P~OCJ
.. Mx,zo
'lj;
(-1, 1)
by
a[u2] # a[v2]
Hence, we have to analyse how the canonical orientations behave with respect to simply broken trajectories in relation to the gluing of trajectories. We consider the diffeomorphism from the time-shifting action
so
As a consequence, time-shifting (4.7) and the orientation [e] on Mx,z ° Mx,zo /ffi. induce a fixed orientation (a~u' e) on Mx,zo. On the other hand, we may also consider the canonical orientations on
Then, according to the definition of T l1 (Ut}, etc., the assertion is concluded from the coherence condition and the cobordism-equivalence:
a[Ul] # a[vI]
asa E T
and respectively
together with the embeddings
lim ¢(U2#pV2)
=
-1
P~OCJ
rp
: P f-+ (U(p-po), V(po-p))
'lj;
: P f-+ u# p v
~
and
.
Note that the appropriate choice of Po depends on
¢: Mx,zo ~ (-1,1)
f.
Now, let
for a given fixed diffeomorphism ¢, we observe that
• :s • -:s
by 'lj;l (-)
= Ul i VI and ¢ and with
by 'lj;2(-)
=
U2#.V2 and ¢ .
:p is identified with
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
140
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
by
x
•
(4.8)
(x., xp
}~p ~ {
~
Ta(U), haiJ
for J1.(Xo.)
=
J1.(X{3) ,
uE M 0'J:a..:r.13
0,
otherwise
for the generators (Xo., X(3) E Crit r x Crit f{3. Once again, the compact ness result for the trajectory space M~:~xiJ consisting of isolated trajectories guarantees the finiteness of this sum. Consequently, we define the group homo morphisms by analogy with the above 8 k , that is
.y'
y.
141
epk(ho.{3) = ep~o. : Ck(r) _ Ck(f{3)
L
ep~o.xo. = (Xo., x{3 }~{3X{3 xiJECritkfiJ Now, the fact that the latter sum is finite is derived from the compactness results for Morse homotopies as was stated in Corollary 2.46. Note that this relies essentially on the coerciveness of the considered Morse functions.
•
z
Figure 4.1: Cobordism-equivalence for 8-trajectories Thus, we deduce the relation asserted in (4.6) between the orientations in duced by gluing of equivalent broken trajectories. This adverse orientation induction is illustrated in Figure 4.1. The arrows on the broken trajectories mark the canonical orientations ([Ut], -[VtJ), which under the gluing opera tion correspond to the respective orientation of the one-dimensional connected component 0 according to the respectively indicated weak convergence of unparametrized trajectories. D
Mx,z
4.1.3
Proposition 4.5 The family of morphisms
ep~o. = (ep~o. : Ck(r) -
Ck(l{3)) k=O, ... ,n
forms a chain homomorphism ep~o.
: C.(lo. _ C.(I{3) ,
i. e. it holds
The Canonical Isomorphism
Given two Morse functions, we now intend to derive a chain homomorphism between the associated chain complexes C.(lo.) and C.(I{3), which gives rise to a canonical isomorphism between the respective homology groups. Actually, we will obtain this chain homomorphism in the same way as we extracted the canonical boundary operator from the negative gradient flow of a fixed Morse function. As to the isomorphism, 'canonical' means the independence from any further assumptions apart from rand f{3.
Definition 4.4 Let rand f{3 be any Morse functions on the manifold M, let ho.{3 be an arbitrarily associated Morse homotopy and let us choose any coherent orientation a. By strict analogy with Definition 4.2, we define
(', . }~{3: (Ck(r))k=O, ... ,n x (Ck(l{3))k=o, ... ,n
The first step toward the second main theorem of Morse homology consists of the verification of the fundamental functorial relation for chain complex morphisms:
-
Z
8f(f{3) 0 ep~o.
=
ep~~l o8nr) for all k = 0, ... , n .
Proof. The proof follows that of Theorem 7. Using the short notations
80.
= 8nr),
8{3 = 8f(l{3)
we compute
(8{3 0 ep{3o. - ep{3o. 0 80.) (Xo.)
L
L
L
L
8{3( Ta(Uo.{3)X{3) - ep{3o.( Ta(Uo.)Yo.) /L(XiJ)=k UaiJEM"'a''''iJ /L(Ya)=k-l uaEM"'a,Ya
L
n(xo., Y(3) Y{3 /L(YiJ)=k-l
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
142
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
143
xi"
where
=
n(x"" Y(3)
L
L
L
L
L
L
Ta (U",{3) . Ta (U{3)
M"a{3 ~ M~ f{3 ( ) k J1, x{3 = u",{3E "''''''''{3 u{3E "'{3'Y{3
Ta(U",)· Ta (V",{3)
~f'" M"",{3 k 1 J1,(Y", ) = - u",EMx""y", v",{3E Y""Y{3
eX{3I
X{3e
We now prove the identity
n(x"" Y(3) = O.
(4.9)
in a way that is comparable with Lemma 4.3. The analysis of the cobordism equivalence for mixed broken trajectories with fixed endpoints
(x"" Y(3)
E
U{3
Critkr' x Crih_d{3 ,
e
this time requires a separate discussion of two different cases related to the order of the trajectories: (a)
( u",{3,
.)
u{3
E
(b) (U"" V",(3) E
Mha.{3 ~f{3
X""X{3 X M X {3,Y{3
Nt!'"
xooY~
xM
and
h ",{3
YcoY/3'
Starting from the broken trajectory (u",{3, u(3), we observe two different possi bilities for cobordism-equivalence with regard to this distinction of cases:
(a) (U"'{3, u(3) ,...., (w",{3,v{3) E Mx""x~ x M x #,Y{3 for a x~ E Critkf{3. Analysing the orientation induction by the gluing operation for mixed broken trajectories, we are led to an identification of the canonical orien tation ( [1 0 1*], [U{3,t]) on the component of (v",{3, u(3) in M x ""x{3 x M X {3,Y{3 with that orienta tion on the one-dimensional component M x ""Y{3°, which corresponds to a decreasing parameter p regarding the gluing of broken trajectories. Ac tually, we observe this orientation correspondence at both ends, because we deal both times with broken trajectories of type (a) according to the above specification (see Figure 4.2). Hence, this case leads to the identity
(4.10) (b)
Ta (V",{3)' Ta(U{3)
= -Ta (W",{3) . Ta (V{3) .
(U",{3, u(3) ,...., (u"" v",(3) E Ntx""y", x M y ""Y{3 for a Y'" E Critk-lf"'· In the case of an equivalence with a mixed broken trajectory of type (b), this trajectory is endowed with the canonical orientation ([U""t], [1 0 1*]) ,
Y{3 Figure 4.2: Cobordism-equivalence for mixed broken trajectories of type (a)-(a) which now corresponds to an increasing gluing parameter (see Figure 4.3). Thus, the gluing operation induces at the cobordant broken trajectories of different type the same orientation on the associated one-dimensional component M x ", ,Y{3 o. Hence, we verify the relation (4.11 )
Ta (U",{3) . Ta UL(3)
= Ta(U",) . Ta (V",{3)
in this case. As a consequence, we obtain products of characteristic signs with different signs in the case of mixed broken trajectories of the same type as in (4.10) and with equal signs in the case of different types as in (4.11). Since the cobordism equivalence from the compactness-gluing-complementarity yields a one-to-one correspondence between mixed broken trajectories regardless of type, the above case distinction accomplishes the proof of the asserted identity
n(x", , Y(3)
=
0
and thus of the proposition, too.
0
The next step now consists of verifying that the induced homomor phisms on the level of the homology groups, tP~'" : H* (j"') .-. H* (j{3)
are in fact independent of the choice of the actual Morse homotopy j'"
h:;: f{3.
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
144
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
145
r
associated to the fixed endpoints (x Ol , YfJ) E Crit x Crit ffJ. Here, we use the brief notation M x", ,Y{3 (A) for the trajectory space associated to the fixed parameter A. 4 The ascending of the degree of the operator
XI'
W~Ol :
C. (r)
---+
C.+l (ffJ)
is due to the fact that, within this framework, we obtain isolated trajectories exactly if the relative Morse index is .yOl
XfJ·
{L(X Ol ) - {L(YfJ) = -1
Under this condition the finiteness of the set M~~:{3 is provided by the re spective compactness result. Again, these isolated trajectories can be counted with characteristic signs and we define UfJ Wk : C k (r)
• YfJ
T". (u>.)
Thus, we have to compute the difference of the terms a fJ
0
W~Ol(XOl)
=
L
L
T".(U>.) afJzfJ /L(z{3)=k+l (>. , u>.)EMH",{3 XCt,Z~
-
W~~1
0
af
L [L
(4.13)
In other words, w~fJ represents a chain homotopy between the chain complexes C.(r) and C.(ffJ).
W~~1
E
[0,1]
X
1,2
'PX""Y{3
3We extend the finite family C.(f"') by Cj(f"')
0
L
aOl(x Ol ) -
L
T".(U Ol ) WfJOlyOl
/L(y",)=k-1 u",EM~:,y",
L [L
L
L
T".(UOl ) . T".(V>.)] xfJ /L(x,B)=k /L(y",)=k-1 u EMJ'" (>' v>.)EMH"',B XQ,YOt. I YCt1Zfj Q
with the homotopy parameter A, so that, due to the regularity result in Theorem 2, we obtain the finite-dimensional manifold
(A, u)
L
and
(4.14)
H",{3 OlfJ h OlfJ o -~ h 1
L
T".(U>.). T".(UfJ)] xfJ /L(x{3)=k /L(z,B)=k+l (>. IU>.)EMH",{3 U EM~ J,B Xa:'Z/3 13 Z{3IXfj
Proof. At this stage we finally have to apply the results about transversality, compactness and orientation as far as the spaces of A-parametrized trajectories are concerned. Let us choose a regular homotopy
_ {
L
( >. , U>.)EMH",{3 XO:'%/3
Ck(ffJ), k E Z
~~,~ - ~g,~ = ae+l 0 W~Ol
H",{3
=
( XOl , zfJ)
satisfying the identities
M x""Y{3 -
(xOl , zfJ) zfJ /L(z{3)=k+l
~gOl and ~~Ol.
fOl and ffJ together with their associated chain morphisms Then there is a famil71 of morphisms
(4.12)
L
,T.OlfJ '¥k XOl
Proposition 4.6 Let h~fJ and hrfJ be two regular Morse homotopies between
---+
Ck+l(ffJ)
for k E Z on the generators XOl E Crit fOl by
Figure 4.3: Cobordism-equivalence for mixed broken trajectories of type (a)-(b)
W~Ol : Ck(r)
---+
I u E M H",{3} x""Y{3 (A)
=0
for j
< 0 or
j
> n.
with regard to the right hand side of equation (4.12) and (4.15)
(~~Ol
-
~gOl)
(xOl ) =
L
[L
T".(U1) -
/L(X,B)=/L(x"')Ut EM~; ..,,B 4This is not necessarily a manifold!
L
T".(UO)] xfJ
uoEM~~ •.,,B
~~:ry]~~~~~~~~~~...:a~,;!,o-~~~=~~~~~~-~_.,,",,,,,,,,~====,,,.~-,,,,,.=-=~==~---_._._--------
146
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
with respect to the left hand side. In principle, all steps which have to be gone through are known from the above propositions as applications of cobordism equivalence for trajectory spaces. In this framework, however, we have to apply our results on compactness, gluing and orientation to the 0- and I-dimensional manifolds of the A-parametrized trajectories. This leads to a slightly richer vari ety of possible cases to consider. This time, the connected components in ques tion may also be manifolds with boundary. Hence, regarding the cobordism equivalence, we have to take into consideration more separated cases. The sketch in Figure 4.4 suggests a geometrical visualization of the closed subman ifold M;L,z~ C [0,1] X p~~2,z~ for J.l(x a ) = J.l(zj3). There, the ends of the one-dimensional components, which have a boundary in the weak sense of con vergence toward mixed broken trajectories, are indicated by open brackets ")'.
THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
4.1.
147
Obviously, case (b) does not play a role in our cobordism-equivalence, be cause those closed components neither contain boundary points in the strong sense, that is, curves u E MXQ'x~(O) UMxQ,x~(I) as trajectories for the time dependent gradient flows yielding M~~,x~ and M~~,x~, nor boundary points in the weak sense, that is, mixed broken trajectories, composed of trajectories v>. E MXI,ZI(A) satisfying J.l(x') - J.l(z') = -1 and respective a-trajectories. Concerning the oriented cobordism-equivalence for trajectory spaces, the gluing operation associates to each mixed broken trajectory
(u>., uj3) E Mx""z~(A) x M!:,x~
(u a , v>.) E Me,y", x My""x~(A)
and
building up the terms in (4.13) and (4.14), a one-dimensional connected compo nent of M;;Q'x~ of type (c) or (d). Additionally, regarding the terms in (4.15), the trajectories u a j3 E Mx""x~ (0) U MXQ'x~ (1) lead us to connected compo nents with boundary in the strong sense, that is, of type (a) or (d). Hence, the discussion of the cobordism relations in the proof of Proposition 4.5 has to be extended by the cases (a) and (d) of manifolds with boundary. As to (a): The connected component M:",x~ 0 in question is diffeomorphic to the compact interval. As we analysed in the first section of this chapter, the natural isomorphism n induces the following orientations of the component y 0 from the canonical orientations [1 @ 1*] of the classes lUi], Ui E "" ~ M~:y, i = 0,1, at the boundaries of the interval, A = 0,1:
M;;
• A =
°"" "
orientation toward the interior of the component,
• A = 1 """" outward directed orientation. Given the boundary curves
aM;; Xa 0 = {uaf.l, Vaf.l} C M~o Xa UM~l Xa , fJ fJ O:'IJ
O:lIJ
OO/J
we consequently have to distinguish the following two cases: Figure 4.4: The I-dimensional manifold with boundary of A-parametrized tra jectories With regard to the components of the one-dimensional A-parame trized trajectory spaces, we have to consider separately the following diffeo morphism types: (a) [0,1], with aM;L,xiJ C Mx""xiJ(O) u M xQ ,xiJ(I),
(b) SI, (c) (-00,00), (d) [0,00) and (-00,1].
1. Assume {u a j3, v a j3} C M~~,xiJ or M~~,xiJ' Then, in both cases, the
canonical orientations of u a j3 and va j3 give rise to opposite orientations on the one-dimensional connected component, such that the identity
er[u a j3J
=
er[va l3]
implies the relation T(T(U a j3)
= -T(T(Va j3)
2. Considering the situation ua j3 E M(A = 0), va l3 E M(A = 1), we obtain at both ends the same orientation on the component from the canonical orientations of the boundary points, so that we are led to the identity T(T(U a j3)
= T(T(V a l3)
.
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
148
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
Summing up these results, we may reduce the difference
149
Xi'
(ipfo - ipgo) (X o ) u~
from (4.15) to trajectories u o{3 E M x",xl3(>' = 0,1), which solely bound com ponents M~,xl3 0 of type (d).
As to (c): Considering connected components M~,xl3 0 of the diffeomorphic type (-00, (0), we no)\' have to deal with weak convergence toward mixed broken trajectories at both ends. The natural isomorphisms n(A, u>.) : Det D u),
,
Z{3.
.z{3
---=-. AmaxT(>.,u),)M~
together with Proposition 3.14 enable us to reduce this case to the analysis in the proof of Proposition 4.5. Once again, we distinguish two types of cobordism equivalence by the order in the mixed broken trajectories:
•
X{3
• (u>., U(3)
E
M X",ZI3(A) x M{;,xl3 as in the right hand side of (4.13) and
• (u o , v>.)
E
M~:,y" x M y",XI3(A) as in (4.14).
Figure 4.6: Induction of orientation in opposite directions
The associated case distinction for the equivalence of broken trajectories is illustrated within Figures 4.5 and 4.6. We observe that the difference of both
mixed broken trajectories, which the gluing operation associates to the one dimensional components M~,xl3 0 of type (d). Thus, it remains to accomplish the analysis of the cobordism-equi valence for components of type (d), which, due to the discussions up to this point, establish the decisive link between the left hand side and the right hand side of the chain homotopy equation (4.12).
Xi'
~Uo,tJ ·Yo
Z{3.
v>. U{3
• x{3
As to (d): On the one hand, as we know from the discussion of case (a), the canonical orientation [1 0 l*J induces an inward pointing orientation on the entire component 0 [ M H"13 x",xl3 ~ 0, (0) at boundary trajectories Uo E M X",XI3(A = 0) and an outward pointing orien tation at boundary trajectories Ul E M X",XI3(A = 1). On the other hand, the case distinction for the orientation induction for mixed broken A-trajectories referring to the canonical orientations and the natural isomorphism n(\ u>.) yields an inward pointing orientation for the order
(u>., u(3)
E
M X",ZI3(A)
X
-fl3 M z13 ,xl3
Figure 4.5: Equally directed induction of orientation
and an outward pointing orientation for the mixed broken trajectory with the order -f" (Uo , v>.) E Mx",y" x M y",XI3(A) .
right hand sides (4.13) and (4.14) may also be reduced to the computation for
An illustration is given by the sketches in Figure 4.7. Hence, in relation with
,..-
-------_._-----,
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
CHAPTER 4.. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
150 x'"
x'"
•
•
II • Zp
Uo
• y",
Uo
, etc.
151
Summing up this last analysis, we have obtained the result on the canonical homomorphism ~'" : H': (f"') - t H': UP) , associated to given Morse functions f'" and fP together with a fixed coherent orientation, by additionally taking into account the A-parametrized trajectory spaces. The next proposition establishes the final independence of the homology groups from the choice of Morse function .
rr
Proposition 4.7 Each ordered triple of Morse functions f"', fP and to gether with the associated homomorphisms ~' fulfills the composition rule
Up
JP
• xp
• xp
the boundary trajectories Ul E
M
x ",xl3(>\ =
0,1) ,
we distinguish the following four combinations:
(4.16)
•
T,,(U>.)· T,,(Up) = -T,,(Uo),
•
T"(U,,,)' T,,(V>.) = T,,(UO),
•
T,,(U>.)· T,,(Up) = T,,(ud and
•
T"(U,,,)· T,,(V>.)
=
L
/L(y,,)=k-l
L U1
L
C
=
(~(hP1)
0
~(h"'P)) . C
',..,..
L
'13'%13
L
i=l
so that relation (4.16) is satisfied. We consequently deduce the homological identity 0
~"') ({cd)
from Proposition 4.6 for each class
T"(U,,,) . T,,(V>.)
{Ck} E Hk(f"'), k E Z
u"EM~~...... ' ya: (>.,VA)EMyH_ 0:, .... /3
L
L aix~,i E Ck(f"'), k E Z ,
J"'({cd) = {~"'(Ck)' Ck} = {(~P o~"') (Ck)} = (JP
T,,(U>.)· T,,(Up)
(>.,uA)EM~" %Q UQEMf13
EM"" '%13 (1)
H': (f1) .
n
L
T,,(Ul)
~(h"'1).
Ck =
We are finally able to deduce the asserted identity for (x"" xp) E Critki'" x CrihfP:
/L(zl3)=k+l
-t
is satisfied for all chains C E C*(f"'). Fortunately, this is not necessary with regard to the required result for the homology groups. It is sufficient to find a homotopy hQ;1 (R(Ck)) according to the construction of the gluing for each fixed chain
-T,,(U1) .
L
~'" = J'" : H': (f"')
Proof. At this stage we take advantage of the freedom of choosing an appro priate Morse homotopy, established by Proposition 4.6. Considering the homo morphisms JP and ~'" induced by ~(hP1) and ~(h"'P), respectively, we now use the gluing construction for simply broken trajectories consisting exclu sively of homotopy trajectories associated to hP1 and h"'P. Due to Proposition 4.6, every Morse homotopy h"'1(R) constructed in this way must yield the same homomorphism J"'. But in order to be able to apply the gluing result from corollary 2.61, we are only allowed to put a finite number of critical points x"" xp, x 1 into relation with each other by isolated h-trajectories. Hence, we generally cannot find a homotopy hQ;1 such that the identity
Figure 4.7: Cobordism-equivalence of type (d)
uo,
0
T,,(UO)
uoEM"" '''13 (0)
o
Thus, without loss of generality, we may start from a fixed Ck = x", E Critkf"', so that there is only a finite number of pairs (xp, x 1 ) E CritkfP x Critkrr with M h "l3 X M h13 "1 -J- 0 Xo.,X/3
Xj3,x')
r
----~
152
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
We set the constant
153
Definition 4.8 Finally, this functorial concept leads us to the independence of R = maxR(x a , xf3, x')')
our homology theory from the choice of a concrete Morse function. Considering the product groups
according to Corollary 2.61. Thus, the identity
LL
L
Hk =
Tu (U a f3) . Tu (Uf3')') x')'
x", xfj U"fjEMx",xfj Ufj",EMxfj,x..,
(4.17)
LL
L
H k = { ( ... , {en, ,." {d~}, ... )
together with the bijection x
#n·
Mh"fj
Xcoxp
Xp,X'"'(
E
Hf
I {d~} = cP~a . {ck}, ... }
which is well-defined due to Theorem 8. This homology group, independent of the Morse functions, actually describes the same as the inverse limit ~ H k
~ Mh",fj
xo:,x,..
(r) with resped to the isomorphisms cP~a. This concept will be called the
from Corollary 2.61, proves the assertion. Here, the identity Tu (U a f3)' Tu (Uf3')')
Hf(r), k E IE ,
we define H k as the subgroup
Tu (U a f3#R Uf3')')
.x", xfj U"fjEM"",xfj Ufj..,EMxfj,x..,
. Mh"fj
II
f'" Morsefct.
identification process.
= Tu (U a f3#R Uf3')') = Tu(U a')')
follows from the relation between gluing and induced orientation as already analysed above. D
4.1.4
Let us now sum up the results from the last three propositions in the second main theorem of Morse homology:
Throughout the rest of this chapter we assume without loss of generality that M is a connected manifold. Since we intend to relieve our Morse homology concept from as many noncanonical assumptions and inputs as possible, the last item we have to get rid of is the coherent orientation 0". Therefore, we have to analyse how the homology groups H~; change if we replace 0"1 by 0"2. In a way comparable to the case of Morse homotopies, we will look for canonical isomorphisms, which enable us to identify uniquely the elements of the groups sequence
Theorem 8 Given a fixed coherent orientation
0" on the manifold M and two arbitrary Morse functions fa and ff3, there is a canonical isomorphism between the associated families of homology groups
<'-If.:
}
cP~a : H~(r) ~ H';(ff3) , and the following functorial relations are fulfilled for the family {cP~a ff3 Morse functions}:
• cPI •
f3
cP~a
0
Ir,
~;
{H~ }{u coho orientation}
,~1:
as in the inverse limit process. Actually, the key for this problem lies within the group action described in Proposition 3.16,
cP~a = cPI a
= idH~(J"')
Topology and Coherent Orientation
r
.
Proof First, the isomorphism property is a consequence of these functorial
relations as we see from ;F,.af3 ;F,.f3a
'¥.
0
'¥.
'd
= 1
H~(J"').
and vice versa. The fact that cP~a actually reproduces the identity is concluded immediately from the constant Morse homotopy
-+
CA .
Our aim is to extract homology isomorphisms from these transformations r.p E r of coherent orientations. For the sake of simplicity we first illustrate the procedure with a fixed Morse function f and consider the associated homology groups H':,(f). Obviously, we may put all coherent orientations 0" E CA coinciding on the iso lated trajectories of the negative gradient flow of f together in one equivalence class, that is
r{;r. D
x CA
(4.18)
{ 0"0 } = { 0"
E CA
= ([u, DuD I for all DuD E Mt,y, x, y E Crit f O"([U,
U
0"0
}
.
.
~ -~
-
~
-.
-""""
--
154
-
--- --~--
u-
--~
--- -- - -- -~~
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Hence we define the set of equivalence classes as CA consider the group of transformations
f- - )!":t:'
together with the action
G(f) (4.19)
X
(cp, (1)
-
CA
f---*
----t
-
CA,
_0-
---
"
_0
--'"'"
•
_n_
_E"" ----
_~~O~"
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
= CA/",' Let us now
G(f) = {±1}Crit f
~-
Ll:.~.c
--~- --- -~---&
155
whose supporting curves may be connected to an n-dimensional 'Mobius band' (u . V-I )*TM. We remember that we might put the original definition of the equivalence of such Fredholm operators along curves in a more general form, such that operators fulfilling the condition WI ((u.v- I )*TM) = 0 are admitted for simultaneous orientation. Already this weaker condition, which admits more possible coherent orientations, implies the fundamental identity aU 0 aU = 0 of a boundary operator. Example Let us consider the non-orientable manifold JlD2(IR) endowed with a suitable Morse function as indicated in Figure 4.8. Then, it is due to the chain
cpa,
(cpa)[ux,y] = cp(x)cp(y)a[ux,y] for
[UX,y] = [ux,y, Du""y], Ux,y
E
M!,y
ZO
•
In fact, G(f)/± forms a subgroup of r. The next observation is that, given any such orientation transformation cp, we can indicate uniquely a suitable isomorphism of the associated homology groups H';l (f) and H';z (f): Choosing cI>\O : (0*, aU)
(4.20)
----t
V2
VI
(0*, a\OU)
cI>\O • x = cp(x) . x, x E Crit f
,
•UI
,
we compute
·----:..... x
2
U2
---
<:U(ux,y) = cp(x) cp(y) Tg(Ux,y), aUx
=
L( x, y )U y = cp(x) L( x, y )\017 cp(y) . Y y
y
This leads to the identity cI>\O aU x
V2 cp2(X) L(X, Y )'fJucp(y). Y
•zO
y
(4.21)
VI
L(x, y)\OucI>\O. Y y
a\OU cI>\O y . Thus, cI>\O represents a chain homomorphism, which is one-to-one due to the involutivity cp2 = id. Consequently, each transformation cp E G(f) gives rise to a homology isomorphism. However, there is the problem that the endpoints of the [u, K] E CA merely determine the transformations 'P up to the sign ±cp. This amounts to stating that the associated isomorphisms of homology are only determined up to the sign of their degree of modulus L Fortunately, by introducing an additional parameter, we are able to remedy this flaw within our orientation concept. At this stage we shall discuss in a more particular way the coher ent orientation of equivalent operators, which coincide at their endpoints, but
Figure 4.8: a-trajectories on JlD2(IR)
a
complex property 2 = 0 for any arbitrary coherent orientation with respect to the weaker equivalence relation just proposed above that we compute the following relations for the characteristic signs of isolated trajectories:
(4.22)
Tu(ud . Tu (V2) Tu(ud . Tu(vd
-TU(U2) . Tu(VI) -Tu (U2) . Tu (V2)
These equations do not, however, determine the characteristic signs Tu(Ui)' Tu(Vi) uniquely. Since UI • u 2 I and VI . ViI represent Mobius bands, the
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
156
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY This yields a generalization of {± 1 }Crit f in the sense of
operators
(Ul' D u ,) 'f (VI, D v ,) 'f
Crit f
(U2, D U2 ) (V2, D V2 )
x
cannot be equivalent according to the weaker version despite the coincidence of the endpoints. In fact, we may suggest exactly two different coherent ori entations up to some transformation from G(f), which yield non-isomorphic homologies, namely:
(a)
(Hg', Hf', H~') ~ (2, 2 2 , 0)
(b)
(Hg2, Hf2, H~2) ~ (22, 0, 2)
(22 ,0,2) ~ (H 2 ,Hl,HO) This means that, already at this stage, we find a hint of Poincare duality, which is immanent to Morse homology. It is closely connected to the choice between positive or negative gradient flow for the definition of boundary operator. As to the example, in order to comply with the dimension axiom, we have to decide on case (a). As we shall see in Lemma 4.13, this is related to the condition of the equivalence relation for operators in Definition 3.7. That is the condition that we simply demand the coincidence of the trivializations at the negative end, provided that we start from the Morse homology associated to negative gradient flow. Otherwise, choosing the positive end for the coincidence condition would lead us to the cohomology turned around by reflection. Definition 4.9 At first we define an appropriate generalization of G(f) with respect to arbitrary Morse functions. Hence, we have to consider the set of Hessians
£ = {A
E d(TM)
mEn
I
Am: TmM ----+ TmM } non-deg. and conj. self-adjoint
~
= {±1}£
instead of Crit f. Let be a group with respect to pointwise multiplication together with the action
(rpO") [u x.y, K;, K;;]
=
rp(K;)rp(K;;)O"[ux,y, K;, K;;]
£
~ H 2 f(x)
.
which additionally are compatible with the isomorphisms
~~a : H~(r) ~ H~(f{3) on the level of the homology groups. Hence, the problem indicated above may be expressed as follows: ~/± = r ; that is, there are exactly two transformations rp E ~ associated to a given pair (0"1,0"2) of coherent orientations, such that the identity 0"2 = rpO"l is satisfied, namely ±rp. In order to attain a unique identification of the homology groups by means of the isomorphisms rp* = ~'P associated to the rp E ~, we crucially require the functorial behaviour (4.25)
(rp' . rp)*
=
rp: 0 rp*
This condition prevents us from choosing erratically between +rp and -rp. Actually, the problem of a natural selection process with respect to functo rial behaviour lies in the relative constitution of a coherent orientation and its transformations. These transformations are given by rp(x)rp(y) with respect to the pairs (x, y) of endpoints. Thus, the relative character of these transfor mations is in contrast to the absolute character of a mapping rp : £ ----+ {± 1}. In order to fix such a mapping rp uniquely, we need a characterization of rp by Fredholm operators, which are endowed with only one end within £. This means that, instead of merely orienting the relative, connecting trajectories from Mx,y = WU(x) rt1 W8(y), we have to find an absolute fixing, for example by means of an orientation of some stable manifold W 8 (y). Thus we shall develop the following concept of the so-called 'one-sided' operators to find a solution for this problem. Let us first regard the trivial case, M = R.n. Let A + E S be a conjugated self-adjoint operator on R.n and A E Coo ([0,00], End (n, R.)) endowed with A( +00) = A +. In this situation, we consider [0, 00] c R to bear the differentiable structure as a submanifold with boundary within iR. We consequently define the one-sided operator
~
x CA ----+ CA (rp, 0") ~ rpO"
'----+
Once again by analogy with (4.20) and (4.21) the rp E ~ give rise to isomor phisms (4.24) ~'P : (C*(f), 80') ~ (C*(f), 8'P0') ,
and
If we make use of the original equivalence relation, however, which orients the 'Mobius bands' in a unique way, exactly one of these two possibilities is selected. Referring to this example, we observe that possibility (b) violates the known identity for the homology of connected manifolds, Ho(M) ~ 2, which is principally related to the dimension axiom. Actually, case (b) yields nothing more than the classical cohomology of lP'2(R.) turned around by reflec tion, that is
(4.23)
157
(4.26)
SA: X = H l ,2([0,00),R.n)
----+
y = L 2([O,00),R.n)
u
~
it+A·u.
_______
158
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Referring to the methods which were developed throughout the Fredholm Sec tion 2.2.1, it is straightforward to show that SA represents a Fredholm operator with index n ~ J1(A+). We may conclude similarly that (4.27)
8(A+)
= {SA
E F(Xj Y)
I A(+oo) = A+}
is a contractible space such that we are able to equip the determinant bundle Det on 8(A+) with a well-defined orientation. This concept of a one-sided operator in the trivia! framework can be transferred to the manifold M as follows. Let s E coo([O,oo),M) have the fixed end s(oo) Ax E E be fixed. Then we consider the pair (s, SA), where (4.28)
SA: H 1,2(S*TM1[0,00))
--+
L 2(s*TMI [0,00))
u
f-+
V'tU
x and let
+ A· u
is a Fredholm operator of type (4.26), endowed with the fixed end A(+(0) = Ax. This set {(s, SA)} of one-sided operators with fixed end Ax may be assembled in a uniformly orientable equivalence class [SAxl. The uniform orientability is due to the fact that, by analogy to Definition 3.10, the choice of orientation of an arbitrary representative (s, SA) together with a trivialization of s*TM induces an orientation of 8(A; triv)' Hence in a reverse and unique manner, this induces orientations for all'the other representatives, so that they do not depend on the actual choice of trivializations. This may be concluded by means of a lemma which is strictly analogous to Lemma 3.8. Moreover, it proves to be consistent with the fact that the space of all curves 8 with a fixed end s( (0) = x is contractible to the constant curve s == x. Additionally, we are able to analyse a gluing operation for such one sided operators together with the 'two-sided' operators (u, K) E ~u'TM of the former type: [SAxJ#[U, K] = [SK+J for Ax = K_ . Starting from a given coherent orientation with respect to the classes of op erators [u, KJ E A, we derive a unique orientation of [SK+] from a given orientation of [SAxl by means of this gluing operation. In order to obtain uniqueness guaranteed, we obviously need independence from the chosen curve u associated to the fixed endpoints. This is the very point where we remark the necessity of a simultaneous orientability of all operators (u, K) belonging to given ends K;, K:. Let us state the consequence of this uniqueness as
opemtors5
Proposition 4.10 A coherent orientation of the relative classes of [K;, K:J together with an orientation of a given fixed [SA xl , Ax E E induce 5with respect to the equivalence of orientations by means of trivializations with coincidence at the negative end
~'"
. . • _A _ _ • _ _
~~~~~~~~~;;~·\!~~~~iEi~~,'t~t!¥iiL~:~J.~~~...!
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
159
unique orientations of all positively one-sided classes of opemtors [S K:], K: E
E. On the other hand, however, let us regard what we have to change, if we wish to endow the classes [SK-], K; E E of negative half-sided operators with a uniform orientation, that is in principle an orientation of the unstable manifolds. In the case of a non-orientable manifold M we would also have to change the definition of equivalence of the relative operators (u, K) rv (v, L). Namely, we would have to choose the coincidence of the trivializations of u*TM and v*T M at the positive end u( +(0) = v( +(0) as far as 'n-dimensional Mobius bands' WI (( u· V-I )*T M) -=F are concerned. Actually, the question of whether we have to endow either the 'stable' or the 'unstable' manifolds with a uniform orientation corresponds to the decision between negative and positive gradient flow. It is exactly one of the two alternatives, namely the choice of the stable manifolds in the case of the negative gradient flow, which reproduces the necessary identity for the classical homology of connected manifolds (see below), Ho(M) 9:! Z, also in the situation of a non-orientable manifold.
°
Proof of proposition 4.10. Without loss of generality, let s E Coo ([0,00], M) and Ul, U2 E Coo(iR, M) be asymptotically constant and satisfy the identities
s(+oo) = Ul(-oo) = U2(~00) = x and Ul(+oo) = U2(+00) = y . Moreover, let us assume a positive half-sided operator Sx on s together with relative operators K 1, K 2 on Ul and U2, respectively, once again asymptotically constant with ~ K+ - -KSx I2 ' K+ 1- -K+ 2'
We consequently consider asymptotically constant trivializations
¢>x: s*TM ~ [O,ooJ x IR n , ¢>1 : urTM ~ iR x IR n , ¢>2: u;TM ~ iR x IR n satisfying ¢>x(+oo) = ¢>1(-00) = ¢>2(-00), such that the pair (¢>1,¢>2) is ad missible and the non-degenerate, conjugated self-adjoint endpoint operators6
Ax
=
¢>x(Sx)(+oo) = ¢>1,2(K1,2)(-00), A y = ¢>1,2(K1,2)(+00) E GL(n,lR)
are diagonal matrices. If the identity ¢>1 (±oo) = ¢>2 (±oo) holds at both ends, the proof is straightforward. Thus, let us assume the actually interesting case 6¢x(Sx) = ¢xo SxO ¢;l E .c(X; Y), see 4.26
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
160
¢l (+00)
=
4.1. THE MAIN THEOREMS OF MORSE HOMOLOGY
So ¢2( +00), where S denotes the reflection matrix
S~C'
+1.
161
o Before we are able to relieve the homology groups Hf(M) from their parameter a, we first have to introduce even an additional parameter. Choosing any class [SA], A E t:, of half-sided operators with fixed positive end and specifying any orientation O(SA) of this class, we expand the parameter dependence,
+1)
Ha ~ H(a,o(SA))
from Definition 3.7. Let us henceforth use the following notations:
= So ¢x, = So ¢l, = SO¢2 .
¢t = ¢x, ¢; ¢t+ = ¢l, ¢1 ¢!- = ¢2, ¢2+
Wecompute (¢;#o¢2+)(+00) = (¢t#o¢t+) (+00). Now let [SxJ be oriented firmly by o(Sx) as well as K 1 '" K2 by o(Kt} and o(K2). Then, the relation between the orientations (4.29)
o(Sx#O Kt} == o(Sx)#o(K1 )
~
o(Sx)#o(K2) == o(Sx#O K 2)
* * . 2 For instance, if we choose the Hessian A = H /(x), x E Crit I for a given Morse function I, specifying the orientation O(SA) amounts in principle to fixing an orientation of the stable manifold W 8 (x). Hence, the coherent orientation a gives rise particularly to an orientation of connecting orbits Ux,y E M!,y = WU(x) rh W 8 (y) thus leading to orientations of all the other stable manifolds. Now, let (a,o(SA)) and (a',o'(S~)) be pairs of parameters, such that there is exactly one transformation pair ±ip (see above). It is due to the coherence of the given orientations and to Proposition 4.10 that we may start without loss of generality from identical classes [SA] = [S~l. Let us choose the sign of ±ip according to the case distinction
amounts to relating (4.30)
(¢t#o¢t+)(o(Sx#O Kt}) ~ (¢; #o¢2+)(O(SX#O K 2))
on the contractible class 8(A y ) in trivialized form. Thus, we have to verify that this relation is equivalent to the compatibility of the orientations o(Kt} ~ o(K2 ) according to definition 3.10, that is (4.31)
¢t+(o(Kt}) ::: ¢!-(o(K2))
in
9(A x ,Ay) C ~triv
,
since (¢t+, ¢!-) is admissible. 7 We notice that we may state relation (4.30) in the trivialized case alternatively as (4.32)
¢t(o(Sx))#¢t+(o(K1 )) ~ ¢;(o(Sx))#¢2+(o(K2)) .
Now let L t be any homotopy between ¢t+(K1 ) and ¢2+(K2) in the con tractible space 9(A x , A y ). Given a large enough gluing parameter, it induces a homotopy ¢t(Sx) #L t between ¢t(Sx)#¢t+(Kt} und ¢t(Sx)#¢2+(K2). Then the identity
¢t (o(Sx)) = (S 0
¢;) (o(Sx)) = -¢; (o(Sx))
together with the equivalence of orientations (4.32) imply the relation (4.33)
¢t+(o(Kt}) ~ -¢2+(o(K2))
7See Definition 3.7.
=
¢!-(o(K2)) .
(4.34)
+1, if O(SA) = o'(SA) ip(A) = { -1, if O(SA) = -o'(SA)
To put it in other terms, we extend the action {±1 }£ x CA
----t
CA
to
ip. (a,o(SA)) = (ipa, ip(A) . O(SA)) , so that we deduce the existence of a now unique transformation map ip E {±1}£ between (a, O(SA)) and (a', o'(S~)) from the coherence condition for a and a'. At last, due to the construction, this mapping
((a,o(SA)), (a', o'(S~)))
1--4
ipa' a
satisfies the functorial property (4.35)
ip0'30'2 0
ip0'20'1
ipa30'1, ipO'O'
id,
which was demanded in (4.25). Thus, coherent orientations give rise to isomorphical homologies, u'u which may be identified with each other by means of the isomorphisms q)'P in a unique way due to (4.35). As a consequence, this identification process provides us with homology groups Hk(M) which are finally independent of any other parameters than the order k and the smooth manifold M.
,~::;ii;;;f}E#"~;;f;.~;;;"';;,i:;:;'~;;;~,ffi.7,;)t'&~;:;':"':::;,;i'&:, ..-;:.:tii';:.:'''',;;;~;;;;;;";;';;':';;::";'·"'o1t,~;:~;;;-;:;:j;;i~~~:~f,;,"';f.:f·~-~;;.;:;;;.,.",~;.~:t,':1~T;a;;;'~';;;:';'~,1.i>'j;."1~1t;,-~,;;;,:;;';;~"",.;,,,:,:~
162
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Definition 4.11 By analogy with definition
4.8 we
define the Morse homology
groups as the inverse limit
Hl:°rse(M)
THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
4.2.
gives rise to an admissible pair with respect to (ul,D u1 ) ,....., (u2,D u2 ). More over, we may construct this trivialization in accordance with the splitting-off of a one-dimensional subbundle rJ of ~ = ,*TM,
lim Hf(M)
=
~
+
with respect to the isomorphisms 'P~' a .
Referring back to definition 3.7, our argument for the construction of the non-trivialized Fredholm-classes on the one hand was founded on the relation for the halfsided operators as described in proposition 4.10 and on the other hand on the algebro-topological relation Ho(M) ~ Z for connected man ifolds. The discussion of the latter, which is equivalent to the dimension axiom within the axiomatic framework is now anticipated to the next section. We verify the consistence of our orientation construction with this crucial relation as follows. Proposition 4.12 Let M be a connected, smooth manifold equipped with a Morse junction f, which possesses exactly one local miminum yo. Then, the Morse homology group of order 0 with respect to f satisfies the relation
The proof is based on the following fact:
(Ul'
any coherent orientation
(J
Ul
and U2 from Mty
DuJ ,. . ., (U2' D U2 ) ,
leads to the identity Ta(Ul)
=
= rJ EB C- l
.
Here, rJ denotes the one-dimensional bundle on [-1,1] induced by TWU(x) with the fibre rJo = TxWU(x) which is identical with the eigenspace of H 2 f(x) associated to the unique negative eigenvalue. Up to an appropriate parame trization, the generating sections Ul, U2 for the kernels of D U1 and D U2 , respectively, lie exactly in this subbundle rJ. Thus, starting from a fixed orien tation on (n-l, we can derive orientations of the bundle ~ = (u 11 . U2) * T M from the canonical orientations [Ul] and [U2], which must be opposite each other. This proves the lemma. 0 Proof of the proposition. The unique local minimum Yo of the Morse function f provides us with a generator of the cycle group Zo(f) for the Morse complex of f. This generator is unique up to sign. We deduce from the lemma that, given any coherent orientation (J, the boundary 8 a Xl of each generator Xl E C l (f) vanishes. Thus, the assertion follows from Bo(f) = {O}. 0
It seems natural to expect that the proposition remains true if we do not impose the special condition on f to possess only one local minimum. The proof in this general setting requires some more steps and will be given in the next section in relation to the dimension axiom.
Ho(f) ~ Z
Lemma 4.13 Given two different, isolated trajectories with (x,y) E CritIf x Critof, that is
163
-Ta (U2)
Proof We consider the connection of the curves at the point x referring to a
suitable reparametrization which yields , = u 1l . U2 E Coo ([-1,1], M)
This is nothing else than a suitable parametrization of the I-dimensional unsta ble manifold WU(x) as a I-cell. We now choose a trivialization of ,*TM, such that on the one hand the Hessians H 2f(x) = D;;l = D;;2 and H 2 f(y) = D;;l = D;;2 become diagonal matrices with respect to this trivialization, and such that on the other hand the induced isomorphisms TyM = T,(±l)M ~ lR n differ by the reflection S defined above if they differ at all. Hence, this trivialization
4.2
The Eilenberg-Steenrod Axioms
In this section, we shall carry out the final step of the development of Morse
homology theory. We shall verify the functorial properties and the accordance with the axioms of a homology theory as they were set up by Eilenberg and Steenrod in [E-S], namely, • the existence of a long exact homology sequence, • the homotopy axiom, • the excision axiom and • the dimension axiom. For the sake of simplicity, we shall first derive the functorial construction and homotopy invariance for the concept of the absolute homology groups H~orse(M), before we treat the somewhat more involved relative groups H~orse (M, A) associated to admissible pairs of manifolds (M, A). In this framework
..",;:.:;;;;::,,~
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
164
a natural induction of chain maps for Morse complexes by closed embeddings of manifolds proves essential for functorial construction. In order to discuss this construction, however, we first need some technical preparation, namely suitable extension lemmata for Morse functions. 8
4.2.1 Extension of Morse Functions and Induced Morse Functions on Vector Bundles
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
we define (4.36)
fn = f/AnB n
165
.
Consequently, there is an increasing sequence of positive numbers (rn)nEN C JR+, such that the condition
fn(A n B n ) C [0, rn] is true for all n EN. This enables us to apply Tietze's theorem inductively for n: For each n E N there is a
The problem of the extension of Morse functions from submanifolds of M to the whole manifold M may be separated into a technical one on the one hand, the extension of the coercivity property and of the regularity of Morse functions on open submanifolds, and on the other hand, a problem related to dimension with respect to closed submanifolds. The first lemma yields the extension of the coercivity property. We notice that the coercivity of a continuous function f : M ----7 JR, Le. M
a
= {x
E M I f (x) ~ a }
compact for all a E JR ,
°
Lemma 4.14 Let M be a smooth manifold, A c M be a closed subset and f : A ----7 [0,00) be continuous and proper. Then there is a continuous and proper extension 9: M ----7 [0,00) 91 A = f . Proof. The proof is basically founded on an application of Tietze's extension theorem for continuous functions:
Let X be a normal topological space, A c X be a closed subset and f : A ----7 [0, 1] be a continuous function. Then there is a continuous extension
1* : X
----7
[0,1]' 1*1 A = f .
Since we are able to embed M as a closed submanifold in an JRN with N chosen suitably large, we may start from the assumption that M = JRN without loss of generality. Denoting the closed ball with radius r by Br
=
8for coercive Morse functions!
{x E JRN
I Ilxll
~ r}, r >
°
an d
o 9nl B n- 1
_
-
90
n-l
Defining
h n = arctan9~: B n
----7
[0, ~), n EN,
we obtain a sequence of continuous functions once again according to Tietze's theorem,
k n : JRN
There is a constant c > such that the continuous function fe = ----7 [0,00) is non-negative and proper, Le. f;;1 (K) is compact in M for all compact K c [0,00).
: B n ----7 [0, r n] satisfying
9~IAnBn = fn
is equivalent to the following property:
f +c : M
9~
(4.37)
.
----7
[o,~] with knl B 2 n
= h n and
lim k n = ~2 . Ilxll-->cx>
It is due to the construction in (4.36) and (4.37) that we may state the uniform. convergence on compact sets,
(4.38)
kn
Sh k E CO (JR N , [0, ~2))
with
lim k(x) IIxll-->cx>
= ~2
This implies a continuous and proper extension of f by 9 = tank E CO (JR N , [0,00)),91 A =
f o
We now have to transfer the extension result to the dense subset
CCX>(M, JR) c CO(M, JR)
of the smooth functions. Furthermore, we have to add the regularity condition
df rh McT*M.
We refer essentially to the results of differential topology as they can be found
in [Hi]. Hence, we take over the notations C~(M, JR), NU, f), etc., for the strong or, equivalently, the Whitney topology and the basis sets on Cg(M, JR)
NU, f) = {9 I 19(x) - f(x)1 < f(X) for all x EM}, f E CO(M, JR+) . An analogous definition holds for C~(M, JR). Then the extension result for smooth Morse functions can be stated as
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
166
Lemma 4.15 Let M be a smooth manifold, let A be a closed and W an open subset and let f E COO(W, R) be a Morse function on the submanifold W, such that Crit f cAe A eWe M .
Then there is a smooth Morse function 9 on M which extends f, that is,
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS We consequently define
go: M -t R, gOI U
=
f U . l
The set of continuous and proper functions represents an open subset with respect to the Whitney topology (see [Hi]), Prop~(M, R) C C~(M, JR.), open subset .
.AI,(go)
C
Prop~(M, JR.) C C~(M, JR.) ,
N.(go)
c
C~(M,JR.)
with
Crit h n U\A = 0 for all
Thus, the intersection .AI = JR.), too.
Nt n.Al,
hEN.
forms an open and dense subset of the Baire space C~(M, R). Since COO(M, JR.) lies dense in C~ (M, JR.), too, there is a
Now let
Coo (M, JR.) n.AI n X
0: :
arbitrarily close to go in C~ (U\A, IR)
M -t [0,1] be a smooth function satisfying
0:, A =
° and
0:1
and
gl A
=
fl A ' 0
As pointed out above, the next step is to develop an extension result for closed submanifolds. Here, we require an additional construction method for Morse functions, which appears very naturally. A feature which proves crucial for the whole Morse homology is the canonical tensorial behaviour of Morse complexes with respect to product operations: Given two manifolds equipped with Morse functions (M, J) and (N, g), the operation
(J EB g) (m, n)
(4.43)
= f(m)
+ g(n)
naturally provides a Morse function E COO(M x
N,IR)
together with the canonical identification (4.44)
CritkU EB g) =
U Critd x Critjg EM x N
,
i+j=k
At this stage, regarding our current concern, we need a generalization toward smooth vector bundles
is an open and convex subset of C~(M,
X = {f E C 2 (M, JR.) I df rI1 Me T* M }
E
.
because the Morse index behaves additively with respect to the operation EB.
It is clear from the well-known transversality theorems in differential topology (see [Hi]), that
g'
+ 0:' g'
provided that giU\A has been chosen close enough to gOIU\A'
fEBg
which contains merely coercive functions. Furthermore, referring to the C2_ Whitney topology, we can find a convex, open neighbourhood (4.41 )
go
Due to the concrete definition of the convex neighbourhoods N.. and the identity of go and f when restricted to U, 9 satisfies the properties
Therefore, we find a convex neighbourhood (4.40)
0:) .
9 E COO(M, R) n.AI n X
Due to Lemma 4.14 there is a continuous coercive extension (4.39)
9 = (1-
(4.42)
glA = flA . Proof. Since M is a normal topological space, we find an open subset U C M satisfying AcUcUcW.
167
M\U = 1 .
Let (".) E be a Riemannian metric on E with the associated quadratic form
q(Vm ) = (v m , vm)m
and let f be an arbitrary Morse function on M. Then we obtain the Morse
function IE:E-t1R (4.45) fdv m ) = f(m) + q(v m ) on E with the property (4.46)
lEI M
=
f and Crit*IE
~ Crit*f .
~~:~~~~~~~-~~~=-;-::~;:r.~:..~:~------"
~;:."~'" -'~-':.,-,:~~~::~o;:.·~·_,,,,~c~~:~;~~.=~:§~=~;;:~~~~~':g:s:}:ff;:::===~= -..--==-~~~~~=~=:~~;~~~~:;:;:~~~~~~:=~~~~~~~-;:-;':':~;;~~~-E:==:=~~~~~:~:~~~r~-::~"t'"~;':S~:.::;~¥:~F,~;~§=~~~~~~=!.:~_~A5:¥~~~~·· __-';' .r"-.,'.
168
CHAPTER 4.. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
On the one hand, the latter is due to the local product structure of E, so that the results (4.43) and (4.44) may be transferred to this special bundle situation. On the other hand, we observe that q restricted to the fibers is a trivial Morse function, that is Crit.qm = Critoqm = {Om} .
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
169
Proof. It is due to construction by means of quadratic extension on the nor mal bundle 1/ that the negative gradient field -\7 Iv represents an inner nor mal vector field on the boundary q; 1([0, EJ) of the manifold with boundary q;l ([0, ED for any E > O. This means that -\7 Iw is an inner normal vector field for A< in A<. From this we obtain the corollary. 0
a
a
This feature enables us to derive the following extension result:
Proposition 4.16 Given a closed submanilold A C M and a Morse junction IA E COO(A, IR) on A, there is a Morse junction I E COO(M, IR) extending
lA,
IIA = IA . Proof. Having in mind the above preparations for naturally induced Morse functions on smooth vector bundles, we consider a tubular neighbourhood W of A, which always exists for any closed submanifold (without boundary): 'P:
\}WCM.
4.2.2
The Homology Functor and Homotopy Invariance
The Diffeomorphical Functor First, we wish to discuss the homomorphisms between the respective homology groups induced by diffeomorphisms. We assume 'P: M --2..., N to be a smooth diffeomorphism between two manifolds and I to be a Morse function on M. Obviously, 'P gives rise to the Morse function
~
1/_
'P.I =
(4.48)
1 0 'P- 1
on N, so that we obtain the one-to-one correspondence
A Here, 1/ is the normal bundle of A and W is an open submanifold. Thus, the diffeomorphism 'P induces a Morse funct~on on W,
Iw = Iv 0 'P-
(4.47)
1
,
which extends I A : Iw I A
= I A· The preconditions of Lemma 4.15 are fulfilled if we choose a suitable restriction: Let R > 0 and AR = 'P (q;l ([0, RJ)), that is,
AR
C
II AR+< = IWI A R +< that is, in particular, IIA
= IA.
I
on M satisfying
' o
Actually, we may gain a further important result from this special extension construction on closed submanifolds:
Corollary 4.17 The extension I 01 I A in the above proposition can be chosen in such a way that there are no trajectories lor the negative gradient flow 01 I leaving A.
'P : Crit. I ~ Crit. ('P. f) .
However, before we are led to a chain map between the associated Morse com plexes 'P. : C.(I) ----> C.('P.f) we have to verify the condition (4.50)
A R +< eWe M, A R closed .
Then, Lemma 4.15 gives rise to a Morse function
(4.49)
a 'P.
= 'P.a .
Provided that the generic Riemannian metrics on M and N have already been fixed, it is generally merely an isometry 'P which maps isolated trajectories for I onto isolated trajectories for 'P.f. But we are able to choose the generic metric g on M in a way that also provides a generic metric on N via in duction by 'P. This means that we may choose the metrics generically such that 'P becomes isometrical. Remember that the transformations of the Morse complexes associated to fixed Morse functions by means of suitable Morse ho motopies. Analogously, we may regard the homology groups as independent of the Riemannian metric and we therefore assume without loss of generality that the given 'P is isometrical. The only item left to verify with respect to (4.50) is the consistency of the coherent orientations which have been chosen for M and N independent of 'P. This can be achieved by means of an appropriate
170
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
transformation by an a E {±1}Crit.! as we described in the last section, that is (4.51)
'P. : C.(J) ~ C.('P.J) 'P.Xk = a(Xk) . 'P(Xk), Xk E Critk!
To sum up, up to a respectively appropriate homotopy of the Riemannian metric each diffeomorphism 'P: M ~ N induces a homology isomorphism
'P~ : H~M(M, J) ~ H~N(N, 'P.J)
!:.4 ff3
'P. f
'P.
ff3
Vh t .-----,====
Jl + Iktl21Vhtl2
(4.52)
ifJ.('P.f ,'P.r)
0
'P. = 'P.
0
'P. : C.(M, J)
0
according to the definition of H.(M)
~
'P. : H.(M, J)
'Y
ifJ.(Jf3, r)
H.(N)
= limH.(M, r). Obviously, the con +-
('P 0 'l/J). = 'P.
0
C.(N, 'P.J)
~
H.(N, 'P.J)
and
'P. : H.(M)
=
struction guarantees consistency with the compositions of the morphisms (4.53)
~
and consequently to the homomorphisms
implies that 'P in fact induces a homomorphism
'P. : H.(M)
--=:.. 'P(M)
gives rise to the chain map
,
are mapped by 'P onto the corresponding h-trajectories belonging to 'P.ht h t 0 'P- 1. In a nutshell, the equality
f3
arp'/I C.('P~J) = a'P~!
(4.54)
'P : M
such that in the case of an isometry the h-trajectories associated to
1'=
N. We henceforth denote by 'P~f the Morse function on 'P(M) which is induced by f and 'P and which can be extended to a Morse function 'P.f on the whole manifold N without any negative gradient flow trajectory leaving the submanifold 'P( M) according to the corollary of Proposition 4.16. Actually, this condition allows us to identify the Morse complex C. ('P~J) on 'P(M) with a subcomplex of C. ('P.J) on N, that is
,
we can confirm functorial consistency. 'P induces a homotopy a rp.ht -----+
171
Here we assume a suitable extension of the coherent orientation of 'P(M) to the whole N. Thus, the identification with the subcomplex together with the diffeomorphical functor with respect to the diffeomorphism
Now, regarding a homotopy of Morse functions
r
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
'l/J. ,
so that we obtain a functor as far as smooth manifolds together with diffeo morphisms are concerned.
The Embedding Functor and the Homotopy Lemma By means of the extension results and this diffeomorphism functor we are now able to accomplish the extension to closed embeddings. Let 'P : M '----> N be an embedding such that 'P( M) represents a closed submanifold within
~
H.(N)
with respect to the identification process. Once again, we verify the composition rule, so that we obtain the sequence of functors
(4.55)
Hk
:
(manifolds, closed embeddeddings) ~ AB,9 kENo.
Before the next step of the generalization aiming at arbitrary smooth mappings, we first prove the crucial
Lemma 4.18 (homotopy lemma) A smooth i-parameter family of closed embeddings ('Pt : M '----> N)tE[O,lj implies the identity
'Po. = 'Pl. : H.(M) ~ H.(N) The proof of this lemma can be reduced to the following special case:
Auxiliary Proposition 4.19 Let f be a Morse junction on M and i O, i l M '----> lR x M be the embeddings given by
i"(m) = (v, m) for v = 0,1 9category of Abelian groups
~~TI~~:~~L~~{--------=-:~~~~~i..~~~~~~~~~1
172
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Additionally, we consider the quadratic functions qv : JR
JR qV(X) = (x --+
V)2, V
= 0, 1
Then the isomorphisms
.
i~ : H.(J) ~ H.(qv EB I)
induced by the canonical identification Crit.f ~ Crit.(qvEBI) and the canonical homology isomorphism
ep~o : H.(qo EB f) ~ H.(ql EB I) fit in with the commutative diagram
z.o
H.(J)
Y
H.(qo
+ I)
EB
eplO
H.(ql
f
Conclusion: If we carry out the identification of the homology groups H.(J) for Morse functions j on JR x M, we obtain the identity
173
and we define the homotopy
ht : JR x M
(4.58)
--+
JR, t E [0,1]
ht(x, y) = (x - a(t))2
+ f(y)
It is clear that this 'translation' represents a Morse homotopy between qo EB f and ql EB f. For the sake of simplicity we content ourselves with a consideration of the homomorphism epZt with respect to the isolated h-trajectories for the time-dependent negative gradient flow
(t3(t), i'(t)) = -Vh t
(4.59)
0
(/3(t), ')'(t)) . 1
We leave out the norming by the scaling factor (1
+ Ihtl2lVhtl2) -2.
This is
admissible for the following reasons: First, we will derive explicitly the necessary compactness results for this special Morse homotopy. This feature was the only reason in general for the scaling. Second, by means of a homotopy using an additional parameter A, we may verify that the homomorphism epk on the level of homology is independent of the special form of this norming. The isolated h-trajectories
•
~) + z.
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
(/3, ')')
E
MZ~,Zl' zv
= (v, y~)
E
Critk(qv EB I), v
= 0, 1
are determined uniquely by (4.59) as solutions of the differential equation
(4.60)
(t3(t),i'(t)) = (2(a(t)-/3(t)),-Vf o ')'(t))
Now let \11 be the isomorphism
(4.56)
i~
=
i~ : H.(M)
--+
H.(JR x M) \11 =
from this commutative diagram.
Proof of the auxiliary proposition 4.19: We have to verify the existence of a Morse homotopy
~ L 2(JR, JR,) ata + 2 : H'1 2( JR, JR ) ~
\11 E E triv
Since it is a smooth function with compact support according to the construc tion, we observe that
ht
qo EB f ~ ql EB f ,
it E CO'(JR, JR)
such that the associated homomorphisms epZt : Ck(qo EB f) --+ Ck(ql EB J) map the generating critical points to each other according to the formula
As a consequence, \11-1 (it) is determined uniquely. Thus, /30 = C<Xl(JR, JR) solves the equation
(4.57)
epZt (0, Yk) = (1, Yk)
for all Yk E Critkf, kEN .
(4.61)
(:t + 2) .
c L 2 (JR, JR) .
/30 = \I1(a) - it =
20:
We consider a smooth, monotone function a E C<Xl (JR, [0,1]) satisfying To put it in simpler terms,
a(t) = { 0, 1,
t~O
t~O
.
f30
is the unique solution of
t3o(t) = 2 (a(t) - /3o(t)) , t E JR j /30 E 'Pt:;(JR, JR)
0: - \11-1 (it)
E
""""""=========~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~""""",~-"",~"""~~"""-~-~,,,,,,~~,,,,,~~,,=~_.~=~-~--~:"""""""""""",,,,,,,,,,,,~~-,,=,~ ~ """'~~
174
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
This proves the statement that each isolated trajectory ((30, /,) E M~~,Zl cor responds to exactly one trajectory of the time-independent negative gradient flow for f. This amounts to the one-to-one correspondence f M x,y /'
s.<
~ f->
({30, /,)
I yk E Critk/ }
N(
IN
X
Critj(qk EB I), j = 0, ... , n,
qk(X) = (x, x), x E IRk First, we again obtain the isomorphisms
iZ : H*(J) ~ H*(qk EB I)
i: :H*(M) ~ H*(IR k
P: =
(4.63)
• IR
~
X
yielding
M)
independent of the Morse function f. This is due to compatibility with Morse homotopies. Thus, the inverse mapping by means of the identification of critical points represents the homomorphism pZ induced by the projection map pk,
[~
·t
Critj(J)
0
• IR x M
EB
which play an essential role second to that of closed embeddings. The idea is to extract the functorial behaviour of the homology morphisms step by step from the projections pk : IRk X M ---> M. By analogy with the I-dimensional case in the auxiliary Proposition 4.19 we consider the canonical identification
with respect to the canonical quadratic form
Proof of the homotopy lemma. Let us consider the commutative diagram of closed embeddings for any t E [O,lJ:
[
In the next passages we concentrate on projection mappings of the type p:MxN--->N,
From this we easily conclude the assertion.
~,
The Homology Functor for Arbitrary Smooth Mappings
ZO,Zl'
M~~,Zl = { ({30, yk) E P~~~Zl (IR x M)
Me
175
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
Mh,
with Zo = (0, x) und Zl = (1, V). Due to the assumption we are considering the relative Morse index /l(x) = /l(zo) = /l(Zl) = /l(Y). Thus, the time independent f-trajectories in question have to be constant, such that M~ot , z 1 consists exactly of the trajectories
·t 1M
--~-----~,--~ '---.---~~=-~-~-~~~--~' -~-~~=---~~~~"-
N
(i:r
1 :
H*(IR k
X
M) ~ H*(M)
Using the notation X
M
'--+
IR k+1 X M
((Xl, ... ,Xk),
m)
f->
((Xl,,,,,Xk,O, ... ,O),
ik+l,k : IRk
where
¢>(t)
(t, 'Pt(X)) ,
=
we may immediately set up the commutative diagram
i~(x) = (t, x), i~(y) = (t, y)
H*(M)
Y
Since we are already allowed to deal with the covariant homological functor for closed smooth embeddings, we deduce the identity (4.62)
.-/,.·t·t '+'* 01M* = IN*
0 'Ph
( ) : H* M ---> H*(IR
X
N)
independent of t E [0,1], also.
~k+l 1*
1*k
(4.64)
The auxiliary proposition states that isomorphisms i~* and i~* do not de pend on the parameter t. Hence we obtain the identity 'Ph -
m)
H*(IR k
X
M)
EB .k+l,k 1*
•
H*(IR k+1 X M)
~ffi~ H*(M)
iN:;-lo¢>*oiM*
o
which describes the relations between the inclusions and the projections as far as the trivial extensions by IRv are concerned.
176
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Definition 4.20 Resorting to a suitable closed embedding cpk : M ~ IRk we are able to lactor the projection map p : M x N -+ N into
p = pk
A-. _ 'l't -
=
p~
0
(cpk
X
idN
L '.
Let 'l/Jl : M ~ IRI be another closed embedding. Extending both given embeddings by means of the inclusions ik+l,k and ik+l,l, i.e. 0
cpk and ik+l,l 0 'l/Jl : M
~
IR k +1
.
Summing up, it is sufficient to find a homotopy
(4.65)
cp
~ 'I/J, ¢t: M ~
IR
2n
¢I : M x [0, 1J
-+
((1 -
T(t)) . cp, T(t) ,cp)
¢2 : M x [0, 1J -+ IRn EB IR n , ¢2(., t) = (T(t). 'I/J,
(1- T(t)) ,cp)
ic
(cp, 0)
(0, cp)
('I/J,O) .
:
N
y
Obviously, ¢t fulfills the
0
i c•
= idH.(N)
~
M x N,
f--t
(c, y), c E M fixed,
from the homotopy lemma. Now we are able to associate to any arbitrary smooth mapping be tween manifolds a homomorphism between the respective Morse homology groups.
Definition 4.21 Let IE COO(M, N) be a smooth mapping. Then the graph embedding (id, f) : M ~ M x N
represents a closed embedding, so that
(id,f).: H.(M)
-+
H.(M x N)
is well-defined, Resorting to the projection homomorphism constructed above, p. : H.(M x N) -+ H.(N), we now define
(4.67)
I.
= p.
0
(id, f). : H.(M)
-+
H.(N)
To sum up the functorial construction, we choose indirect way toward the gen eral homological functor via the factorization I = p 0 (id, f) into mappings which can be treated more easily. We now have to verify that this defini tion is compatible with the already existing functor for closed embeddings and projection maps and that the cofunctor property of a covariant functor
Thus we obtain smooth homotopies of closed embeddings for each fixed param eter t satisfying 4>~ ~
T.
for arbitrary inclusions
IRn EBIRn ,
and
4>~ ~
p.
closed embedding for all t E [0,1]
Let T : [0,1] -+ [0,1J be a smooth monotone mapping, locally constant at 0 and 1 satisfying T(O) = 0 und T(l) = 1. Then we define the homotopies
¢I(., t) =
(4.66)
,
and regarding the functorial behaviour of the homological morphisms with respect to closed embeddings together with relation (4.64), we may start from two closed embeddings cp, 'I/J : M ~ IRn without loss of generality. Due to the homotopy lemma and the uniform product structure it is sufficient to construct a homotopy cp ~ 'I/J. Since we are already allowed to exploit the functorial behaviour with respect to the composition pn,2n 0 i 2n ,n = idIRn, we are free to compose embeddings cp and 'I/J with the inclusion i 2n ,n : IR n ~ IR 2n
¢~t, 0 ~ t ~ 4 2 1 ¢2t-I' 2~t~1
By means of this method of factoring through a closed embedding cp : M ~ IRk we may derive the identity
Obviously, we have to verify that this homomorphism p. does not depend on the noncanonical choice of the embedding cpk, For this item we rely on the homotopy lemma.
ik+l,k
{
as a smooth homotopy due to the definition of required properties.
p. : H.(M x N) -+ H.(N)
177
We finally reparametrize this composition of homotopies obtaining
(cp'" x id N )
0
According to this lactoring we define
p.
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
(g
is satisfied.
0
f). = g.o I.
~
178
~:;._
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Auxiliary Proposition 4.22 Given a closed embedding f : M '--+ N, the directly induced homomorphism (CPI). from (4·55) is identical to f.:
f.
= (cp I).
: H.(M)
---->
(4.68)
(id, fl
•
_~ __ ,;~_=
.'"""ijt---_::~>n
_
n:::::.. . ,-'""iI!'1'!?""
179
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
Proof. At first, let us consider the commutative diagram N ((O,i~~ 1R7n x N ld
(id,g) 1R7n
X
N x P
X
=Z
[(id,91
(4.69)
l~
EEl
NxP
N
r (~i1) r~
M xN
.. o._~
2;; _
P2
f
@
rpM
_
H.(N) .
Proof. Let cpM : M '--+ 1R 7n be a closed embedding. We consequently obtain the commutative diagram M (
_=~"~2-
X
~d 7n 1R
X
p
N
• N .
The two closed embeddings
Due to the definition of i*, p*, etc., the following identity is true:
cPl=(cpxid)o(id,f)
can be related by means of a homotopy through closed embeddings
cPt = (t . cp, I) : M
---->
1R 7n
X
P2.
(4.70)
0
(id, g)* = P3.
0
(id
As to the projection map P~ : 1R7n x N
(id, g)).
X
0
i* .
N, we obtain the isomorphism
---->
i* = (p~*rl : H*(N) ~ H*(lR7n x N) and hence the identity
(4.71)
cPo=iof and
• P.
g* 0 P~* = P3*
(id x (id, g)). : H*(lR
0
m
x N)
H*(P)
---->
from (4.70) according to the definition g* = P2* 0 (id, g).. Setting P3 = m po (id X cpN x id) and choosing suitable closed embeddings cpM : M '--+ IR and cpN : N '--+ IR n we are led to the commutative diagram
M xN
N, t E [0,1] .
Then the homotopy lemma implies the identity cPo. = cPh from which the o proof follows immediately due to the equality p* 0 i* = id*.
(id,flJ
We are able to prove analogously
M
b?M x id
id x (id g)
'. 1R7n
• IRm x N (
EEl
p\
f
It;
N x P
lp3
EEl 9
• N
X
~
P
Thus, we deduce the identity
Auxiliary Proposition 4.23 The projection map p : M x N ----> N directly gives rise to the homomorphism (cpp)* from Definition 4.20, and this homo morphism is identical to p*:
p* = (cpp). : H*(M x N)
---->
H*(N)
The last step toward the covariant homological functor follows from
Auxiliary Proposition 4.24 Any two smooth mappings f E COO(M, N) and 9 E COO(N, P) satisfy the composition rule
(g 0 I). = g*
0
f* .
(4.72)
g.
0
f*
= P3* 0
(id x (id, g)).
(cpM x id).
0
0
(id, f).
from (4.71) together with this diagram. Altogether, we come to the factoriza tion
(4.73)
g.
0
f* = p*
0
cPo. ,
where cPo = (cpM, cpN 0 f, go f) describes a closed embedding. From the other direction, we consider the expression
(4.74)
(g
0
1)* = P*
0
cPt.
using the closed embedding
cPl = ('PM x id)
0
(id, go I) : M
'--+
1R7n
X
n
IR x P
~i!l~~~#?:i:~?fu:t~*~±i-efL~~l)! . ~if~~~.;::!ifbtl:l:};~sc~1i~'~~.i~~;,k~it{;~~If;,;~~:4tz~~~~%J.~4-'i%~~l$,~i:4f;@ii;§!,i14K4~et:'~~~=~~!t}~~L*G;~tJf;S;it4tij~!t~E;t!
180
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Relying on (4.65) we may once again set up a homotopy ¢o ~ ¢l through closed embeddings ¢t : M '----+ (lRm x lR n ) 2, so that the assertion follows from the homotopy lemma. 0 Proposition 4.25 The Morse homology groups
Hrorse(M) = ~Hk(M, f), kENo can be organized as a family of covariant functors from the category of smooth manifolds without boundary together with smooth maps as morphisms into the category of Abelian groups. Moreover, homotopical maps induce identical group homomorphisms, i.e. H k is a covariant functor for each kENo H k :
(
COO -m'ds. homotopy classes) ~" of Coo-maps
(M J£L N)
--+
AB
I->
(I.: Hk(M)
--+
Hk(N))
Proof. We have developed all the details except the explicit homotopy invari ance for arbitrary smooth mappings. But it is due to the definition of f. by means of the factorization that this follows immediately from the homotopy between the closed embeddings (id, f) ~ (id, g) induced by f ~ 9 and from the homotopy lemma. 0
4.2.3
Relative Morse Homology
In this section we finally analyse the feature which is still lacking with respect to an axiomatic homology theory. That is the concept of relative homology groups associated to admissible pairs (M, A) of manifolds. The underlying idea is to deduce such homology groups from a chain complex, which is now generated by critical points of a Morse function f on M outside of A. The appropriate algebraic object is a quotient complex analogous to the singular theory, C*(J, fA) = C*(J)/C.(JA) .
In this situation, the Morse complex C. (J A) of a Morse function on A has to admit a canonical identification with a subcomplex of C. (I). Altogether, we once again require a functorial concept which guarantees at each stage compatibility with the axiomatically required long exact homology sequence. As to this concept of a relative homology theory, we first have to compile some technical preparations.
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
181
Relative Morse Functions and the Relative Morse Complex Definition 4.26 We call a pair of smooth manifolds without boundary (M, A), where A is a submanifold of M, admissible, if either A is already a closed submanifold or the topological boundary 8A is a l-codimensional, orientable, closed submanifold of M. If (M,A) is admissible and of the latter type, we call a smooth function f E COO(M,lR) steep w.r.t. 8A, if -Vf represents an inner normal field with respect to 8A, that is: • Vf rh 8A
c
M and
• the negative gradient flow of f on 8A flows into A.
Since we have already treated sufficiently the aspect of suitable Morse functions for closed submanifolds, we shall henceforth consider the situation of admissible pairs of manifolds where A is an open submanifold whenever we do not give an explicit specification. Remarks (a) The just defined steepness of a function with respect to 8A is obviously a convex property, that is: If f,g E COO(M,lR) are steep w.r.t. 8A, the same is true for all (1- t)f + tg, t E [0,1]. (b) If f is steep w.r.t. 8A, it holds that Crit f n 8A = 0. Moreover, since M is a normal topological space, there is a neighbourhood U(A), which separates A from Crit f, U(A) n Crit f = 0. Definition 4.27 We now call f E COO(M,lR) a Morse function on (M,A), if f is a Morse function on M and additionally steep w.r.t. 8A. In the situation of a closed submanifold A C M, instead of steepness, f has to yield a subcomplex C.(JIA) of C.(I) in the sense of Corollary 4.17, i.e. there are no f-trajectories leaving A. In principle this definition establishes the coercivity property for the Morse function f on M relative to A. Since due to the above assumption A is an open submanifold of M, fl A cannot be a Morse function on A if 8A i= 0 holds. In this case the coercivity property is no longer satisfied, as not all sublevel-sets are compact. lO However, since we are able to isolate the critical lOReferring to Definition 2.40 concerning the compactness analysis we restate that we have to consider manifolds with complete Riemannian metrics. Since the submanifold A with non-void boundary cannot be complete with respect to the induced Riemannian metric, we have to alter this metric near the boundary. Similar to the following argument, this can be accomplished without changing the Morse-homological information, i.e. Crit. (J A) and the connecting isolated trajectories.
182
CHAPTER 4.. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
points of f from the boundary 8A, it is possible to transform fl A on a suitable neighbourhood of 8A to a Morse function fA such that the respective Morse complex, that is, the critical points and the associated trajectory spaces within A, remains unchanged. Given the closed submanifold 8A bourhood
~,
c
M we choose a tubular neigh
"\/WCM
N~ = {v x E 1/ Illvxll < E(X) for all x E 8A},
E
E Coo (8A, (0,1))
=
of 8A for
EO =
Lemma 4.28 Given a Morse function f on (M,A), there is an (0,1)), E :::;; EO and a Morse function fA on A, such that
E
E
Coo (8A,
CritfAnN,=0
Proof. Due to the assumption f is steep w.r.t. 8A and {N,},:(,o represents a neighbourhood basis of 8A. Hence, referring to remark (b) above we may start from an EO E Coo (8A, (0,1)) such that Crit f n N, = 0 for all E :::;; EO. Setting Nt = N, n A, we define the smooth function g~:
----t
1 V x f-t
1
e IlvxIlx - ,(x)-llvxIIx =
g~
0
f, : A ----t JR, f (x) - { f(x) + g,(x), xENt f(x),
f ""AI'
~f
M\A l
=
1'1 M\A
{ [f]A I f a Morse function on (M, A)} with the set of smooth functions f E COO(M\A,JR),n which - in the situation of an open submanifold A - are steep w.r.t. 8A, coercive on M\A and whose critical points within M\A are regular. Proof. The proof of this lemma is straightforward if one uses the extension results from the first section of this chapter. 0 Example In the final chapter we shall briefly touch on the question of the representation of characteristic classes of vector bundles within the framework of this Morse homology theory. Let 7r : E ----t M be a smooth, n-dimensional vector bundle. Then, as we already know, any Morse function f on M together with the quadratic form qn with respect to a Riemannian metric on E induces the Morse function f EB qn on E together with the canonical identification Crit.f ~ Crit.(J EB qn) .
JR,
on
,-
Definition 4.29 Let (M, A) be an admissible pair of manifolds. Then we call two Morse functions f and I' on (M, A) equivalent relative to A, if they are identical on M\A,
Lemma 4.30 We can identify the set of relative Morse functions
and a Riemmanian metric on the normal bundle 1/. Then starting from
and
183
The equivalence class [f]A is called a relative Morse function on (M, A). Note that this definition remains reasonable in the case when A is a closed subman ifold of M.
8A
fAIA\N,=fIA\N,
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
x E A\N,
is well-defined. Due to the construction of g" f, is a smooth and coercive func tion on A, which is identical to f if restricted to A \N,. Since -yo f represents an inner normal field of 8A, we may choose E small enough, such that yo f, does not vanish within Nt, too. Thus, fA = f, is a suitable Morse function on A according to the assertion. 0
In contrast let us now consider the negative quadratic form -qn' It yields a fibrewise relative Morse function -qn,x on (Ex, Ex \U(Ox)) for each suitably small, connected and closed neighbourhood of zero U(Ox) such that this pair is admissible. By analogy with above, we obtain a relative Morse function for the admissible pair (E,E\U(M)), where U(M) C E is a suitably regular but arbitrarily small closed neighbourhood of the zero section. Moreover, we once again obtain a canonical identification of critical sets, but this time with a shifting in the grading,
Crit.f ~ Crit.+n(J EB (-qn)) We guess that this is the inital step toward the Thorn isomorphism. lli.e. smooth on a neighbourhood of M\A within M
-~_~_~_~ --~~__
- - - - - -
---~-._~__
_________________..
184
""
__ .-~~------.___=__-
~________=__~
~
Definition 4.31 Due to Lemma 4.28, we can find such a pair of Morse func tions (f, fA) on (M, A) for each relative Morse function [flA, that the Morse complex C*(fA) represents a subcomplex of C*(f). This means that we obtain a short exact sequence of chain complexes:
---S C*(f) ~ C*(f)/C*(fA)
-----+
--_
~
__ ..
__
~_____,_____~--.-__o_=__--
- ~- ~ - _ . ' : " . . . . " . . . . . . . , . - - - : - - - - ~ -~---~--_ -
.~--:---~-.:_-~---o----=--=-~.-_--------=--~-_._-
~_''''''''''''''~".,..,.~~__''''''_~_"'~.-""""~~~
185
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
the possibility of change between suitably chosen Morse functions step by step allows us to build up a functorial concept. Now, the analogous limit process of the identification of the special homology groups depending on the functions becomes a bit more involved. Namely, we additionally require compatibility with the long exact homology sequence specified above.
0
Definition 4.33 Let [f]A and [g]A be relative Morse functions on (M,A).
Consequently, we can define the quotient complex Ck([f]A)
._~
.•
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
0-----+ C*(fA)
~
... " " " " ~ ~ ~ ......."""~"""""''"''''''''''"'.~~.''''~'''' • ......",.,~~''!,•••,'''~~''''~''''.._"''''''''_'_'''.~u~_~__""~"""' ~.'_"""..,.."'.,."._"'~""__~"._~"'~"".=~=''=='''..!~''''''"_
We call a homotopy [ht]A satisfying
= Ck(f, fA) = Ck(f)/Ck(fA) , kENo
ht
where Ck(f,fA) is generated by the critical points Critkf\CritkfA lying within M\A. Since these critical points are already uniquely determined by the rela tive Morse function [f]A, the relative Morse complex C* ([flA) is well-defined, i.e. independent of the concrete choice of the pair (f, fA) representing the fixed relative Morse function. We notice that due to the assumption of steep ness w.r.t. 8A, the 8-operator on C*(f, fA) is already uniquely determined by f M\A' It is now this relative chain complex from which we gain the relative
:
M\A ---; JR., t E [0,1]' h,
f l M\A
~ gl M\A
a relative Morse homotopy w.r.t. A, if there are representatives f, 9 and h t on M such that h t describes a regular Morse homotopy f ~ 9 and h t is steep w.r.t. 8A for all t E JR..
l
Lemma 4.34 Every two relative Morse functions [f]A and [g]A admit a rel
homology groups associated to [f]A, Hk(f,fA)
= Hk([f]A)
ative Morse homotopy [ht]A. = Hk(C*(f,fA)), kENo,
Proof. Considering the regularity condition for Morse homotopies from Defini tion 2.29, we begin construction with the trivial homotopy
together with a long exact homology sequence ••• -----+
Hk(fA)
~
Hk(f)
~
Hk(f,fA)
~ Hk-l(fA)
-----+ •.•
hr = (3(t)·
f + (1 - (3(t)) . 9
.
We finish this introduction of a relative Morse complex with the following lemma:
Here, (3: JR. ---; [0, 1] denotes a smooth function satisfying
Lemma 4.32 There is a relative Morse function [f]A for each admissible pair
(3( t)
of manifolds (M, A). Proof. In the situation of a closed submanifold A c M we may refer im mediately to the extension result in Proposition 4.16. This is due to classical Morse theory [MI], which states that we can find a Morse function on any given smooth manifold. Let us now regard the case where A is an open submanifold. We use the condition that the normal bundle of 8A within M is orientable, so that we may construct a smooth function on the tubular neighbourhood of 8A, which is coercive and steep with respect to 8A. Again due to the extension lemmata we can extend this function to a Morse function on (M, A). 0
The Relative Homology Functor The next step is to deduce independence from the concrete relative Morse functions as in the situation of the absolute Morse homology groups. Actually,
={
-1 , 0:I tt;::~ 1.
Since steepness is a convex property as we already remarked above, the require ment that hr be steep w.r.t. 8A for all t E JR. is satisfied. Thus, it particularly holds that Crit hr n U(8A) = 0 for all t E JR. for an appropriate neighbourhood of 8A. Then, given a suitably small N, C U from the neighbourhood basis specified above, we define the following function:
h:
(JR.
h(t, x)
X
N,)
=
U (JR.\(-I, 1) x
f(x), g(x), { hr(x),
M) ---; JR.
t ~ -1
t;::
1 x E N,
This can finally be extended yielding a regular Morse homotopy such that the steepness condition is in fact fulfilled. 0
._.
,"-
"..
186
--
._~
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
Lemma 4.35 Each representative f ~ 9 of a relative Morse homotopy [htlA admits Morse functions fA, gA and a Morse homotopy hA,t on A such that the identity
hA,tl A\N< holds for some
t E
= htl A\N<
GOO (8A, (0,1)).
Proof. The proof of this lemma may be carried out by the same means as in Lemmata 4.28 and 4.34. 0 Thus, the induced homotopy morphisms
4>h t : G.(f) ----; G.(g) and 4>hA,t: G*(fA) ----; G.(gA)
- -
-
.•
_.
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
for these isomorphisms. This has to lead back once more to the deduction from the 'x-homotopies and the associated chain homotopy operators. Resorting to the methods of extension in the previous lemmata, we can show that, given any two relative Morse homotopies [h~i3]A and [hr i3 ]A, there are pairs of representatives (h o, ho,A) and (hI, hI,A) as well as a pair of A-homotopies (H~i3, H~i3) between these pairs of Morse homotopies, such that the condition of compatibility
o-
G.(fA)
~
14>hA,t
(4,76)
0 - G.(gA)
G*(f)
14>h t
EB
~
G.(g)
--L
G. ((f]A)
-
0
14>[h t1A
EB
--L
G.((g]A)
(4.77) ... -
Hk(fA) -
14>ZA EB Hk(9A) -
Hk(f) -
14>Z
-
0
Hk(g) -
Hk(f,fA) -Hk-I(fA)
EB
I4>~hlA
EB
(4.79)
I'l1~a. G.+l (f~)
EB
G.(fa.)
1'l1 i3a.
~ G.+l (fi3)
is satisfied by the associated chain homotopy operators 'l1 i3 a. and 'l1~a..
Due to the steepness condition of ht, 4>[h t]A is well-defined, independently of the actual extension (h t , hA,t). This morphism of short exact sequences of chain complexes gives rise to a homotopy morphism between the associated long exact homology sequences -
~
G.(f'AJ
4>h t IG.(fA) = 4>hA,t
Hence, we obtain a morphism between the respective short exact sequences of chain complexes,
187
and we conclude from the algebraic five lemma that the 4>~ht]A describe iso morphisms, too. On the other hand, we cannot necessarily conclude the crucial functorial condition [h"'~JA [h~"JA _ [h"'''IA 4>* 0 4>. - 4>. (4.78) [h""JA . 4>* = Id H .(J,fA)
satisfy the consistency condition (4.75)
--
. --, .'-
~
14>ZA
Hk(g, gA) - Hk - 1 (9A)- ...
However, one problem remains. On the one hand, 4>~A,t and 4>Zt fit in with the functorial concept, by means of which we establish the identification pro cess. We consequently obtain independency from the concrete Morse functions,
Definition 4.36 As a consequence, relation (4.79) induces a chain homotopy operator also for the relative Morse complexes
'l1~e~: G.(r,f'j') ----; G.+l(fi3,f~) 'lJ.Jith the same properties as in the absolute case. Hence, the isomorphism 4>~hlA of the homology groups is independent of the actual relative Morse homotopy, and relation (4.78) is true. Thus, the family {H.(f,fA)I(f]A rel. Morsefct.} meets the identification requirement by means of the isomorphisms 4>~h~"lA. Moreover, this process is compatible with the respective long exact sequence, Hk(M, A)
-
= lim Hd(f]A) , kENo,
so that we obtain the long exact sequence of Morse homology groups ... ----; Hk(A) ~ Hk(M)
Hk(M, A) ~ Hk-l (A) ----; ...
188
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
The only feature which still has to be verified is the identity of the homomor phism (i.)* induced by the pairs (f,fA) and the homomorphism i*, which was directly deduced above by means of the factorization techniques. This is not obvious, as we generally have to start from open submanifolds A c M with regard to the relative Morse homology.
long exact sequences: ephA
H*(qk EfJ fA) ((id x i).L
(4.82) Lemma 4.37 Both homomorphisms (i.)* and i* deduced from the inclusion
A
'---+
(4.80)
i*
= p* 0 (rp x id M )* 0 (idA x i)* : H*(A)
-+
~
qk EfJ f, gA
hA,t
~
qk EfJ fA
The first step of the proof now consists of the following commutative diagram
H*(fA) (4.81)
({O} x idA;! EfJ
~ x idAL
• *
ill
*
H*(g) .
According to the definition, the homomorphisms (rp x i)* from the closed em bedding and ((id x i). L 0 (rp X idA)* are identical. Therefore, the identification process by means of the epZ together with the combination of (4.81) and (4.82) imply the identity
= ((id x i).L 0 ({O} x idAL : H*(A)
-+
k H*(IR x M)
Since it holds that (i.)*
= p* 0 ((id x i).L 0 ({O} x iOAL : H*(A)
-+
H*(M)
due to the definition, the assertion follows immediately from the composition D of (4.83) with the projection map p : IRk x M -+ M. In order to complete the deduction, we still have to go through the steps where we develop the relative homological functor by analogy with the absolute case. Moreover, each step must be taken in accordance with the long exact homology sequence. This means that we first have to consider closed embeddings
rp : (M, A) '---+ (N, B)
rp : M '---+ N closed and rp(A) c B ,
and then projection maps p: (M x N, M x B) through the factorizations
-+
(N, B). Finally, we must go
(M,A)
ephA
H*(qk EfJ fA)
1((id x i)·L
EfJ
H*(M) ,
where rp represents a closed embedding rp : A '---+ IRk. Let (f, fA) be a representing pair belonging to a relative Morse function on (M, A) and let gA = (rp X idA)*fA be a Morse function on IRk x A induced by the closed embedding rp x idA. We may construct a Morse function 9 on IRk x M in an appropriate way, which is steep w.r.t. IRk x 8A and yields a relative Morse func tion together with gA on (IRk x M, IRk X A) in the sense of Lemma 4.28. Since A is embedded into IRk as a closed submanifold, we can likewise construct a relative Morse homotopy (htl A represented by a pair ht
1
eph
(4.83) (rp x i)*
(h t , hA,t) : 9
H*(gA)
• *
H*(qk EfJ f)
M are identical.
Proof In the case of a closed submanifold, the proof was carried out above in the auxiliary Proposition 4.22. Hence, let A be given as an open submanifold. Recalling the definition, we obtain
189
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
H*(gA) . ((id,f),(i,fy
This follows from the homotopy lemma because {OJ x idA and rp x idA are homotopical closed embeddings of A into IRk x A. Fortunately, it does not matter that the associated homotopy of embeddings does not directly induce the previously fixed Morse homotopy hA, because the homomorphism ep~A on the level of the homology groups is independent of the concrete homotopy. The next diagram is an immediate consequence from the morphism (4.77) of the
EfJ
(M x N, M x B) P
~,fIA) • (N, B) .
The crucial point is the possibility of changing the relative Morse function via an appropriate homotopy, so that the associated isomorphism ep~h]A becomes
...
_....
,....
190
"-...,
",
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
the identity after the identification process. However, by analogy with Lemma 4.37, we have to verify again that homomorphism (j.). is identical to homo morphism j., which is induced by the inclusion of pairs j : (M,0) '---+ (M, A). Actually, all proofs within this framework for relative Morse func tions can be carried out analogously by means of the extension and homotopy techniques. Summing up, we obtain
Proposition 4.38 The relative homology groups (Hk(M, A)) kENo for admis sible pairs of manifolds and the long exact homology sequence fit in with the concept of a family of oovariant functors Hk
:
admissible pa~rs of mfd~.,) ( smooth mappzngs of pazrs ((M,A)
-L (N,B))
--t
191
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
The Dimension Axiom The precise dimension axiom in the framework of Morse homology is a trivial fact: Each Morse function on a space consisting of one point {x} has exactly one critical point, and this point has index 0. Hence we obtain the identity H.({x}) ~ (Z,O, ... ) .
The argument for a finite-dimensional vector space, for instance JRn, is similar. Let qn be the quadratic form with respect to a scalar product. Then the only critical point is a minimum and it generates the homology
H.(JR n )
AB kEN
~
(Z,O, ... ) .
,0 1--+
(I.:
Hk(M,A)
--t
We shall now verify a relation which in fact is not trivial, but which is charac teristic for any standard homology theory on manifolds.
Hk(N, B))
By analogy with the absolute case and relying on the methods of relative Morse homology, we are able to prove the homotopy invariance: Homotopical mappings of pairs f ~ g : (M, A) --t (N, B) induce the same morphism f. = g. for the long exact homology sequences.
Proposition 4.40 Any smooth and connected manifold M satisfies the rela tion Hr-°rse(M) ~ Z . The main part of the proof, in which the property of connectedness plays a crucial role, is based upon the following
With regard to the intended axiomatic homology theory, we finally have to verify the excision axiom and the dimension axiom.
The Excision Axiom
Lemma 4.41 Let y, y' E Critof be local minima and let, E CO([-I, 1], M) be a connecting path, ,(-1) = y, ,(1) = y'. Then there is a division homo topical to , consisting of isolated trajectories Ui
Proposition 4.39 Let (M, A) be an admissible pair of manifolds and let B be o
a closed subset B CA such that (M\B, A \B) again represents an admissible pair. Then the inclusion i: (M\B,A\B) '---+ (M,A) induces an isomorphism
"" H.(M,A) . i. : H.(M\B,A\B) -=-.
= UXi,Yi
E
M~i'Yi' (Xi, Yi) E Critlf x Critof
This means that there are isolated trajectories Uo,···, Uk satisfying uo(-OO)
= y,
Ui(+OO)
= Ui+I(-OO), i = O, ... ,k -1
and Uk(+OO)
= Y'
,
such that the composition of suitably reparametrized curves Ui is homotopical
Proof. Obviously, it is sufficient to treat the case of an open submanifold A. According to the concept of relative Morse homology, we can choose a concrete, appropriate Morse function in order to compute the inclusion ho momorphism and the actual homology groups. Considering a Morse function f E CM'orse(M\A, JR) such that the underlying relative Morse complexes of the respective homology groups are generated by the same set of critical points of f within M\A, we deduce the assertion immediately from the canonical isomorphism C.(fM,fA) ~C.(fM\B,fA\B) .
o
to "
(",(UO'UI) ..... Uk) ~, .
Proof. Since f is coercive, i.e. Ma is compact for all a E JR, the number
v(r) =
#{ X
I
E Critlf f(x) ~ max f [-1,1]
0,}
is well-defined and finite. The proof of this lemma is carried out by induction on v(r). Within the following steps of the proof we shall make use on the one hand of homotopies, which may be specified concretely in local coordinates, and
CHAPTER 4. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
192
193
4.2. THE ElLENBERG-STEENROD AXIOMS
on the other hand of the global, negative gradient semi-flow on the compact subset M a W: IR x M a --+ M a with a > max f °"( .
that the order of the parts U~~i can be chosen in such a way that the negative gradient flow WT pushes the curves "(1 = "(yx' U XY1 and "(2 = U;~2 . "(xY' below the level f (x), that is,
The beginning of the induction follows immediately from the application of a well-known lemma from classical variational calculus (see [Cou]) , from the so-called mountain-pass lemma:
(4.86)
[-1,1]
Given two differ~nt local minima y and y' of a coercive, smooth function f, there is a further critical point xi- y, y' satisfying the minimax-property
max f(wTo
[-I,IJ
"(12)
'
< f(x) for some
T
>0
After finitely many division steps of this type for each to, the parts "(i, which still do not necessarily consist of isolated trajectories, satisfy the condition
V("(i) < v("() , upon which we have founded the induction process.
f(x) = inf max f(z),
.
o
pEP zEp
P = {p
c
M I y, y' E p, P compact and connected}
In our situation we can additionally compute the Morse index, that is x E CritI/. Thus, the beginning of the induction by v("() = 0 implies the identity of the endpoints y = y'. Regarding the induction conclusion, we may assume without loss of generality that the function f °"( : [-1, 1] --+ IR takes its maximum in exactly one 'moment' to E [-1, 1] and that
UXi,Yi
Given critical point x = "((to) E CritI/, we split "( into parts "( = "(yx·"(xyi. The Morse index Jl(x) = 1 implies that there are exactly two isolated trajectories u xY1 , U XY2 of the type specified in the assertion, which leave x. Regarding the homotopy class, ~
-1 -1 "(yx· U XY1 . U XY1 . U XY2 . U XY2 . "(xY'
M{i,Yi'
(Xi,yJ E CritI/ x Critof
{y} = ±{y'}
Otherwise we consider a homotopy of "( by means of the flow WT, so that max f °"( decreases strictly until the maximal point is close enough to a critical point such that we are able to use the local coordinates provided by the well known classical Morse lemma (see [M1]). If the respective critical point should have a Morse index larger than 1, we find a homotopy in these coordinates, which 'pushes' "( past this critical point, so that the new curve "( no longer intersect the stable manifold of this critical point. Note that this is due to the codimension of this stable manifold which is exactly the Morse index. This process can be iterated finitely many times, until condition (4.84) is fulfilled at last. If there are more than one to E [-1,1] with f("((to)) = maxf ° "(, we will go through the following process sufficiently often.
"(
E
Proof of proposition 4.40. This corollary yields the fact, that each two local minima of a fixed Morse function y and y' generate the same cyclic subgroup of H o,
"((to) E CritI/
(4.84)
(4.85)
Corollary 4.42 Given any two local minima y and y' for the Morse function f from the same connected component of M, there is a connecting curve consisting of isolated trajectories of the type
,
because U XY1 · •.. · U;;2 ~ const = x is contractible. Analysing the situation at x by means of the local coordinates provided by the Morse lemma, we observe
It thus follows that (4.87)
Ho(M)
S='
Zp or Z .
This is concluded completely from the condition of connectedness on M. On the other hand, we have already concluded the fact that Ho(M) is infinitely cyclic from special Morse functions in Proposition 4.12. This led back to the problem of orientation. Resorting to the functorial concept, we are now able to prove this in general as a consequence of the dimension axiom. Let c : M --+ {x} be a constant mapping. We consequently obtain a non-vanishing group homomorphism
c*: Ho(M)
--+
Ho({x})
S='
Z .
Hence, c* i- 0 together with result (4.87) from connectedness yields the asser tion Ho(M) S=' Z. 0
4.2.4
Summary
Summarizing the above results, we have analysed all elements of a homology theory which satisfies the axioms set up by Eilenberg and Steenrod. We have
194
CHAPTER 4.. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
obtained a family (Hk)kEN o of covariant functors from the category of admis sible pairs of smooth manifolds (M, A) together with the smooth mappings of pairs <.p: (M, A) ---> (N, B), <.p(A) c B as morphisms into the category of Abelian groups, so that the following axioms are satisfied: 1. The existence of a natural, long exact homology sequence, 2. the homotopy invariance,
195
4.3. THE UNIQUENESS RESULT
For one who is not familiar with this axiomatic approach set up by Eilenberg and Steenrod it might be surprising that no natural homomorphism defined explicitly in terms of the two homology theories in question is needed. This arises from a constructive existence result for just such a natural homomor phism which automatically implies uniqueness. The strategy for proving the theorem is to exploit this uniqueness property of the category of CW-spaces. But in order to make use of this feature we at least must extend the Morse ho mology deduced for admissible pairs of manifolds to a CW-subcategory which gives rise to the same uniqueness result. Therefore, we will restrict ourselves to the following pairs of CW-complexes (X, Y).
3. the invariance under excision and
Definition 4.43 Let us denote by CW reg the subcategory of GW-pairs which are embedded smoothly into finite-dimensional manifolds M, i. e. the charac teristic maps associated to the cells are relative difjeomorphisms. Additionally, these GW-pairs must have open neighbourhoods (U, R) in M which are admis sible and of which they are strong deformation retracts.
4. the normalization of the point space:
Hk({x})
4.3
~{
Z, 0,
k=O sonst .
The Uniqueness Result
Remarks
In this section we will investigate the isomorphism result, which relates the Morse homology constructed in this chapter to any other axiomatic homology theory such as, for instance, singular theory. This equivalence between homol ogy theories will be accomplished by means of the homology axioms verified above. Following Eilenberg and Steenrod [E-S] we will draw this final conclusion from the axiomatic approach in terms of a uniqueness result, which expresses the existence of a natural isomorphism to any other axiomatic homology theory provided that both theories in question be considered for appropriate categories of topological spaces. This so-called uniqueness category12 in the case treated within this work will be the category of pairs of finite CW-complexes. We state the main conclusion as follows:
Theorem 9 Let it be any axiomatic homology theory defined on the category of finite GW-pairs. Then given a fixed isomorphism h o : H~orse ({pt}) for a fixed point manifold M of homology theories .T..
':l'*
where H;:orse and finite GW-pairs.
=
HMorse ~
*
-=-dlo({Pt})
with
= ho
,
H. are restricted to admissible pairs of manifolds which are
12The reader is referred to [E-S).
• If we focus on manifolds M endowed with such a smooth GW-structure, M = {Xdk=O, ... ,n, we see that the pairs of skeletons (Xk,X1) have this regularity property because of the well-known theorem that subcomplexes of GW-complexes are strong neighbourhood deformation retracts. Finally, this class of objects in CW reg will suffice for providing the proof of the main theorem, and this subcategory of sufficiently regular CW-pairs lends itself to the following extension of the Morse homology as an axiomatic homology functor.
Definition 4.44 Given a pair (X, Y) eM from the category CW reg we define llex,y) to be the family of neighbourhoods (U, R) of (X, A), of which (X, A) is a
{pt}, there exists a unique, natural equivalence
H*
• Without loss of generality we may assume that any two of such neigh bourhood pairs are homotopically equivalent by smooth homotopies.
deformation retract in the above sense and which are itself admissible pairs of manifolds. Observing that llex,Y) is a directed, quasi-ordered set by inclusions, which by assumption are homotopy equivalences, we define
iI.(x, Y) = ~ {H~orse(u, R) I (U, R)
E UeX,Y) }
as the inverse limit with respect to the inclusion isomorphisms
:
i.i~:~? H.(U, R) ~ H.(V, S), (U, R) c (V, S) .
196
CHAPTER 4. ,MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
RemarkThere is some minor technical work left to show that the property of these neighbourhood pairs to be admissible does not disturb the directedness of it
following argument give rise to proper triads. Let us recall this essential and constructive tool from homology theory. Given a proper triad (X; Xl, X 2 ), i.e. the inclusions
By a restriction to neighbourhoods which are homotopically equivalent to (X, Y) by inclusion, we are able to deduce the natural isomorphisms
IiU,R) : fl. (X, Y)
--=-. H. (U, R),
for pairs (M, A) which are equally admissible and regular CW-complexes due to the above definition. It is straightforward from the properties of the inverse system defined above to derive a functor fl. for the pairs of the category CW reg' Actually, by noting that the restriction to the homotopically equivalent neighbourhoods yields the exactness of the long exact homology sequence i-
j-
8
'" ----. Hk+I(X, Y) ----. Hk(Y) ----. Hk(X) ----. Hk(X, Y) ----. ... , one is able to verify easily the axioms for this extended homology theory fl•. In the future, we will drop the indices - and Morse from the notation and use H. with a sense depending on the context. We now move toward the construction of the natural homomorphism based upon the category CW reg. Proposition 4.45 Let H. and on CW reg and let
H~
~
i2
~
:
(Xl U X 2 , X 2 ) (Xl U X 2 , Xd
and
w
... ----. Hq(A) ----. Hq(X I ) EEl Hq(X 2 )
----.
6
Hq(X) ----. Hq-I(A) ----. ...
is exact. Now, by naturality with respect to the homology axioms, it is straight forward to construct isomorphisms
fl.(M, A) ~ H~orse(M, A)
8-
n X2) (X 2 , Xl n X 2 )
i l : (Xl, Xl
inducing isomorphisms of the homology groups in all dimensions, together with relations X = Xl UX2 , A = Xl nx2 , the associated Mayer-Vietoris sequence l3
(U, R) E U(X,y)
immediately. This feature guarantees that exactness of sequences is preserved under this special inverse limit process. In general, this is not true and usually has to be provided in terms of a Mittag-Leffier condition. Obviously, by tubular neighbourhood constructions, we have a natural isomorphism
j-
197
4.3. THE UNIQUENESS RESULT
be two axiomatic homology theories defined
ho : Ho({pt}) ~ H~({pt}) be an isomorphism for a fixed point manifold {pt}. Then there is a unique extension of h o to a natural isomorphism h. : H. --=-. H~. Proof. The main step of the proof relies on the construction of CW-homology. As this is standard knowledge from algebraic topology the reader is referred to any fundamental book on this topic. At first, we will deduce unique isomorphisms h. for n-cells en and n-spheres sn from the given homomorphism h o ' This will be done by means of the homology axioms and particularly by induction based on the Mayer Vietoris sequence, for which exactness holds because all pairs appearing in the
h. : H. (X)
--=-. H; (X)
for all spaces X which are finite disjoint unions of open or closed n-cells. Let X be a single point space X = {x} and let cp: {pt} {x} be the unique diffeomorphism. This gives rise to
-=:..
ho({x}) =cp.ohoocp;l: Ho({x}) --=-'H~({x}) in a unique and natural way. From the Mayer-Vietoris sequence we deduce h. for all finite disjoint unions of points and the result for n-cells follows from the homotopy axiom. The next step is to construct the extension of these h. on arbi trary cells to arbitrary n-spheres. This can be done inductively by means of the Mayer-Vietoris sequence with respect to the standard decomposition of the n-sphere into the two closed hemispheres D+ and D- with the equator sn-l = D+n D- as intersection. Again by naturality and induction we find H~(X), where X is allowed to be an unique isomorphisms h.: H.(X) arbitrary n-cell or n-sphere from CW reg . Further, making use ofthe axiomatic long exact homology sequence we infer the extension of h. to all pairs of the diffeomorphism type of (D n , sn-l) denoting the closed n-disk with its bound ary sphere. Finally, the Mayer-Vietoris sequence again implies the extension to one-point unions of n-spheres V7=1 SF', which are objects in CW reg, also.
--=-.
We now have developed the natural homomorphism h. for a family of cellular spaces already large enough to carry out the crucial step toward CW-homology. We now denote by X a cellular complex from CW reg . As is well-known from standard algebraic topology, the groups
Cq(X) = Hq(Xq,Xq-I), q ~ 0 13For the definition of
q"
and t. and more details, see [E-S].
CHAPTER 4.. MORSE HOMOLOGY THEORY
198
are free Abelian of finite rank, where (xq)q~O denotes the family of q-skeletons of X for q ~ O. If Fe: (Dq,Sq-l) -> (Xq,x q- 1 ) describes the characteristic map associated to the q-cell e eX, we can take the family
{F:({Dq}s.-l)
E
Hq(Xq,X q- 1 )
Ie
q-cell in X}
as a basis for Cq(X). By means of this basis, the homomorphisms F; and the above investigations about the extension of h o to finite unions of pairs (Dq, Sq-l) and one-point unions of spheres, we immediately deduce natural isomorphisms
h q : Hq(Xq,Xq-l) ~ H~(Xq,Xq-l), q ~ 0 . Thus we have already established a natural equivalence between the CW homology theories (4.88)
Chapter 5 I~
h q : Hq(C(X)) ~ Hq(C'(X)), q ~ 0
In this last chapter we present a brief outline of further elements of algebraic topology within the framework of Morse homology. In this context we empha size the Poincare duality arising rather immediately and the feature of product operations appearing naturally in the Morse theoretic approach. At first, we briefly introduce the dual concept of Morse homology.
associated to H* and H~. Moreover, we see from the above constructions that this equivalence is unique with respect to (h o , {pt}). Now, using the canonical and natural isomorphisms associated to CW-homology
T:
Hq(C(X)) ~ Hq(X), q ~ 0 and
T':
Hq(C'(X)) ~ H~(X), q ~ 0 ,
I
5.1
we can accomplish the proof by deriving the natural isomorphism h* between H* and H~ on CW reg as the composition (4.89)
h* = T'
0
Extensions
Morse Cohomology
By strict analogy to other known homology theories which are deduced from chain complexes, we obtain a cohomological version of Morse homology by means of a dualization concept.
h~w 0 T- 1
Here, h~w means the cellular equivalence given in (4.88). The naturality of h* in general follows from the naturality with respect to cellular maps and cellular approximation together with homotopy invariance. Thus we have proven that CW reg represents a uniqueness category in the sense of Eilenberg and Steenrod.
Definition 5.1 Given a chain complex (C k (f),8 k)kENo as considered in the k context of Morse homology, we define a cochain complex (C (f), Ok) kENo as follows:
o Let us now consider the above extension of Morse homology to an axiomatic homology theory on CW reg together with the uniqueness property of this category. Since this uniqueness category contains the admissible pairs of manifolds equipped with a finite CW-structure, we obtain the proof of Theorem 9. Of course, it should be possible to derive this uniqueness of Morse homology for a far larger class of spaces. But within the intended frame of this work we shall be content with this result.
Ck(f) = Hom(Ck(f),Z), ( Okak, Xk+l ) = ( a k , 8 k+1Xk+l ) for all a k E Ck(f), Xk+l E Critk+lf, kENo
I
I.
This definition is unique, as Critk+l f comprises exactly the generators of
Ck+l(f)· Remark Discussing this dualization process we must be aware of the fact that
Ck (f) need not necessarily be finitely generated any more, as we assumed
200
canonical distinction between negative and positive gradient flow. If we addi tionally assume the orientability of M, both requirements for Poincare duality are complete. On the other side, the problem of the noncanonical construction method of a coherent orientation vanishes, with respect to the condition of admissible pairs of trivializations in Definition 3.7. Under these circumstances, Morse homology cannot be set apart from Morse cohomology with regard to the construction.
for Ck(J). Nevertheless, if the set Critkf is finite, we are supplied with the canonical isomorphism
Cdf)
~
---->
Ck(J)
(5.1) Xk
~
(( Xk, . ) : Yk
~ { ~:
Yk = Xk otherwise
).
Moreover, we compute the coboundary operator
6kXk
=
:L (ay, Xk)y
We are provided with a natural isomorphism in the case of an n dimensional, closed and orientable manifold M
,
PD: Hk(M) ~ Hn-k(M), k = 0, ... , n
~(y)=k+l '~~ .
if in addition Critk+d is finite. In principle, we resort to the same isolated trajectories together with their characteristic signs determined by a coherent orientation as in the defi nition of the boundary operator. As indicated by the increasing Morse index, this amounts to replacing negative gradient flow by positive gradient flow. But two problematic items still remain. First, - f need not be coercive. We recall that it was coercivity by which we established the compactness result for the trajectory spaces. In fact, if the underlying manifold is not compact, chang ing from f to - f necessarily abolishes coercivity. The other problem arises in the case of non-orientable manifolds as remarked in Section 4.1.4. Actually, both flaws within our idea of symmetry concern exactly the requirements of the Poincare duality. This will be analysed further in the following section. Summing up the present discussion we observe that the dualization concept known as the Hom-functor allows us to construct an axiomatic Morse cohomology. Actually, the application of this functor together with the known universal coefficient theorem gives rise to a transfer of the identification process (yielding cohomology groups independent of concrete Morse functions) as well as of all functorial and axiomatic properties to the contravariant functor H·. The reader not familiar with this dualization process may refer to the analogous treatment of singular or simplicial cohomology.
5.2
Poincare Duality
As we noted above this Morse cohomology theory has the disadvantage that the cohomology classes cannot necessarily be represented by the critical points of a Morse function. This is merely possible when the cochain complexes are finitely generated. We observed that the compactness assumption for the manifold M within classical Poincare duality provides a sufficient condition for this finite ness of the set of generators. Then, coercivity is trivial. On compact manifolds we are naturally provided with a symmetry which is expressed by the lack of a
201
5.2. POINCARE DUALITY
CHAPTER 5. EXTENSIONS
as follows: Let f be any Morse function on M. Then, function and we can easily find a regular Morse homotopy
f
f
is also a Morse
h
~-f
This induces the canonical isomorphism
(5.2)
Hk(J) ~Hk(-f), k=O, ... ,n
Noting now that we may use finitely many critical points from Critk! as generators of Ck (J) = Hom (Ck (J), Z), we are led to the identity
(5.3)
Critk( - f)
----+
x
~
Critn-kf, x.
This identity gives rise to the likewise canonical isomorphism
r: Cd-f)
~ Cn-k(J) ,
a-
and 6-operator, equally. This means that it which is compatible with the is well-defined on the level of homology and cohomology. Thus we canonically obtain the isomorphisms
Hk(J)~
r. :
Hk(-f) ~
Hd-f) and Hn-k(J) ,
and hence by composition
(5.4)
PD
=r.
0
Hk(J) ~ Hn-k(J), k
= 0, ... , n
.
~
: :....,,-w.;..~-
----..-- ...._ . . .
"::i~ --
u_
......
mo.!: --- --
:-"--No
_$
-==:;.
~......
CHAPTER 5. EXTENSIONS
202
Altogether we naturally obtain the Poincare duality for closed and orientable manifolds. The same is true for the case of Z2 coefficients where non-orient able closed manifolds are admitted. Then, the problem of a coherent orientation becomes insignificant.
5.3
Products
Here we recall the naturally induced construction of the Morse function fEEl 9 on the product manifold M x N, provided that we are given the manifolds with Morse functions (M, f) and (N,g). In the last chapter, we have already benefited from the canonical identification of the critical points of this induced Morse function with respective pairs of critical points of single Morse functions. If we now use the tensor product for chain complexes in the form
~~-.====
..Th.._::..~==
5.3. PRODUCTS
Actually, due to the construction, this proves compatible with the isomorphisms induced by Morse homotopies leading to the identification processes
H.(M) = ~H.(M, f), etc.
_......
(G. (f) ® G.(g))k =
,;;,.;m"-;,~'-'~--
-, - -,....-
203
Thus we define a chain group isomorphism
Pf: (G.(f) ®G.(g))k ~ Gk(fEElg), kENo
!
I
by means of the tensorial extension of the mapping '~~"
Xi ® Yj
f---*
O:(Xi' Yj) . (Xi, Yj)
defined on the generating elements (Xi, Yj) E Critd x Critjg. Here we denote by 0: E {±1} Crit. UGlg) an equivalence transformation of the coherent orientation on M x N. We now have to verify that P~ in fact yields a chain homomorphism, provided that we have chosen a suitable transformation 0:. This choice of transformation is related to the coherent orientations on M, Nand M x N which are supplied in an noncanonical manner. As to the a-operator on G.(fEEl g), let us consider the gluing situation sketched in Figure 5.1. Note that we
(Xf' x g )
•
k
(5.5)
-•.
ED Gi(f) ® Gk-i(g)
(uf'xg)
i=O
together with the boundary operator
(5.6)
ak(O"i ® Tk-i) = a{ O"i ® Tk-i for
~
+ (-I)iO"i ® aLiTk-i>
.(Yf'X9)
(uf' Yg)
O"i ® Tk-i E Gi(f) ® Gk-i(g) ,
we are able to state
( Yf,ug ) ) :
•
(Yf, Yg)
Lemma 5.2 Let f and 9 be any Morse functions on manifolds M and N, respectively. Then, with regard to the induced Morse function fEEl 9 on M x N, there is an isomorphism between the respective chain complexes for any arbitmry coherent orientations,
Figure 5.1: Cobordism equivalence in the product case deal with isolated trajectories in M x N, that is
p. : G.(f) ® G.(g) ~ G.(f EEl g) .
J-l(X... ) - J-l(Y... ) = 1 .
Moreover, this isomorphism appears to be canonical up to tmnsformations of the coherent orientations.
Due to our analysis of the gluing process we derive the equation
Proof. As mentioned above we start with the identification
(5.7)
Critk(f EEl g) =
U Critd x Critjg i+j=k
Ta.(Uf,Xg) . Ta(Yf, ug) = -Ta(xf' ug) . Ta(uf,Yg)
in a way which is entirely independent of the coherent orientation on M x N. This means that (5.7) holds for all transformations 0:. The actual problem
204
CHAPTER 5. EXTENSIONS
consists of relating the characteristic signs TQ(uf, x g), etc., of the isolated tra jectories on M x N to the signs T(uf), etc., of the associated trajectories on M and respectively N, that is, TQ(Uf'Xg) = rp(Uf,Xg)T(uf) Tcr.(xf,ug)
with
the Morse functions: Hp(M) Q9 Hq(N) ~ Hp+q(M x N) Since p. is a chain isomorphism, resorting to the duality functor Hom allows us to construct likewise a cross product for the cohomology groups:
and
= rp(Xf,Ug)T(Ug )
rp(.,.) E {±l} . X :
Since we are free choose a suitable transformation 0: E {±l}Crit.(tEPg), the relating signs rp(',') are independent of the concrete trajectories and critical points. They can depend merely on the Morse indices and - this is the cru cial point - on the order of the pair of the isolated non-trivial trajectory and the constant trajectory. Actually, already in the definition of the tensorial chain complex C* (f) Q9 C* (g) we have different equivalent possibilities for the boundary operator. We have selected the option a(Xf Q9 x g ) = aXf Q9 x g
+ (-1)f-L(x/)Xf Q9 aXg
Thus, choosing an appropriate transformation (5.8)
205
5.3. PRODUCTS
0:,
•
we obtain the relations
HP(f) Q9 Hq(g)
T(Uf)
T(xf, u g)
(-l)f-L(x/)T(u g )
Hence, the identity
p. xf Q9 x g = (xf' x g)
Hp+q(C*(f) Q9 C*(g))
(~. Hp+q(f Ell g)
Once again we obtain the associated product for the cohomology independent of the concrete Morse functions, HP(M) Q9 Hq(N) ~ Hp+q(M x N)
Definition 5.4 Having defined the cohomology cross product by means of a re lation which is naturally immanent in Morse theory, we now are able to define the cup product. Here, we use a classical method based on the fact that coho mology is a contravariant functor. Namely, we consider the diagonal embedding 6:M---->MxM,
and
T(Uf, x g )
---->
which is a closed embedding. Hence, it immediately gives rise to the homomor phism 6* : Hk(M x M) ----> Hk(M) . To give more details, we obtain this homomorphism from a Morse homotopy
holds up to equivalence transformations of the noncanonical coherent orienta tions. 0
6*f ~ fEll f ,
Definition 5.3 Since Morse homology groups have been constructed in such
where 6* f denotes the extension of the Morse function f ffiqn from the tubular neighbourhood of the diagonal M to M x M. For {IT} E H k (M x M),
a way that they are invariant under equivalence transformations of the coher ent orientation, the above isomorphism P. induces an isomorphism P* at the homology level. This isomorphism, which is therefore canonical, appears to be the cardinal feature, upon which we found the definition of the homology cross product. It is accomplished by means of the natural homomorphism A: Hp(f) Q9Hq(g)
---->
h,
6*{IT}
= {6·IT}
E
Hk(M) ,
where 6·IT E Hom (C k (f) , Z) is determined by
\ 6· IT, Xk)
= \ IT,
Hp+q(C*(f) Q9C*(g)) Thus, we define the cup product as the composition
provided for any tensorial chain complexes. A usually appears in relation with the well-known Kiinneth formula. We define the homology cross product as x = P*
0
A: Hp(f) Q9 Hq(g)
---->
Hp+q(f Ell g) .
Due to the naturality of the homomorphism A we are able to transfer the entire identification concept based on the isomorphisms Z induced by Morse homo topies. Hence, we obtain the cross product for Morse homology independent of
HP(M) Q9 Hq(M) ~ Hp+q(M x M) ~ Hp+q(M),
0: u (3 = 6* (0:
X
(3) .
Finally, we intend to present a brief outlook into the possibilities of extending this homology and cohomology theory gained from classical Morse theory even further, for instance toward the topic of vector bundles.
_
~",.',,_
--~--.------"._
- - - - - - - - - - ----
- - - - - - - - - --
.
---:----:-.,----.-----.~_=_-_=_ .,,~~-~,,=.~"~e;=_~""'~--.~-----
-----
-------------co-
======
206
CHAPTER 5. EXTENSIONS
Proposition 5.5 Let M be a smooth manifold and let 7l" : E ---+ M be a smooth n-dimensional vector bundle on M. Furthermore, let Eo = E\U(M) be the complement of a closed neighbourhood of the zero section M 'llJithin E, so that it is contractible to the submanifold M and (E, Eo) is an admissible pair of manifolds. Then there is a natural isomorphism T : Hi(M) ~ HHn(E, Eo)
Appendix A
for all i E No. Proof. Let f be an arbitrary Morse function on M and let qn be the quadratic form associated to a Riemannian metric on E. Referring to the example which we have already analysed with respect to relative Morse functions, we observe that fEEl (-qn) represents a relative Morse function on (E, Eo) with its crit ical points identical to those within Crit.f lying on the submanifold M. In the same way we conclude that all isolated trajectories counting for the rela tive boundary operator of the relative Morse complex associated to fEEl (-qn) on (E, Eo) are located on this submanifold. Actually, we immediately obtain a chain isomorphism between the absolute Morse complex of f on M and this relative complex. Since all stages of the identification process via Morse homotopies can be accomplished in a manner that is compatible with this con struction, the assertion follows from this identification isomorphism T between the absolute complex of M and the relative complex of (E, Eo). Here, the grading of the relative complex is shifted by the constant n given as the dimen 0 sion of the vector bundle. Referring to the classical framework of characteristic classes one would now have to verify that this isomorphism T describes the Thorn iso morphism. Moreover, the following diagram should be given: Hi(E) ~
Hi(M) U
In this chapter we present a brief introduction of Banach manifolds and associ ated Banach bundles which form the foundation of the entire analytic approach to Morse homology chosen in this monograph. We discuss explicitly the struc ture of an infinite-dimensional Banach manifold defined on curve spaces as was stated in Proposition 2.7. The first section of this chapter deals with these manifolds themselves. The second section comprises an analysis of certain Ba nach bundles on these manifolds. We shall partly use notations and schemes of proofs taken from [Eli]. However, it is quite important to point out that our more specialized situation differs from that in [Eli] with respect to the non compactness of the curves' domain R There are several steps in the discussion where we need a more refined treatment.
Hi+n(E, Eo)
n·r;{
Here,
Curve Spaces and Banach Bundles
E Hn(E, Eo) denotes the Thom class of the bundle E.
Let us finish the discussion with the guess that one should be able to obtain a representative for this Thorn class within the framework of Morse cohomology theory by means of the critical points (xo, 0) E Crit n (J EEl ( -qn)) for Xo E Critof.
A.I
The Manifold of Maps P~:~(IR, M)
Definition A.I A covariant functor 6 : Veccoo (i)
---+
Ban
is called a section functor if it associates to each smooth vector bundle ~ on liP a vector space 6(~) of sections in ~ together 'llJith a Banach space topology, so that 6 maps each smooth bundle homomorphism r.p : ~ ---+ 1] to a linear map 6.r.p E .c(6(~); 6(1/)) defined by (6.r.p)· s = r.p. S, and
6.: COO(Hom(~,1/)) ---+ .c(6(~);6(1])) lendowed with the ;J.lready defined differentiable structure
208
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
is continuous.
that is
Auxiliary Proposition A.2 The mappings Hi,2, Li defined in Definition 2.5 are section functors.
: Vecc= (i~)
(A.4) ---4
Ban
Proof We have already verified that the Banach space topology on Hi,2(~) and Li(~) is independent of the respectively chosen trivialization ¢. Each pair of norms 11'11f,2 and II'Ut,2 induced by such trivializations from the canonically normed vector spaces H 1 ,2(lR,JRn) and L2(lR,lRn ), respectively, are equivalent, because ¢ is equipped with asymptotical differentiability. Hence, we may start without loss of generality from the trivial bundle ~ = iR: x lRn , Le.
Hi,2(~)
= H 1 ,2(lR,lRn )
Li(~)
and
= L 2(JR,JR n ) .
Now let A E Coo(Hom(~,7])), that is, without loss of generality, A E coo(iR:, M( m x n, JR)), Then the following estimates hold for s E H 1,2 and respectively L 2, where we denote (As)(t) = A(t) . s(t): (A.I)
A.i. THE MANIFOLD OF MAPS Pl'~y(lR, M)
II As II 0 ,2
~
II (As)' 11~,2
IIA's + As'II~,2
(lA' Sl2
(A.2)
+ IAs'I 2 + 2( A's, As') ) dt
~
2 ( IIA' sll~,2
~
2(
+ IIAs'II~,2
)
IIA'II~,2 Ilsll~ + IIAII~ Ils'II~,2
Ilslloo ~ Ils111,2
=I
i
tl
2(S(7), 8(7)) d7
to
I
~
~
i
tl
to
i
tl
6* : 6(Hom(~,7]))
.c(6(~);6(7])) ,
The next step provides us with properties of this special section functor, which correspond to the conditions of a so-called manifold model in [Eli].
(a) 6(~)
'---+
to
(2 IS(7)1 + 18(7)1 2) d7
Il s lli,2
~ const ( IIA'II~,2 + IIAII~)
H~,2 on Vecc= (iR:)
CO(O is continuous for each ~ E Vecc=(iR:) and
6(Hom(~,7]))
---4
.c(6(~);6(7])).
2S
f--+
(A*: s
f--+
.
contmuous
As)
(c) Given ~,7] E Vecc= (iR:) and an open subset 0 C ~ such that there is a section { E CO(~) with compact support in lR and {(iR:) c 0, each smooth bundle map f E Coo (0, 7]) satisfying f(O±oo) = O±oo induces a well-defined and continuous map on 6(0) = {s E 6(0 I s(iR:) cO} 2 f* : 6(0) s
---4
6(7])
f--+
fos.
Proof (a) has been already proved by (A.3) and (b) follows likewise from (A.3) together with (A.4). As to (c): Since f is a smooth bundle map, its fiber restrictions ft are in particular Lipschitz continuous, uniformly in t E R Thus, with respect to any trivialization of ~, we obtain the estimates (A,5)
Il s lli,2 '
=
for all ~,7] E Vecc= (iR:) .
Thus (A.I) and (A.2) give rise to the estimate IIAslli,2
---4
which is stronger than the mere section functor property,
d 2 -d Is(t)1 d7 I t
00
Corollary A.3 As to the section functor 6 = H~,2, the estimate IIAlloo ~ IIA111,2 for A E H 1 ,2(lR,M(m x n,lR)) implies the continuity of the map
A
1
I
.c(6(~);6(7])) is contin 0
relies essentially on the special choice of the differentiable structure on iR:!
)
for all s E H ,2(lR, JRn)
1
---4
.
Remark It is worth mentioning that the estimate (A.4) with IIA'llo,2 <
follows from the simple calculation
Ils(tdl 2 -ls(to)1 2
VIIA'II~,2 + IIAII~
Consequently, the mapping 6* : Coo(Hom(~,7])) uous.
b ()
According to Lemma 2.2, iR:-differentiability yields the finite norms IIA'llo,2, IIAlloo < 00. Moreover, the estimate (A.3)
~ const
Auxiliary Proposition A.4 The section functor 6 has the properties
IIAll oo ' Il s llo,2
k
IIAII.QHl,2;Hl,2)
209
I ft(Xt)
- ft(Yt) I ~ const I Xt - Yt I for all t E lR
2Note that this subset of sections is open within 6(.;) due to item (a).
210
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
A.l. THE MANIFOLD OF MAPS Pl'~y(lR,M)
the map
and
Ift(s(t))! (; const Is(t)\
+ Ift(O)!
.
(A.9)
Since ft(O) E coogR, "7), this estimate together with Corollary 2.4 implies that the map f. : Hi' (0) ---+ H~,2("7) is well-defined. The continuity of f. with respect to the section functor 6 = Hi,2 is obtained from (A.5) together with an analogous uniform estimate involving first derivatives of the i-smooth bundle map f. 0 Now these properties enable us to deduce the crucial lemma con cerning the construction of the manifold of maps within our framework.
Fundamental Lemma A.5 Let 6,0 c ~ and f E COO(O, "7) be as in the auxiliary Proposition A.4. Then the map f. : 6(0) ---+ 6("7) is smooth and the k-th derivative is given by Dkf.(s) = 6.(F kf 0 s), which is well-defined. Here, Fkf: 0 ---+ Hom(~ EB ... EB ~; "7) denotes the k-th fibre derivative of f.
0
so) E .c(6(~); 6("7)) .
6(0)
---+
6(Hom(~,"7)) C .c(6(~);6("7))
s
f--+
Ff
0 (t,x)
f} :
s - Ff
0
0
So ,
---+
Hom(~,
f--+
Ff(t,x)-Ff(t,so(t))
"7)
is a smooth,3 fibre respecting map, and it satisfies the condition f}(±oo,O) (±oo,O) as with (c) in the auxiliary Proposition A.4.
k
f.
---+
Df.(so) = 6.(F f
because
k = 0: The continuity of f. has been already verified as item (c) in the auxiliary Proposition AA.
8: 0 EB 0
is differentiable at So with the representation of the differential
It should be mentioned that, due to (A.4), this is also well-defined if it holds that Ff(±oo,O) -=I 0, Le.Ffoso fj. 6(Hom(~,"7)). The continuity of Df.: 6(0) ---+ .c(6(~);6("7)) follows from the continuity of the mapping
Proof. We prove the lemma by induction on k.
k = 1: Let 0 be fibrewise convex without loss of generality and let So E 6(0) be fixed. Then, for x,y E 0 from the same fibre, Le.n(x) = n(y), we define
f.
k + 1: Let us now start from the k-times continuously differentiable map together with
Dkf.(so) = 6. (Fkf
so) E .c(6(~), ... , 6(~); 6("7))
0
and let us denote by f(k) the map
f(k) : 0 ---+ Hom(~ EB ... EB~, "7) f(k) (t,~) = Fkf( t,~) - Fkf (t, so(t))
Hom(~, "7)
8(x,y)·z= [lFf(x+t(y-X))dt-Ff(X)]'Z'
Then f(k) again satisfies the inital condition on
f(k) (±oo, 0) Since F f : 0 ---+ Hom(~, "7) is smooth and fibre respecting, the same is true for 8. Moreover, we easily verify the equations
The section functor 6 with properties (b) and (c) from the auxiliary Proposi tion AA gives rise to the composition of the continuous maps ---+
6(Hom(~,"7))
---+
.c(6(~); 6("7)) ,
so that
(A.B)
6(8) (so, so) = 0
and
lim 6(8)(so, s)
s-+so
f.(s) - f.(so) - 6.(Ff 0
Df(k).(so) = 6. (Ff(k)
(s - so)
=
6(8) (so, s)· (s - so)
0
0
so) = 6. (Fk+lf
0
so) .
We now assume (M,g) to be a paracompact, Riemannian coo_ manifold together with the associated exponential map. Furthermore, let 1) denote an open zero section neighbourhood within the tangent bundle T : TM ---+ M such that
(A.lO) 80)'
namely in particular
o
=0
Since (A.7) implies the identity
=
f,
with "7new = Hom( ~ EB .•• EB ~, 17). Thus, the step' k = l' yields the continuous differentiability of f(k). : 6(0) ---+ .c(6(~), ... , 6(~); 6("7)) together with
8(x,y)·(y-x)=f(y)-f(x)-Ff(x)·(y-x), 8(0,0)=0.
6(8) : 6(0) EB 6(0)
=
~
(A.6)
(A.7)
211
1)
....::...
~
f--+
3Here, without loss of generality,
80
V(.6.)
cM
x M
(T(~),exp(~)) E Coo (E).
""'~""''''''''''''''''''''--
- --------------- -
-----~-----------
-
--------------~--_==_~=_-_-._----o--------
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
212
represents a diffeomorphism onto a diagonal neighbourhood within M x M. We observe that smooth, compact curves h E Coo (iR, M) give rise to the pull-back bundles
= { (t,~)
h*TM
E
iR x TM IT(~) = h(t) }
E Vecc oo (iR)
,
on which the above section functor H~,2 is well-defined. From now on we shall again use the notation 6 for this section functor. We obviously obtain from V the open zero section n.eighbourhoods h*V
= { (t,~)
E
iR x V I T(~) = h(t) } o~n h*TM .
Definition A.6 Starting from s E 6(h*V) uous curve eXPh s
= exp 0 s E CO(iR, M),
c CO(h*V), we define the contin
(exp 0 s)(t)
= eXPh(t) s(t)
Thus, provided any fixed endpoints x, y E M, the set of curves P~:;(lR, M)
= { exp 0 s E CO(iR, M) Is E 6(h*V), h E C~y(iR, M) }
is well-defined.
{ 6(h*V), 6(exPh) }hEC~y(i,M) , where
6(exPh):
6(h*V) s
-+ f-----+
P~:~ expos
Proof. We consider the following smooth mappings with respect to h E C~y(iR,M):
(Ph : h*V (t,~)
-+ f-----+
iR x M
= (/Jh(h*V)
--
.
c__
213
and 6(
(A.12)
It holds that
6(Uh) 9
-+ f-----+
6(h*V)
U
P~:;(lR, M) =
6(Uh )
,
hEC~y(i,M)
and that {6(
=
~ Oh -+ Of C f*TM
(Pfh(t,~) = (t,expj(~)(exPh(tr~)) ,
which describes the change of the charts. It fulfills the condition (Pfh(±OO,O) = o as we can see from the fixed endpoints h(±oo) = f(±oo) = x,y. Thus, the fundamental Lemma A.5 states that 1 1 -1 (Pfh* = 6(
= (Phf*
as its inverse, hence the diffeomorphism property. The compatibility of two atlases belonging to different Riemannian metrics follows from the fact that C~y(iR, M) lies dense within C~,y(iR, M) and that, for any arbitrary metric g, the exponential eXPg represents a local 0 diffeomorphism in the sense of (A.lO). Supplement Moreover, we are able to find a countable subset of
(t, eXPh(t)~)
c iR x M ,
= {g E CO(iR,M) Igraphg c Uh ,
--
C~y(iR, M) which lies likewise dense within C~,y(iR, M). This enables us to
According to the choice of V, this is an embedding onto an open neighbourhood of the graph of h. We consequently define Uh 6(Uh )
--
is a smooth map with
represents an associated atlas of charts. Moreover, the Banach manifold P~:; together with this differentiable structure is independent of the Riemannian metric g on M.
(A.H)
0
A.I. THE MANIFOLD OF MAPS P~~y(lR,M)
(A.13)
Theorem 10 P~:~ (JR, M) is equipped with the differentiable structure of an infinite-dimensional Banach manifold. The family
- - - - - - - -----
E 6(h*V)}
reduce the atlas given in Theorem 10 to a countable subatlas. Corollary A.7 Given Riemannian Coo -manifolds M and N together with a map f E COO(M,N),
6(1) : P~:;(JR, M)
-+
p;(~),f(y) (JR, N)
"y
f-----+
f
O"y
214
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
is a well-defined, smooth map between Banach manifolds. Proof· First, any fixed "( E p~:; is mapped to f °"( E CJcx),fCy) OR, N). Since C'j(x),fCy) (JR, N) lies dense within CJCx),fCy) (JR, N), we find a representation of the shape f
°"( =
eXPk t, k E C'j(x),fCy) (JR, N), t E CO(k*V N
A.2. BANACH BUNDLES ON pi~y (JR, M)
215
Referring to the exponential map associated to 9 and K, exp : V --+ M, we obtain isomorphisms at any ~ E V, where V once again denotes the injectivity neighbourhood associated to exp:
(A.15)
\7 1 exp(~) = Dexp(~)
\72exp(~) =
° (DrIT~,hCTM))-1 : TrCe)M ~ TexpW M , -1 ~ Dexp(~) ° (KIT~,vCTM)) : TrC{)M -----+ TexpCe)M .
)
It holds that \71 exp(O) = \7 2 exp(O) = idTT(O)M' Furthermore, Secondly, we may express "( as "( = eXPh s, hE C:'y(JR, M), s E 6(h*V M)
(A.16)
Furthermore, we find an open neighbourhood Oh C h*V M , such that the conditions in (c) in the auxiliary Proposition A.4 are satisfied for the smooth fibre respecting map
8: V
--+
Hom(TM,TM)
8(~) = (\72exp(~))-lo \7 1 exp(~): TrCe)M ~ TrC{)M
is a smooth fibre respecting map which satisfies the identities
• 8(0) = id,
'lj;kh = exp;l o f
° eXPh : Oh --+ k*V N
,
• F8(0) = 0 and
'lj;kh(±OO,O) = (±OO, 0) .
• 8(~)·~=~ .
Hence it is due to the fundamental Lemma A.5, that #h* : 6(Oh) is a smooth map. This proves the corollary.
A.2
--+
6(k*V N ) D
Banach Bundles on P~:;(JR, M)
We henceforth use the notation 6 for the section functor H~,2. Let us fix a Riemannian metric 9 on the manifold M, as was required in the last section in order to define the atlas on P~;;. Given such a 9 we are provided canonically with the following features known from Riemannian geometry: Let
K : T(TM)
--+
TM, r: TM
--+
Given any v E TpM und X E COO(TM), we obtain the covariant derivative of X in the direction of v from the formula
\7 v X(p)
= K ° DpX· v
Thus, straightforward computation for h E CC;:y and ~ E Coo (h*T M) yields the identity
.
()
(A.17)
()texPh~=\71exp(~).h+\72exp(~)·\7t~.
Let us consider once again the map from (A,13) representing the change of charts ipfh for smooth IR-curves f, hE CC;:y(JR, M). Then the fibre derivative Fipfh(t,~) E Hom (ThCt)M,TfCt)M) has the representation
M
denote the unique Levi-Civita connection and the canonical projection in the tangent bundle of M. As a consequence, K and Dr : T(TM) --+ T M yield a decomposition of T(TM) into a horizontal bundle and a vertical bundle: 4
(A.18)
Fipfh: Oh
--+
Hom (h*TM, f*TM)
Fip fh (t,~) = \7 2 exp ( exp fC~) (exPhCt) ~)) -1 0\72 exp(~)
Thus, according to the fundamental Lemma A.5, (A.14)
(Dr(~)) , ~ E TM .
T{,v(TM)
ker
T{,h(TM)
ker (K(~))
4Note that the vertical bundle comes canonically and independent of any specification of a Riemannian metric.
(A.19)
is a smooth map.
6(Oh)
--+
.c(6(h*TM); 6(f*TM))
S
f--+
6*(Fipfho s) = Dipfh*(s)
216
A. 2. BANACH BUNDLES ON P~~y(JR, M)
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
Remark Similar to the proof of this fundamental lemma, we may verify also that 9: V --+ Hom (TM, T M) gives rise to a smooth map
(A.20)
6(9) : 6(Oh)
--+
£.(6(h*TM); 6(h*TM))
s
f---+
6*(8 ° s) .
Now let 'I': Veccoo (i) that
--+
Theorem 11 The section functor 'I' satisfying condition (A.21) admits a unique extension to the continuous vector bundles of the shape
g*TM, 9 Moreover,
--+
£.('I'(~);'I'(7]))
A
f---+
(s
f---+
A· s)
Proof. Let
0, {3
C£
(A.25)
s
f---+
Fip/hOS-Fip/hOSO.
= expo~,
~ E CO(o*V)
c CO(o*TM)
J{Ja.(t)· v(t)
= V'2 exp (~(t)). v(t)
.
Thus, J{Ja.(t) is a toplinear isomorphism for each t E iR. Now let us consider charts based on the supporting curves h, f E C~yOR, M) as in the proof of Theorem 10. Formula (A.18) applied to s E 6(Oh) and v E 6(h*TM) leads to the identity
Given a fixed smooth section So E Cj(Oh), we are provided with a smooth map as in the proof of the fundamental lemma, 6 (Hom (h*TM, j*TM))
'I'(g*TM)
We consequently define J{Ja. E CO (Hom (o*TM,{3*TM)) by
Referring to the estimate (A.l) in the auxiliary proposition A.2, we notice that
'I' = L~ fulfills this condition with respect to 6 = and thus in particular
with respect to 6 = H~,2 due to (A.3).
--+
M
E C~,y(iR, M) be given, satisfying
{3
1J* ; 6(Oh)
U
E
is a Banach vector bundle on P;:~(JR, M).
6(Hom) C £.('I'; 'I') .
(A.22)
P;;;(JR,M) c ~,ii,M); x,y
gEP;:~(IR,M)
yields a continuous map for each two ~,7] E Vec(iR), that is, in short terms, (A.21)
E
'I' (P~:~*TM) =
Ban be any section functor satisfying the condition
'I'*: 6(Hom(~,7]))
217
'\72exP(ip/hO s)
It holds that
° (Fip/hO s)· V = '\72 exp(s)· v
,
that is
6* ° 1J*(s) = 6*(Fip/h Os - Fip/h Oso) = 6*(Fip/h Os) - 6*(Fip/h Oso) E £.(6(h*TM); 6U*TM)) Thus, property (A.21) of the section functor 'I' yields the smooth mapping
I
6* (Fip/h ° s)
= 6* ((Jg/ )-1 0
I
(A.26)
Jgh),
9
I-t
We therefore define the fibre at 9 = eXPh s as
= eXPh s E P~;~(lR, M)
I
'I'(g*TM) = { Jgh' v v E 'I'(h*TM) }
(A.23)
6(Oh)
--+
£.('I'(h*Tm)j'I'U*TM))
s
f---+
'I'* (Fip/h ° S
-
This is independent of the choice of h, because (A.26) implies the equation
Fip/h Oso) (A.27)
Since 'I'*(Fip/hOSO) E £.('I'(h*TM); 'I'U*TM)) is already well-defined according to the section functor property, we obtain the smooth map (A.24)
'I'* : 6(Oh)
--+
£.('I'(h*TM)j'I'U*TM))
s
f---+
'I'*(Fip/hO s)
in analogy with 6* : 6(Oh)
--+
£.(6(h*TM); 6(j*TM)) .
After these preparations we are able to prove the following
Jg/o6*(Fip/hOS)'V=Jgh'V,
Thus, referring to (A.24), the Banach space topology on 'I'(g*TM) is defined in a unique way independent of the underlying curve h. The smoothness of the map 'I'* : 6(0h)
--+
£.('I'(h*TM); 'I'U*TM))
s
t-+
'I'* (Fip/h ° s)
due to (A.24) implies that the maps
Jgh : 'I'(h*TM)
--+
'I'(g*TM)
~
.......
' ~ ~"
218
~
u_,
~
_'
~
. . . . . . . . . . . . . c'
~ u~ ~"....~, .""~
,~' o~~~~
="
~=~-----
",c
----
A.2. BANACH BUNDLES ON P~~y(JR, M)
APPENDIX A. CURVE SPACES AND BANACH BUNDLES
219
provide us with a well-defined local trivialization of the bundle '.t (Pg*TM) together with smooth transition maps. 0
The local representation of the section r consequently gets the shape
Since the transition maps due to (A.27) comply with the identity
(A.29)
(A.28)
(Jgf)-lO J gh
U
_6 (P;;Z*TM) =
(A.30)
6(h*TM)
(A.31)
ITO (= ')'}, ')' E
Theorem 12 Let X E Coo (TM) be a smooth vector field on M satisfying X(x) = X(y) = O. Then the mapping
"r + X
0'Y E cooh*TM)
can be extended to a smooth section in the Banach bundle Li(P::~*TM):
r:
P;:~(JR, M) ')'
-+
1 ,2*TM) L IR2 (px,y
~
"r + X
0')' E
+ "V2 exp(~)-l. (X 0 eXPh)({)
Lih*TM)
Proof It is sufficient to verify the smoothness of this map with respect to the local representation by a chart together with the overlying local trivialization. We thus consider
H~,2(Uh) x Li(h*TM)
-+
Li(P~;Z*TM)1Hj.'2(Uh)
(exPh~' 17)
f---7
"V2 exp(~)'17 .
{~8({) . it E H~,2(h*TM)
for
it E Cf(h*TM)
H~,2 3 {~"Vt{ E Li
(A.32)
is continuously linear and thus also smooth. Considering now the open zero section neighbourhood 0 = h*V c h*TM, we are led to the smooth bundle map f:O-+h*TM (A.33)
f(v) = "V 2 exp(v)-l. X(exPh v)
P;:~ .
According to this representation we may grasp the tangent space T-y P:;; as the space of the 'H~,2-vector fields along the H~,2-curve ')" equipped with a Banach space topology.
C~y(iR", M) 3 ')' ~
8({) . it + "V t {
is also. We furthermore observe that
pJ~~Oy (JR, T M),
P6~~oy (JR, TM)
=
is smooth, therefore in particular the mapping
= H~,2 (P;;;*TM).
E
rtriv,h({)
Hi/ 3 {~8({) E £(H~,2(h*TM); H~,2(h*TM))
Remark A more detailed analysis of the exponential map, its derivatives "V 1 exp and "V2exp and of the Levi-Civita connection would yield the possibility of discussing the associated exponential map eXPT on the Riemannian manifold T M. As a consequence, the functorial behaviour of p,~:2 (R, .) as stated in Corollary A.3 applied to the projection map T : T M -+ M would enable us to find a representation of the tangent bundle TP;;; in the following form:
T-yP;:~(JR, M) = { (
f---7
As we already noticed in (A.20), the mapping
represents exactly the tangent bundle of the Banach manifold P::~(lR, M). As a consequence we obtain
=
{
Li(h*V) "V2 exp({)-l ("V 1 exp(~) . it +"V2exp(~)' "V t { +X(eXPh~))
We may also express this as
hEP;:~ (IR,M)
TP::~ (JR, M)
-+
= 6*(F~fhO s) = D~fh*(s)
with respect to the special section functor '.t = 6, the Banach bundle
Corollary A.8 TP:;;(lR,M)
rtriv,h: Hi.,2(h*V)
satisfying the condition f(O±oo) = O±oo due to the assumption X(x) = X(y) = O. Hence, the fundamental Lemma A.5 guarantees the smoothness of the map
,
f* : Hi.,2(h*V)
-+
Hi.,2(h*TM)
Piecing all this together proves the assertion.
o
Corollary A.9 Given a smooth Morse junction f on M, the mapping 1 ,2 F: p X,Y -+ L 2 (p1,hTM) x , y E Crit f JR. X1Y , S
~
8+"Vfos
describes a smooth section in the specified L2-Banach bundle. The local repre sentation at ')' E C~y is of the type
Hoc,-y : H~,2h*V) -+ Lih*TM) Floc,-y({)(t) = "Vt{(t) + g(t,{(t)) , where g : JR x 'Y*V -+ ')'*TM is smooth and fibre respecting, satisfies the identity g( ±oo, 0) = 0 and is endowed with the asymptotic fibre derivatives D 2 g(±oo,0) which are conjugated linear operators of the Hessians H 2 f(x) and H2 f(y), respectively.
Appendix B
The Geometric Boundary Operator Referring to the brief historical outline in the introduction, we notice that an other, geometric definition of the characteristic signs for isolated a-trajectories of the time-independent gradient flow was given there:
Definition B.t Let f be a smooth Morse function on M together with the critical points x, y E Crit f. We assume that the Morse-Smale condition is fulfilled, so that
(B.l)
ML ~ WU(x) rh W
8
(y)
= M(x, y)
represents a p,(x) - p,(y)-dimensional manifold consisting of parametrized gra dient trajectories. Let all unstable manifolds WU(x) for x E Crit f be en dowed with arbitrary and noncanonically fixed orientations. Provided with the additional assumption that M is orientable and oriented, we thus obtain imme diately induced orientations for the associated, codimensional stable manifolds W 8(x), x E Crit f. We now consider the short exact sequence associated to a non-critical point p E M(x, y) (B.2)
0 -----* TpM(x,y) ~ TpWU(x) EEl T pW 8(y) ~ TpM
-----*
0
where i(u) j(v, w)
-
(u, -u)
= v+w.
We note that exactness is essentially due to the transversal intersection as indicated in (B. 1). Starting from the given orientations on TpWU(x), T pW8(y) and TpM, we are supplied with an orientation on the connected component M(x, y)~ of p, which is induced by this short exact sequence. Thus we obtain
222
APPENDIX B. THE GEOMETRIC BOUNDARY OPERATOR
223
orientations Ogeom[u] of the operator classes [u, DuJ E A in a geometrical way for orientable manifolds M. These operator classes belong to the trajectories U
= u xy
Proof. The first step is to construct a C± E GL+(n,lR), such that we obtain the representation . (\± (B.5 ) C ±-IA±C±-- dlag Al , ... , An±)
E M~,y ,
(x,y) EX = {(x,y) E Critkf x Critd I k > l, M(x,y) '" 0}
with ordered eigenvalues as specified in Definition B.2. We consequently choose an asymptotically constant curve C E Coo (iR, GL +(n, JR)) with C(±oo) = C± as in the conclusion of Lemma 2.15. Thus, without loss of generality, A is already endowed with ends in ordered diagonal form,
Consequently, the comparison of these geometric orientations with the canoni cal orientation for iso!ated trajectories by the free JR-action from time-shifting provides the characteristic signs of the geometric boundary operator. Thus the sum of all characteristic signs for fixed endpoints x, y is nothing more than the intersection number yielded by the transversal intersection
WU(x) rh WS(y) rh M
(B.3)
A± = diag(A~, ... , A;) .
(B.6)
In the following step we consider the ordinary linear differential equation
a
s(t)
within the level surface M associated to a regular value f(y) < a < f(x). This level surface is oriented canonically by the normal field - \7 f· a
U(.)
=
(B.7)
U(t) = -A(t) . U(t), U( -T)
The formula U(t) = exp
together with identity (B.6) yields the representations
Ogeom[Uxy#pUyzJ
( e->~·('+T)
(B.8)
U(t)
= e->.;:;-·(t+T)
D E A has the following shape:
U(t)
=
U(T)· e->.;t·(t-T)
for t
~
-T ,
). 10"" T .
Then we define CECoo(iR,GL+(n,lR)) as follows: 1
0
D = dIag(A1, ... ,An), Ai E C (JR, JR)
A'(±OO) = A± { > 0, for 1 ~ i ~ n - J.L~A±)
t
•
< 0, for n - J.L(A±) < t
+(1
~ n
C(t) =
Lemma B.3 Let us assume a KA E Etriv with A E A smooth and asymptot ically constant, i.e. A(t) = const± for Itj ~ T. Then there exists a conjugation transformation by an asymptotically constant C E Coo (iR, GL( n, JR)), so that
K = C-1 KC E
}
( e->;'('-T)
(B.9) Definition B.2 We define E~:t:,g, the so-called set of E triv -operators in or dered diagonal form, as the subset of E triv comprising the operators K =
where
A(r)dr)
-T
Throughout the following technical discussions we will refer to the notations from Section 2.2 on Fredholm theory.
.
(J
= 11
t
for the geometric orientation. This will be reduced step by step to a simpler relation for the linear gluing version from Section 3.1.2.
gt + D, for which
= U(-T,·) E COO (lR,GL+(n,lR))
with respect to
Proof. Let us mention first that it suffices to consider the equivalence classes {u} E CA in the sense of (4.18) from Section 4.1.4. We further notice that the transformation group {±1} Crit f on the set of these geometric orientations acts in the same way on CA as it is expressed in (4.19). Therefore it is sufficient to verify the condition of coherence Ogeom[UxyJ #Ogeom[UyzJ
-A(t) . s(t)
and the associated evolution operator
Theorem 13 The noncanonical geometric orientation Ogeom of the operator classes [U Xy ], (x, y) E X can be extended to a coherent orientation u E CA.
(B.4)
=
E~:~ has ordered diagonal form.
Ii
j3-(t + T) . 11 j3-(t + T)) . U(t) , U(t),
U(T)· [
+(1
t ~
-T
-T
~
j3+(t - T) . 11 ] j3+(t T)) . U(T)-IU(t) , t
lAs to the definition of f3±, see Definition 2.47.
~
t
T .
l
~
T ,
224
Straightforward computation using identities (B.8) and (B.9) together with the formula C- l KC = ~ + c- 1 6 + C-lAC at ' where A is already given in asymptotically constant diagonal form, shows that conjugation by C yields the diagonalization as described in the assertion. 0
Corollary B.4 Let K E E triv be surjective and asymptotically constant. Due to Lemma B.3 we may assume without loss of genemlity that K is given in ordered diagonal form. Then the kernel of K is genemted by the curves VI, ... , V/-,(K-)-/-,(K+) satisfying 2
Vi = Ci' eHn-,.(K-), Ci(t) = {
c-e->.;-t + _>.+/ C e "
C;.
E Coo(iR,JR.+),
t ~ -T :: T ' t::::<
Ci(t) > 0 always,
The case where we cannot necessarily assume an asymptotical constant opera tors can be elucidated by the following
Lemma B.5 Given K = %t + A E Etriv, A E Cl(iR,End(JR.n)) such that A(t) is self-adjoint for all ItI > T for some T> 0, the following asymptotical property holds for the solutions V E ker K C H l ,2 (JR., Rn) : lim ~- = e± exist and satisfy A±e± = ),±e± with ),+ > 0 ),- < O. t--+± 00 lJVTij]f ,
Proof. Without loss of generality, we may assume that A(t) is self-adjoint for all t E iR. Suppose that V E ker K is given, i.e. v(t) = A(t) . v(t), t E JR. We denote by e(t) = lI~mll' t E JR., the curve e E Coo(JR., sn-l). Straightfor ward computation shows that e satisfies the ordinary differential equation on
sn-l C JR.n:
(B.lO) e(t) = pre..L(t) 0 A(t) . e(t) ,
where el.(t) = Te(t)sn-l c JR.n denotes the subspaces perpendicular to e(t)
and pre..L the orthogonal projection onto the tangent space el.. Due to the
self-adjointness of A(t) for all t E iR this differential equation can be restated
as the equation associated to the time-dependent gradient flow of
f: IR x sn-l
--+
JR., ft(e) = (A(t)e,e) .
denotes the i-th vector of the canonical standard basis of IR n
Similar to the calculations in the compactness analysis for time-dependent tra jectories we obtain
(B.ll) (e(s), e(s)) =
(V fs (e(s)), e(s)) =
.
:t
(ft(e(t)) )(s) - :tft(e(s))
where %t!t(e(s)) = (A(s)e(s),e(s)). Thus, Lemma 2.2 applied to A E Cl(iR, End(JR.n)) implies that
1
a
00
-00
atft(e(s))ds <
exists, and since sn-l is compact, t obtain the finite L 2 -norm
f:
(B.12)
and consequently lim e(t) t--+±oo now follows.
1 ::;; i ::;; f.1(K-) - f.1(K+) .
2e;
225
APPENDIX B. THE GEOMETRIC BOUNDARY OPERATOR
f--?
00
ft (e( t)) is bounded. Altogether we
(e(s), e(s))ds <
00
= O. Due to the compactness of sn-l the assertion 0
Continuation of the proof of Theorem 13. Given (u xy , u yz ) E Mt,y x Mt,z and (x,y), (y,z) E X, we choose chart neighbourhoods U xy and U yz on the Banach manifolds P;:~ aund P~:; at asymptotically constant smooth curves h xy and h yz , i.e. uxy
= eXPhxy~'
~ E Coo(iR, h;yTM)
In these local coordinates, the focal Fredholm map %t
+ Vf
Fu.j{) = e(~) . h + V t~ + V 2 exp(~)-l. (V f
0
is expressed as
eXPh~) .
We denote the differential of Fu.. at ~ E H~,2(h~.TM) by Du.j~). In the following analysis we argue that we may assume without loss of generality that D u ... (~) = V t + A(~) is asymptotically constant, which generally is only given if ~ has compact support. Defining a cut-off function f3T E coo(iR, [0, 1]) for T E [0,1] by
IJ. "1, iJT
~
ItI ::;; ItI ~
1,
{
0, monotone,
~-1
~
otherwise
and the continuous path
f3T:
[0,1]
--+
coo(iR", h~.. TM)
T
f--?
IJr· {
for T> 0
227
APPENDIX B. THE GEOMETRIC BOUNDARY OPERATOR
226
we obtain the continuous path of Fredholm operators T 1-+ D u (~T) with Du.J~) = Du.J~o)· We find a To > 0 such that Du.J~T) is surjective for all o :::; T :::; To. Thus, the geometric orientation Ogeom[u... ] of ker D u... induces a unique orientation of ker Du.J~TJ, which can be determined by explicit analysis of the asymptotic behaviour of the solutions generating the kernel in the same way as for the original operator which is not asymptotically constant. This follows from the given continuation argument for T --4 0 together with Lemma B.5 by using the fact that ~T is iR-differentiable for all T E [0, To]. Referring to Lemma 3.13 we notice that, concerning the verification of the coherence condition, it suffices to analyse the local situation at u xy , u yz and UXy#~Uyz by means of local coordinates and trivializations. To sum up, we may start without loss of generality from asymptotically constant and surjective operators D uzy , D uyz . Now let TxWU(x), TyWU(y) and TzWU(z) be endowed with fixed orientations. Using the trivializations of u~yTM and u~zTM, which coincide at TyM and transform the operators D uZY ' D uyz into ordered diagonal form, we are led to the orientations eil/\
/\eil'(Z)
on
span(e n _l'(x)+l,
,e n ) ~ TxWU(x)
(B.13) ejl/\
/\ejl'(lI)
on
span(e n _l'(y)+I,
,e n ) ~ TyWU(y) ,
ekl/\
/\ekl'(Z)
on
span(e n _l'(z)+I,
,e n ) ~ TzWU(z)
According to Corollary B.4 the kernels ker DUZy,triv and ker Dull.,triv are gen erated by VI, ... , VI'(x)-I'(y) , Vi = Ci' eHn-l'(x),
Ci
> 0, 1:::; i:::; J-l(x) - J-l(Y)
Thus, it remains merely to analyse the linear gluing version (B.17) #p:
----+
(~,()
1-+
Ogeom[uxyltriv = EI' VI /\
/\ vl'(x)_I'(y),
EI E {±1}
Ogeom[Uyzltriv = E2' WI /\
/\ WI'(y)-I'(z),
E2 E {±1}
are determined uniquely by
(BoI5)
eil /\ ... /\ eil'(z) = Ogeom[Uxyltriv/\ eil/\"'/\ ejl'(y)' eil /\
0
••
/\
ejl'(Y) = Ogeom [Uyzltriv /\ ... /\ ekl'(z) ,
due to Definition B.1. It likewise holds that (B.16)
eil /\ ... /\ eil'(z)
=
Ogeom[Uxll#~Uyzhriv/\ ek l /\ ... /\ ekl'(z)
L2 Projker.j~P
+ (-p)
EIE2 (VI #pO) /\ ... /\ (VI'(x)-I'(y) #pO) /\ (O#pWt} /\ ... /\ (O#p WI'(y)-I'(z)) 0
coincides with the geometric orientation Ogeom[uxy#~Uyzltriv, DUyz,triv =
Given the surjective operators Duzy,triv = !1t + A yz E E triv in ordered diagonal form A xy = diag (AI, An), A yz = diag (VI, . h Ai \+ = Vi_, .Z = 1, ... , n , Wlt 0
••
,
!1t + A xy 0
••
,
E Etriv and
vn )
we construct the following homotopies:
(B.18)
+A~y,
!1t
I +A~z E Etriv C F(H ,2,L 2 ),
[0,1]:;1 T 1-+
!1t
AT _ xy -
+
T'
A~ = z
+
(1-.T).d~ag(vI,.~.,vn) T·dlag(v l ,,,,,vn _ I«y),vn -l'(y)+I,""Vn ) .
(1 - T) diag (AI, ... , An) diag (AI, ... ,An_l'(y),A~_I'(Y)+I"" ,A~) 0
Obviously, both homotopies !1t + A~y and !1t + A~z run continuously through surjective operators from E triv , which respectively have constant kernels
ker(~+AT) at xy =span(vI,""VI'(X)-I'(y))
WI, ... ,WI'(y)-I'(z), Wj = dj' ej+n-I'(y), dj > 0, 1:::; j :::; J-l(Y) - J-l(z) ,
(B.14)
ker (DuZy,triv#pDuy.,triv)
and to verify that the orientation
and
respectively. Then the respective geometric orientations
9!!
DUzy,triv x ker Duyz,triv
and
ker
(~ at + ATyz )
= span (WI, ... , WI'(Y)-I'(z))
Thus, the geometric orientations Ogeom[uxyltriv and Ogeom [Uyzltriv remain con stant during these homotopies. Moreover these homotopies are compatible + (A~y#pA~z) with the linear gluing version (B.17). This means that T 1-+ describes a continuous homotopy through surjective operators, where p ~ maxTE[O,I] po(D~Zy,triv' D~y.,triJ may be chosen as independent of T. During this homotopy the kernel ker (!1t + A~y#pA~z) is generally not kept invariant, but the orientations Ogeom[uxy#~Uyzltriv and Ogeom[Uxyltriv#Ogeom[Uyzltriv re main fixed by reasons of continuity. Due to the construction it holds that
ft
EI E2' VI,p /\ ... /\ VI'(x)_I'(y),p /\ WI,_p/\ . . . /\ wl'(Y)-I'(z),-p /\ ek l /\ ... /\ ekl'(z)
rv
eil /\ ... /\ eil'(Z) .
<....~....'~;;::i>.."....;;;;
228
"."'~~~~''''';
;i""';;~'lo,;;:~~:~;,.~''i
,;;;;;;;,,:K~~'~'1'Wj~,,",
"""~~~;;:
APPENDIX B. THE GEOMETRIC BOUNDARY OPERATOR
Thus, the identity (B.19)
Ogeom[Uxy#~Uyzltriv =
Ogeom[Uxy]triv#Ogoom[Uyzltriv
follows from the explicit representation of the linear gluing version # p in (B.17) for T = 1: Vi#pO
= Vi,p,
i = 1,
,J1(x) - J1(Y)
O#pWj
= Wj,p,
j
= 1,
,J1(Y) - J1(z)
Bibliography
o [Bo]
R. Bott, Morse theory indomitable, Pub!. Math. 1.H.E.S. 68 (1988), 99-114.
[C]
C. C. Conley, Isolated invariant sets and the Morse index, CBMS Reg. Conf. Series in Math. 38 (1978), A.M.S., Providence, R.1.
[C-Z]
C. C. Conley and E. Zehnder, Morse-type index theory for flows and periodic solutions for Hamiltonian equations, Comm. Pure App!. Math. 37 (1984), 207-253.
[Cou]
R. Courant, Dirichlet's principle, conformal mappings and mimi mal surfaces, Interscience, New York, 1950, reprinted: Springer, New York-Heidelberg-Berlin, 1977.
[Don]
S. K. Donaldson, The orientation of Yang-Mills modulispaces and four manifold topology, J. DifI. Geom. 26 (1987), 397-428.
[Eli]
H. 1. Eliasson, Geometry of manifolds of maps, J. DifI. Geom. 1 (1967), 169-194.
[E-S]
S. Eilenberg and N. Steenrod, Foundations of algebraic topology, Princeton University Press, 1952.
[F-H]
A. Floer and H. Hofer, Coherent orientations for periodic orbit prob lems in symplectic geometry, Math. Z. 212 (1993), 13-38.
[F1]
A. Floer, Morse theory for Lagrangian intersections, J. DifI. Geom. 28 (1988),513-547.
[F2]
A. Floer, A relative Morse index for the symplectic action, Comm. Pure App!. Math. 41 (1988),393-407.
[F3]
A. Floer, The unregularized gradient flow of the symplectic action, Comm. Pure App!. Math. 41 (1988), 775-813.
_ '-""_._.._'..>:_:_":._"~ . .
.
.
.~-=_
;0......__
_~..._ ..~._"-
._ _ ->.-on.......
_ ._ _'
---
. ' - .0 __••'"
-_.__
__.
~..
_. _ ...
~_~_,_.~
__ ",_ . _,.. ._'""""."""'-.'"",
_Co -._ -=:-;,.~=,-;
_,;c......
,_O.~_.·".'
, __,_
"'"",."..
.,'.
> __ ..
_-'.-~
.•, " .. ,.,.,,'
;.>. e • __ ••,'"0,,_,._,,,_.<"0,._ •• ',,0.. •
; ..
~." '0_"
".
~-.:;..._._ ... _"'- "_.,,--_.,,.,,",,~ ~"--~'-~~'::;.:;?';:';--;~-:;;'~~--:;';;.~;~~,7;;::;::.:;:·~ _._""7....,;;;;'""""'~.
~__._...:>_~"" __•.._
230
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[F4]
A. Floer, An instanton-invariant 'for 3-manifolds, Comm. Math. Phys. 118 (1988), 215-240.
[Sm2]
S. Smale, Differentiable dynamical systems, Bull. A. M. S. 73 (1967), 747-817.
[F5]
A. Floer, Witten's complex and infinite dimensional Morse theory, J. Diff. Geom. 30 (1989), 207-221.
[Sm3]
S. Smale, An infinite dimensional version of Sard's theorem, Ann. of Math. 87 (1973), 213-221.
[F6]
A. Floer, Symplectic fixed points and holomorphic spheres, Comm. Math. Phys. 120 (1989),575--611.
[Sp]
E. Spanier, Algebraic topology, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1966.
[T]
C. H. Taubes, Self-dual Yang-Mills connections on non-self-dual 4-manifolds, J. Diff. Geom. 17 (1982),139-170.
[Th]
R. Thorn, Sur une partition en cellules associes it une fonction sur une variete, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 228 (1949), 973-975.
[W]
E. Witten, Supersymmetry and Morse theory, J. Diff. Geom. 17 (1982), 661--692.
[Fr] [Hi] [Kli]
J. M. Franks, Morse-Smale flows and bomotopy jbeory, Topology 18 (1979), 199-215. M. W. Hirsch, Differential topology, Graduate Texts in Math. 33, Springer, New York, 1976. W. Klingenberg, Lectures on closed geodesics, Grundl. der Math. Wiss. 230, Springer, 1978.
[L-McO] R. B. Lockhart and R. C. McOwen, Elliptic operators on noncom pact manifolds, Ann. Sci. Norm. Sup. Pisa IV-12 (1985), 409-446. [McD]
D. McDuff, Elliptic methods in symplectic geometry, Bull. A. M. S. 23 (1990), 311-358.
[Ml]
J. W. Milnor, Morse theory, Ann. of Math. Studies 51, Princeton Univ. Press, 1963.
[M2]
J. W. Milnor, Lectures on the h-cobordism theorem, Math. Notes, Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, 1965.
[M-S]
J. W. Milnor and J. Stasheff, Characteristic classes, Ann. of Math. Studies 76, Princeton Univ. Press, 1974.
[S]
D. Salamon, Morse theory, the Conley index and Floer bomology, Bull. L. M. S. 22 (1990), 113-140.
[S-ZI]
D. Salamon and E. Zehnder, Floer homology, the Maslov index and periodic orbits of Hamiltonian equations, in: Analysis et cetera, edited by P. H. Rabinowitz and E. Zehnder, Academic Press, 1990, 573--600.
[S-Z2]
D. Salamon and E. Zehnder, Morse theory for periodic solu tions of Hamiltonian systems and the Maslov index, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 45 (1992), 1303-1360.
[Sml]
S. Smale, On gradient dynamical systems, Ann. of Math. 74 (1961), 199-206.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
231
~_._~
233
INDEX
Index admissible covariant derivation, 39 pair of manifolds, 11, 163, 180, 180,183,184,190,194,206 pair of trivializations, 115, 120, 159, 163, 201 Arzela-Ascoli, theorem of, 57 associativity, 68, 113, 123 asymptotically constant, 71, 107, 122 Banach bundle, 207, 217 manifold, 14, 22, 24, 28, 42, 43, 46, 70, 100, 207, 212, 214, 218, 225 boundary operator, 133, 202, 221 canonical boundary operator, 133 homomorphism, 151 identification, 175, 183 isomorphism, 133, 140, 152, 153 orientation, 142, 147 chain complex, 136, 180, 184, 186, 202 homomorphism, 141, 203 homotopy, 144 homotopy operator, 187 isomorphism, 206 map, 163, 169 characteristic class, 183 characteristic sign, 133, 145, 155, 200, 204, 221, 222 cobordism, 16, 70, 137 equivalence, 52, 95, 142, 147
of trajectory spaces, 95 oriented, 103 coboundaryoperator, 200 cochain complex, 199 coercivity, 10, 55, 63-66, 164, 166, 181, 182, 191, 200 coherent orientation, 15, 129, 157, 158,161,169,200,203,222 cohomology theory, 199 compactness, 15, 51 -gluing cobordism, 70 result, 63, 200 complementarity, 95, 103 conjugated self-adjoint, 29, 41, 130, 156 connecting orbit, 136, 161 continuation principle, 6, 9 contraction principle, 84 correction term, 72, 80, 85, 87, 99 covariant derivation, 39 Fredholm admissible, 39, 114 induced,40 determinant bundle, 16, 103, 107, 108, 113, 116, 123, 158 space, 104, 111 diffeomorphism type, 95, 146 dimension axiom, 121, 156, 191, 193 elliptic regularity, 26, 57 embedding closed, 163, 170, 174, 177, 179, 188 diagonal, 205
:::,.__._ ::"'':':::=~''::=':::::'i'~~--=,:;:,=::,-==.=.""",
for trajectory spaces, 69 graph-, 177 of gluing, 126 of trajectory spaces, 97 equivalence of broken trajectories, 137, 148 of coherent orientations, 222 of Fredholm operators, 35, 107, 111, 129, 154, 156 of Fredholm operators along curves, 115 of homology classes, 10 of one-sided operators, 158 of operators, 159 of simply broken trajectories, 95 evaluation map, 53 excision axiom, 190 exponential map, 211, 213, 215, 218 factorization, 176, 177, 177, 180 five lemma, 187 Floer homology, 6, 14, 49, 52, 76 Fredholm class, 133 index, 15, 35, 38, 47, 49, 108 local, 41 map, 41, 42,43,47,103,225 operator, 15, 16,22,30,34,40, 42,47,74-76,80,101,105 107, 126, 133, 157, 158 generic, 28, 42, 44, 49, 50 geometric boundary operator, 222 geometrical convergence, 56, 81 gluing, 15, 68, 123 and orientation, 113 for one-sided operators, 158 of A-parametrized trajectories, 127 of asymptotically constant curves, 71
of Fredholm operators, 108, 110
of trajectories, 80, 87,123,138, 147 of trivializations, 122 pre-, 70, 71, 74, 88, 97, 110, 125 unparametrized, 88 gradient flow, 86 negative, 14, 26, 53, 55, 70, 80, 156,159,168,171,173,181, 192,200 positive, 156, 159, 200 time-independent, 174 Hessian, 1, 26, 29, 78, 86, 156, 162, 219 homology group absolute, 163 relative, 163, 184, 190 isomorphism, 170 canonical, 172 homotopy, 9 A-, 9, 50, 100, 126, 187 finite, 46 invariance, 123, 163, 190 lemma, 171, 174, 176, 178, 180, 188 operator, 10, 15, 22, 144, 187 regular, 46, 47, 49, 63, 144 trajectory, 63, 98 identification canonical, 172, 202 identification process, 153, 161, 171, 187, 200 index Fredholm, 15, 47, 105, 108 Morse, 15, 62, 145 intersection number, 3, 103, 136 Kiinneth formula, 204 Levi-Civita connection, 214, 218 long exact sequence, 180, 184-186, 187, 190
_ ~,JiLJiOUiJ._ ".,__
_ .""':'"
--"
- _" __ • '", __ ;o..--~.",-_~,.~
_
.' _
_~
..__
~
'"
-4":0. ='-~. __ ,~.., __ =._
_~."
,7~·v_~=·_·
234 Mobius band, 121, 155 manifold of maps, 22 Morse cohomology, 200 complex, 6, 8, 11, 133, 135, 136, 163,167,169,171,180,184, 206 relative, 184, 187, 206 function, 1, 10, 65, 133, 135, 151,163,165,167,169,181, 184, 201, 202, 219 relative, 11, 183, 184, 190, 206 homology, 2, 10, 63, 153, 167, 180 group, 162, 177, 184 relative, 190 homotopy, 21, 63, 64, 96, 100, 140,143,151,152,172,201, 204-206 regular, 185 relative, 185, 187, 188 index, 1, 29, 62, 135, 167, 191, 200, 201, 204 relative, 3, 6, 9, 10, 15, 30, 35,38,51,67,95,134,136, 145, 174 inequalities, 2 lemma, 192 theory, 184 relative, 15 Morse-Smale condition, 3, 15, 28, 42, 44, 221 mountain-pass lemma, 192 normal bundle, 12, 70, 72, 75, 76, 182 normalization, 194 one-sided operator, 157 orbit space, 54 orientation, 112 and gluing, 113
_, _,, _. __ 0
INDEX canonical, 134, 138, 142, 147, 163, 222 coherent, 103, 129, 131, 135, 137,151,153,155,157,158, 200 geometric, 222, 226 of Fredholm operators, 103, 107 of trajectory manifolds, 134 Palais-Smale condition, 55, 62 Poincare duality, 13, 114, 156, 200 product cross, 205 homological, 204 cup, 13,205 tensor, 202 projection, 175, 177 quotient complex, 180, 184 regularity, 49 reparametrization, 52, 56,64,89,94 Sard-Smale, theorem of, 41, 44 section functor, 24, 207 shifting-invariance, 134 short exact sequence, 184, 186 Sobolev embedding, 24 spectral flow, 15, 30, 35, 78 splitting-up, 15, 61 stable manifold, 159, 161, 192, 221 steep, 181, 182, 185, 188 tangent bundle, 218 Thorn isomorphism, 183, 206 Tietze, theorem of, 164 time-shifting, 9, 52, 71, 96,122,138, 222 trajectory A-parametrized, 10, 50,67, 144 h-, 63, 98 broken, 15, 51, 56, 63, 76, 81, 88, 148 gradient, 28 homotopy, 98
,,__
-:"'_~~"',""",:~.,
~
_,_<
•• -'1iiIIIilt~,::"
~,._
..
~-N- .':-"~,"~:C~""~-'~-_~ :~::-
,.~~.
....:;.: .
.._
~.
._,_
".'_"'.
j"'.:.__ "_"C'.' ,...... _.•. _.""""i
'"~,~..
••_~"",
._~
__.
"~_.
0'. __' ' ' ' _
__._~.
_.~.~"
"",'iL ,,,,,,: ;·.o''-'.'''c~""",_,%'._.,~,,~ .. :-~.~,~.,; '·~'-'·':·o"f,~.c-!i.,~· .,:'
INDEX isolated, 4, 52, 133, 141, 145, 153,162,173,191,193,200, 203, 204, 221, 222 manifold, 21, 25, 52, 67, 133 mixed broken, 96, 142 parametrized, 221 simply broken, 52, 69, 93, 95, 137 space, 8, 15, 21, 28, 49, 51 A-parametrized, 22 time-dependent, 22 time-independent, 21 unparametrized, 54, 88 time-dependent, 9, 26, 28 time-independent, 52 unparametrized, 52, 54, 55, 69, 88 transversal, 14, 42, 54 transversality, 28, 42, 49 tubular neighbourhood, 205 uniqueness category, 194, 198 unstable manifold, 159, 162, 221 vector bundle, 183 weak convergence, 56, 61, 64, 66, 69,93, 148
. ' . _ . _ _ .• _ .. ~~.
~
,_
<
.•• _.~,_~~•• "_,,_"',,_,_•••• ~.~
•
~
._,.,,
-:.• ~~.'i±~<-"~,,,,~',"·~i"}~~",;-.z."""~t~"'·:'·:''''·~-''''''''''''~~
235
•